For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
2021 NISSAN MURANO Z52-D
Z52-D
Printing : June 2021
Publication No.:
Printed in the U.S.A.
OM21EA 0Z52U1
2021 MURANO
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger
vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This manual was prepared to help you un-
derstand the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many
miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before
operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Book-
let explains details about the warranties
covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual
explains details about maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a
separate Customer Care/Lemon Law
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-
solve any concerns you may have with
your vehicle, and clarify your rights un-
der your state's lemon law.
When you require any service or have any
questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to
assist you with the extensive resources
available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options,
your vehicle may also be equipped with
additional accessories installed prior to de-
livery. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your ve-
hicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions con-
cerning proper use of such accessories
prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-
cessory. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your ve-
hicle is equipped.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance
requirements, assisting you in the safe op-
eration of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
• NEVER drive under the influence of
alcohol or drugs.
•
ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
• ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle fea-
tures or taking other actions that
could distract you.
• ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-
propriate child restraint systems.
Pre-teen children should be seated in
the rear seat.
• ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety fea-
tures to all occupants of the vehicle.
• ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
For descriptions specified for all-wheel drive
models, an AWD mark is placed at the begin-
ning of the applicable sections/items.
As with other vehicles with features for
off- road use, failure to operate all-wheel
drive models correctly may result in loss
of control or an accident. For additional
information, see “Driving safety precau-
tions” (P. 5-10).
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger
car because it has a higher center of
gravity for off-road use. As with other
vehicles with features of this type, fail-
ure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or an accident.
For additional information, see “On-
pavement and off-road driving precau-
tions” (P. 5-8), “Avoiding collision and
roll-over” (P. 5-9) and “Driving safety
precautions” (P. 5-10).
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its perfor-
mance, safety, emissions or durability
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or per-
formance problems resulting from
modifications may not be covered un-
der NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-
agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for ex-
ample remote insurance company
monitoring, remote vehicle diagnos-
tics, telematics or engine reprogram-
ming, may cause interference or dam-
age to vehicle systems. We do not
recommend or endorse the use of any
aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, un-
less specifically approved by NISSAN.
The vehicle warranty may not cover
damage caused by any aftermarket
plug-in device.
This manual includes information for all
features and equipment available on this
model. Features and equipment in your ve-
hicle may vary depending on model, trim
level, options selected, order, date of pro-
duction, region or availability. Therefore,
you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or in-
stalled on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustra-
tions in this manual are those in effect at
the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the
right to change specifications, perfor-
mance, design or component suppliers
without notice and without obligation.
From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with
the most accurate information currently
available. Please carefully read and retain
with this manual all revision updates sent
to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-
cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-
tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-
sions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner
section of the NISSAN website at https://
owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide. If you have
questions concerning any information in
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Con-
sumer Affairs. For contact information, re-
fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-
GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or se-
rious personal injury. To avoid or re-
duce the risk, the procedures must be
followed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed
car efully.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration,it means the arrow points to the
front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the
illustration.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
teries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Per-
chlorate Material – special handling may
apply. For additional information, refer
to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.
© 2021 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, me-
chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-
erwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of Nissan North America, Inc.
APD1005
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or
you would like to provide NISSAN directly
with comments or questions, please con-
tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-
ment using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone
number
– Vehicle identification number (attached
to the top of the instrument panel on the
driver's side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer's name
– Your comments or questions
OR
You can write to NISSAN with the informa-
tion at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumer[email protected]om
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.c[email protected]om
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
Table of
contents
Illustrated table of contents
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Starting and driving
In case of emergency
Appearance and care
Do-it-yourself
Maintenance and schedules
Technical and consumer information
Index
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..........0-2
Ex terior front ....................................0-3
Ex terior rear .....................................0-4
Passenger compartment .......................0-5
Instrument panel................................0-6
Engine compartment check locations...........0-8
Warning and indicator lights.....................0-9
1. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P. 1-50)
2. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) (P. 1-50)
3. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-12)
4. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and
shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-13, 1-50)
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-50)
6. Rear seat center seat belt (located on
ceiling) (P. 1-13)
7. Rear outboard seat-mounted
side-impact supplemental air bag
(P. 1-50)
8. Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(rear outboard seats) (driver’s side
shown; passenger’s side similar) (P. 1-13)
9. Rear outboard seat top tether strap
anchor (located on bottom of seat-
back) (P. 1-27)
10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P. 1-27)
11. Folding rear bench seat (P. 1-2)
12. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-50)
13. Front seats (P. 1-2)
14. Driver supplemental knee air bag
(P. 1-50)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LIC4614
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
1. Front view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-11)
2. Engine hood (P. 3-21)
3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-33)
4. Windshield (P. 8-17)
5. Power windows (P. 2-61)
6. Door locks (P. 3-5)
NISSAN Intelligent Key® system (P. 3-7)
Keys (P. 3-2)
7. Mirrors (P. 3-34)
Side view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-11)
8. Tire pressure (P. 8-27)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-27)
9. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-25)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-36)
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system (P. 2-36)
10. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-36)
11. Front sonar sensors (if so equipped)
(P. 5-125)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2613
EXTERIOR FRONT
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
1. Rearview camera (P. 4-3)
2. Rear wiper and washer switch (P. 2-33)
3. Liftgate release (P. 3-22)
4. Rear sonar sensors (P. 5-125)
5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-25)
6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-28)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-4)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-28)
7. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2576
EXTERIOR REAR
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
1. Glove box (P. 2-53)
2. Rearview mirror (P. 3-34)
3. Console box (P. 2-53)
4. Map lights (P. 2-66)
5. Power moonroof (if so equipped)
(P. 2-64)
6. Luggage hooks (P. 2-53)
7. Center armrest (P. 1-6)
8. Sun visors (P. 3-32)
9. Cup holders (P. 2-53)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2615
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
1. Vent (P. 4-27)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/
turn signal switch (P. 2-36)
3. Supplemental air bag (P. 1-50)
Horn (P. 2-43)
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)
Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-8)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-17)
5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-33)
Rear window wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-33)
6. Audio system/Center display controls*
7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
8. Center display*
Navigation display (if so equipped)*
9. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-50)
10. Glove box (P. 2-53)
11. Front passenger supplemental knee air
bag (P. 1-50)
12. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-50)
13. Power outlet (P. 2-51)
14. USB ports*
AUX jack*
15. Heater and air conditioning controls
(P. 4-29)
16. Shift lever (P. 5-18)
17. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-13)
18. Cruise control switches (if so equipped)
(P. 5-55)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-58)
19. Driver supplemental knee air bag
(P. 1-50)
20. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System/
Audio control switches*
21. Hood release (P. 3-21)
Fuel door release (P. 3-28)
LII2574
INSTRUMENT PANEL
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
22. Fuse box (P. 8-19)
23. Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-47)
Dynamic driver assistance switch
(P. 2-48)
Liftgate instrument panel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-22)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-49)
24. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-42)
Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-4)
*: Refer to the separate NissanConnect
®
Owner's Manual.
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
3.5L 6 cylinder (VQ35DE engine model)
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)
2. Drive belt location (P. 8-15)
3. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)
4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)
5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)
6. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)
7. Fuse box (P. 8-19)
8. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-19)
9. Battery (P. 8-13)
10. Radiator cap (P. 8-4)
11. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)
12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-12)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with
an engine cover.
LDI3345
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Warning/
Indicator
light (red)
Name Page
or
Brake warning
light
2-9
Charge warning
light
2-9
Engine oil pres-
sure warning light
2-10
Master warning
light
2-10
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-10
Warning/
Indicator
light (red)
Name Page
Security indicator
light
2-10
Supplemental air
bag warning light
2-10
Warning/
Indicator
light
(yellow)
Name Page
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
2-11
Warning/
Indicator
light
(yellow)
Name Page
Automatic Emer-
gency Braking
(AEB) with Pedes-
trian Detection
system warning
light
2-11
Front passenger
air bag status
light
2-11
Low tire pressure
warning light
2-12
Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)
2-13
Master warning
light
2-14
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Warning/
Indicator
light
(yellow)
Name Page
Power steering
warning light
2-14
Rear Automatic
Braking (RAB) sys-
tem warning light
2-15
Slip indicator light 2-15
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light
2-15
Warning/
Indicator
light
(other)
Name Page
Front fog light
indicator light
(green) (if so
equipped)
2-16
High Beam Assist
indicator light
(green)
2-16
High beam indi-
cator light (blue)
2-16
Side light and
headlight indica-
tor light (green)
2-16
Turn signal/
hazard indicator
lights (green)
2-16
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
1 Safety-Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats............................................ 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment
(if so equipped) ................................1-3
Front power seat adjustment
(if so equipped) ............................... 1-4
Rear bench seat adjustment ................. 1-6
Armrests .....................................1-6
Flexible seating ................................1-7
Head restraints/headrests ...................... 1-9
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components .................................1-10
Non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest components .......................1-10
Remove......................................1-10
Install ........................................1-11
Adjust ........................................1-11
Seatbelts .......................................1-13
Precautions on seat belt usage...............1-13
Seat belt warning light and chime ............1-16
Pregnant women ............................1-16
Injured persons ..............................1-16
Three-point type seat belt with
retractor .....................................1-17
Seat belt extenders .........................1-24
Seat belt maintenance ......................1-24
Child safety ....................................1-25
Infants ......................................1-26
Small children ...............................1-26
Larger children ..............................1-26
Child restraints .................................1-27
Precautions on child restraints .............. 1-27
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system ............................1-29
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH ................................ 1-33
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts .........................1-35
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using LATCH ..................... 1-37
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts ..............1-41
Booster seats ...............................1-46
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..........1-50
Precautions on SRS .........................1-50
Supplemental air bag warning labels ........1-70
Supplemental air bag warning light ..........1-71
WARNING
• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
• For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
well back and upright in the seat with
both feet on the floor and adjust the
seat properly. For additional infor-
mation, see “Precautions on seat belt
usage” (P. 1-13).
• After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely
locked.
• Do not leave children unattended in-
side the vehicle. They could unknow-
ingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in
serious accidents.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require
the assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
• Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. The seat may
move suddenly and could cause loss
of control of the vehicle.
• The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when
the passenger sits well back and
straight up in the seat. If the seatback
is reclined, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and being injured is
increased.
ARS1152
SEATS
1-2 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-
ally. For additional information about ad-
justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.
Forward and backward
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it
while you slide the seat forward or back-
ward to the desired position. Release the
bar to lock the seat in position.
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
and lean back. To bring the seatback for-
ward, pull the lever up and lean your body
forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-
back in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different sizes
for added comfort and to help obtain proper
seat belt fit. For additional information, see
“Precautions on seat belt usage” (P. 1-13). Also,
the seatback can be reclined to allow occu-
pants to rest when the vehicle is stopped
and the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
LRS2160 LRS2161
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Seat lifter (driver's seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
adjust the seat height until the desired po-
sition is achieved.
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(if so equipped)
Operating tips
• The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds
then reactivate the switch.
• Do not operate the power seat switch for
a long period of time when the engine is
off. This will discharge the battery.
For additional information, see “Memory
seat” (P. 3-36).
Forward and backward
Moving the switch as shown will slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired
position.
Reclining
Move the recline switch as shown until the
desired angle is obtained.
LRS2202 LRS2662
1-4 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes for added comfort and to help obtain
proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-
tion, see “Precautions on seat belt usage”
(P. 1-13). Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle
is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).
Seat lifter (driver's seat)
Move the switch as shown to adjust the
angle and height of the seat cushion.
Lumbar suppor t (driver's seat)
The lumbar support feature provides ad-
justable lower back support to the driver.
Push the switch as shown to adjust the
seatback lumbar area.
LRS2636 LRS2270
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
REAR BENCH SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Reclining
Pull the reclining strap
O
A
and position the
seatback at the desired angle. Release the
reclining strap after positioning the seat at
the desired angle.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different
sizes to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For
additional information, see “Precautions on
seat belt usage” (P. 1-13). The seatback may
also be reclined to allow occupants to rest
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING
• After adjustment, check to be sure
the seat is securely locked.
• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
• For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
well back and upright in the seat with
both feet on the floor and adjust the
seat belt properly. For additional in-
formation, see “Precautions on seat
belt usage” (P. 1-13).
ARMRESTS
The rear bench center armrest is locked in
the up position. To lower the armrest, pull
the armrest down as shown.
To return the armrest to the up position,
push up on the armrest until it is in the full
up position.
LRS2635 LRS2588
1-6 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
FLEXIBLE SEATING
WARNING
• Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seats when
they are in the fold-down position. In
a collision, people riding in these ar-
eas without proper restraints are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
a seat and using a seat belt properly.
• Do not allow more than one person
to use the same seat belt.
• Do not fold down the rear seats when
occupants are in the rear seat area or
any luggage is on the rear seats.
– Make sure that the seat path is
clear before moving the seat.
– Be careful not to allow hands or
feet to get caught or pinched in
the seat.
• Head restraints/headrests should be
adjusted properly as they may pro-
vide significant protection against
injury in an accident. Always replace
and adjust them properly if they have
been removed for any reason.
• If the head restraints/headrests are
removed for any reason, they should
be securely stored to prevent them
from causing injury to passengers or
damage to the vehicle in case of sud-
den braking or an accident.
• When returning rear row seatbacks
to the upright position, the operator
should always verify that the back is
locked in the upright position by gen-
tly rocking the seatback before al-
lowing passengers to occupy the
rear seats. If they are not completely
secured, passengers may be injured
in an accident or sudden stop.
• Properly secure all cargo to help pre-
vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause per-
sonal injury.
Folding the rear bench seat
Before folding the rear seats:
• Disconnect and secure the center seat
belt and tongue into the retractor base.
For additional information, see “Stowing
the rear center seat belt” (P. 1-20).
• Secure the seat belts on the seat belt
hooks on the side wall. For additional in-
formation, see “Seat belt hook” (P. 1-24).
• Remove drink containers from the rear
cup holder.
LRS2589
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
To fold down the seatbacks:
1. Pull the strap on the rear seat.
or
2. Pull the lever beside the cargo area and
fold the seatback.
To return the seatbacks:
1. Lift up each seatback and push it to the
upright position until it is latched.
2. Always reconnect the center seat belt
when the seat is returned to the upright
position.
WARNING
• When returning the seatbacks, be
sure to attach the rear center seat
belt connector.
• Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
• When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the
seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position and the rear
center seat belt connector is com-
pletely secured.
• If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured in
the correct position, serious personal
injury may result in an accident or
sudden stop.
LRS2590 LRS2853
1-8 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end colli-
sions. Adjustable head restraints/
headrests must be adjusted properly,
as specified in this section. Check the
adjustment after someone else uses
the seat. Do not attach anything to the
head restraint/headrest stalk, except
for Genuine NISSAN accessories spe-
cifically tested for use with the vehicle’s
head restraint/headrest stalk. Do not
remove the head restraint/headrest.
Do not use the seat if the head
restraint/headrest has been removed.
If the head restraint/headrest was re-
moved, reinstall and properly adjust
the head restraint/headrest before an
occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions can
reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may in-
crease the risk of serious injury or
death in a collision.
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position is
equipped with a head restraint.
쮿 Indicates the seating position is
equipped with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).
• Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be inte-
grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
• Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.
• The non-adjustable head restraints/
headrests have a single locking notch to
secure them to the seat frame.
• Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the head
restraint/headrest so the center of your
ear is approximately level with the center
of the head restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the
head restraint/headrest at the highest
position.
• If the head restraint/headrest has been
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and
locked in place before riding in that des-
ignated seating position.
LRS2403
HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint/headrest:
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest prop-
erly in a secure place so it is not loose in
the vehicle.
LRS2300 LRS2299 LRS2302
1-10 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks
with the holes in the seat. Make sure that
the head restraint/headrest is facing the
correct direction. The stalk with the
notch (notches)
O
1
must be installed in
the hole with the lock knob
O
2
.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position.
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
center is level with the center of your ears. If
your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
LRS2303 WRS0134
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it
up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
LRS2305 LRS2306
1-12 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on the
floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.
SSS0136
SEAT BELTS
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
WARNING
• Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.
WARNING
• The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so
may reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn
properly.
SSS0134 SSS0016
1-14 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
• Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck.
The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
• Position the lap belt as low and snug
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
could increase the risk of internal in-
juries in an accident.
• Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-
curely fastened to the proper buckle.
• Do not wear the seat belt inside out
or twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
• Do not allow more than one person
to use the same seat belt.
• Never carry more people in the ve-
hicle than there are seat belts.
• If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and
all seat belts fastened, it may indi-
cate a malfunction in the system.
Have the system checked. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
• No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do not
modify the seat belt, add material, or
install devices that may change the
seat belt routing or tension. Doing so
may affect the operation of the seat
belt system. Modifying or tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.
• Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have
activated, they cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
retractor. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any colli-
sion. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN recommends that all seat
belt assemblies in use during a colli-
sion be replaced unless the collision
was minor and the belts show no
damage and continue to operate
properly. Seat belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be
inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is
noted.
• All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the re-
straint manufacturer's inspection in-
structions and replacement recom-
mendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.
SSS0014
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND
CHIME
The driver and front passenger seat is
equipped with an enhanced seat belt re-
minder function. If your vehicle is equipped
with an enhanced seat belt reminder func-
tion, a visual and audible alert will operate if
a driver or front passenger seat belt is un-
buckled at speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h) or more under the following con-
ditions:
• If the driver seat belt is not fastened.
• The front passenger’s seat belt is not fas-
tened and the seat is occupied by a pas-
senger for 7 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
• The front passenger’s seat belt is not fas-
tened and objects or external force on
the passenger seat change the seat belt
reminder classification to Occupied.
The seat belt warning light will flash under
the conditions shown above until the nec-
essary seat belt is securely fastened.
A warning chime will sound for approxi-
mately 90 seconds or until one of the fol-
lowing conditions is met:
• The unbuckled front occupant’s seat belt
is securely fastened.
• The seat belt reminder function in the
front passenger seat no longer detects
that the front passenger seat is occupied.
• The ignition is turned off or the vehicle is
placed in P (Park).
The below situations could result in the
seat belt reminder light being illuminated
and the chime sounding, even with no oc-
cupant present in the passenger seat:
• Heavy objects placed on the seat.
• Someone pushing or pulling on the front
passenger seat.
• An object placed under the front passen-
ger seat.
• An object placed between the seat cush-
ion and center console or between the
seat cushion and the door.
• An object hanging on the seat or placed
in the seatback pocket.
• A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant
women use seat belts. The seat belt should
be worn snug and always position the lap
belt as low as possible around the hips, not
the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never run
the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal
area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
specific recommendations.
LRS0786
1-16 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
• Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.
• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
• For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
well back and upright in the seat with
both feet on the floor and adjust the
seat belt properly.
• Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If
the seat belt becomes wrapped
around a child’s neck with the ALR
mode activated, the child can be se-
riously injured or killed if the seat belt
retracts and becomes tight. This can
occur even if the vehicle is parked.
Unbuckle the seat belt to release the
child. If the seat belt cannot be un-
buckled or is already unbuckled, re-
lease the child by cutting the seat
belt with a suitable tool (such as a
knife or scissors) to release the seat
belt.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-
tion, see “Seats” (P. 1-2).
LRS2160
Manual front seat shown (if so
equipped)
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retrac-
tor and insert the tongue into the buckle
O
A
until you hear and feel the latch
engage.
• The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
seat belt to move and allows you
some freedom of movement in the
seat.
• If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.
LRS2662
Power front seat shown (if so equipped)
LRS2674
1-18 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips
O
B
as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack
O
C
.Be
sure the shoulder belt is routed over
your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear
seating positions’ three-point seat belts
have two modes of operation:
• Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
• Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-
tend and retract to allow the driver and
passengers some freedom of movement
in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-
turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
fully retracts. For additional information,
see “Child restraints” (P. 1-27).
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During nor-
mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is ac-
tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension. It can also change the op-
eration of the front passenger air bag.
For additional information, see “Front
passenger air bag and status light”
(P. 1-60).
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be cer-
tain that the seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passen-
gers may be injured in an accident or
sudden stop.
LRS2675
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
on the buckle
O
1
. The seat belt automati-
cally retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock
seat belt movement by two separate
methods:
• When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor
• When the vehicle slows down rapidly
To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
• Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service, or to learn more about seat
belt operation.
Rear center seat belt
The rear center seat belt has a connector
tongue
O
1
and a seat belt tongue
O
2
. Both
the connector tongue and the seat belt
tongue must be securely latched for
proper seat belt operation.
WRS0139 LRS2529
1-20 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
• Always fasten the connector tongue
and the seat belt in the order shown.
• Always make sure both the connec-
tor tongue and the seat belt tongue
are secured when using the seat belt
or installing a child restraint. Do not
use the seat belt or child restraint
with only the seat belt tongue at-
tached. This could result in serious
personal injury in case of an accident
or a sudden stop.
Stowing the rear center seat belt
When folding down the rear seat, the rear
center seat belt can be retracted into a
stowed position as follows:
1. Hold the connector tongue
O
1
so that
the seat belt does not retract suddenly
when the tongue is released from the
connector buckle. Release the connec-
tor tongue by inserting a suitable tool
such as a key
O
A
into the connector
buckle.
2. Insert the seat belt tongue into the re-
tractor base first
O
2
.
3. Then secure the connector tongue into
the retractor base
O
3
.
SSS0241
LRS2793
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
WARNING
• Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
• When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the
seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position and the rear
center seat belt connector is com-
pletely secured.
• If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured in
the correct position, serious personal
injury may result in an accident or
sudden stop.
Attaching the center seat belt
Always be sure the center seat belt con-
nector tongue and connector buckle are
attached. Disconnect only when folding
down the rear seat.
To connect the buckle:
1. Pull out the connector tongue from the
retractor base
O
1
.
2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the
retractor base
O
2
.
3. Pull the seat belt and secure the con-
nector buckle until it clicks
O
3
.
The center seat belt connector tongue can
be attached only into the rear center seat
belt connector buckle.
To fasten the seat belt, see "Fastening the
seat belts" (P. 1-17).
LRS3023
1-22 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
• Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
• When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the
seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position and the rear
center seat belt connector is com-
pletely secured.
• If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured in
the correct position, serious personal
injury may result in an accident or
sudden stop.
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. For
additional information, see “Precautions on
seat belt usage” (P. 1-13). To adjust, pull out
the adjustment button
O
1
and move the
shoulder belt anchor to the desired posi-
tion
O
2
, so the belt passes over the center
of the shoulder. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.Release the adjustment but-
ton to lock the shoulder belt anchor into
position.
WARNING
• After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in
position.
• The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may re-
duce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an
accident.
LRS0242
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Seat belt hook
When the seat belt is not in use and when
folding down the rear seats, hook the rear
seat belts on the seat belt hooks.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the lap/
shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
that is compatible with the installed seat
belts is available for purchase. The ex-
tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and is available for the:
• Driver and front passenger seating
positions
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for assistance with purchasing an
extender if an extender is required.
WARNING
• Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.
• Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal injury
in the event of an accident.
• Never use seat belt ex tenders to in-
stall child restraints. If the child re-
straint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
• To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution rec-
ommended for cleaning upholstery or
carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow
the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
allow the seat belts to retract until they
are completely dry.
• If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoul-
der belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
• Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such
as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors, work properly. If loose
parts, deterioration, cuts or other dam-
age on the webbing is found, the entire
seat belt assembly should be replaced.
LRS2851
1-24 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-
lease the child. If the seat belt cannot
be unbuckled or is already unbuckled,
release the child by cutting the seat
belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife
or scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, includ-
ing doctors, teachers, government traffic
safety offices, and community organiza-
tions. Every child is different, so be sure to
learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child re-
straint systems:
• Rear-facing child restraints
• Forward-facing child restraints
• Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child's
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year
and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed
in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-
facing child restraints are available for chil-
dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-
straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special pro-
tection. The vehicle's seat belts may
not fit them properly. The shoulder belt
may come too close to the face or neck.
The lap belt may not fit over their small
hip bones. In an accident, an improp-
erly fitting seat belt could cause serious
or fatal injury. Always use appropriate
child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children.
For additional information, see “Child re-
straints” (P. 1-27).
A child restraint may be secured in the ve-
hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-
chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or
with the vehicle seat belt. For additional
information, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-27).
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because
your vehicle has a supplemental re-
straint system (air bag system) for the
front passenger. For additional informa-
tion, see “Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS)” (P. 1-50).
CHILD SAFETY
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN
recommends that infants be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose
a child restraint that fits your vehicle and
always follow the manufacturer's instruc-
tions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a rear-
facing child restraint as long as possible up
to the height or weight limit of the child re-
straint. Children who outgrow the height or
weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint
and are at least 1 year old should be secured
in a forward-facing child restraint with a har-
ness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN rec-
ommends that small children be placed in
child restraints that comply with Federal Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should
choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle
and always follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness until they reach
the maximum height or weight limit allowed
by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight
limit of the harness-equipped forward-
facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends
that the child be placed in a commercially
available booster seat to obtain proper
seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the
booster seat should raise the child so that
the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle por-
tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt
should not cross the neck or face and
should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt
should lie snugly across the lower hips or
upper thighs, not the abdomen.
A booster seat can only be used in seating
positions that have a three-point type seat
belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle
seat and have a label certifying that it com-
plies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. Once the child has
grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on
or near the face and neck and the lap belt
can be positioned properly across the
lower hips or upper thighs, use the seat belt
without the booster seat.
A booster seat should be used until the
child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
• Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
• Is the child able to sit without slouching?
• Do the child’s knees bend easily over the
front edge of the seat with feet flat on the
floor?
• Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap
belt low and snug across the hips and
shoulder belt across mid-chest and
shoulder)?
• Is the child able to use the properly ad-
justed head restraint/headrest?
• Will the child be able to stay in position for
the entire ride?
1-26 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
If you answered no to any of these ques-
tions, the child should remain in a booster
seat using a three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and
state regulations to confirm your child is
using the correct restraint system before
traveling.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
•
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in se-
rious injury or death of a child or other
passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
– The child restraint must be used
and installed properly. Always fol-
low all of the child restraint manu-
facturer's instructions for instal-
lation and use.
LRS2690 ARS1098
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
– Infants and children should never
be held on anyone's lap. Even the
strongest adult cannot resist the
forces of a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both
a child and another passenger.
–
NISSAN recommends that all child re-
straints be installed in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear
seat than in the front seat. If you must
install a forward-facing child restraint
in the front seat, see “Forward-facing
child restraint installation using the
seat belts” (P. 1-41).
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, never install a
rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat. An inflating air bag
could seriously injure or kill a child.
A rear-facing child restraint must
only be used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child re-
straint that will fit the child and
vehicle. Some child restraints may
not fit properly in your vehicle.
– Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used to at-
tach adult seat belts, or other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
Doing so could damage the child
restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly in-
stalled using the damaged an-
chorage, and a child could be
seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
– Never use the anchor points for
adult seat belts, or other items.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the
front passenger seat.
–
Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
sible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should al-
ways be placed in an appropriate
child restraint while in the vehicle.
• When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH sys-
tem or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose objects can injure oc-
cupants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating
sur face and buckles before placing a
child in the child restraint.
WRS0256
1-28 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
This vehicle is equipped with a universal
child restraint anchor system, referred to
as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system. Some child restraints
include rigid or webbing-mounted attach-
ments that can be connected to these an-
chors. For additional information, see
“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system” (P. 1-29).
If you do not have a LATCH compatible
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be
used.
Several manufacturers offer child re-
straints for infants and children of various
sizes. When selecting any child restraint,
keep the following points in mind:
• Choose only a restraint with a label certi-
fying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
• Check the child restraint in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's
seat and seat belt system.
• If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the child
restraint and check the various adjust-
ments to be sure the child restraint is
compatible with your child. Choose a
child restraint that is designed for your
child's height and weight. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
• If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg),
you may use either the LATCH anchors or
the seat belt to install the child restraint
(not both at the same time).
• If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
the lower anchors) to install the child
restraint.
•
Be sure to follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the ve-
hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-
quires the top tether strap on forward-
facing child restraints be secured to the
designated anchor point on the vehicle.
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special an-
chor points that are used with LATCH sys-
tem compatible child restraints. This sys-
tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint unless the
combined weight of the child and child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehi-
cle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
LRS3319
LATCH system lower anchor locations
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points can be used to
install child restraints in either the rear out-
board seating positions or in the center
rear seating position. Please refer to the
following section of this Owner’s Manual for
specific information about installing a child
restraint in the center rear seating position
using the LATCH anchors.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Only attach LATCH system compat-
ible child restraints to the Lower An-
chors shown in the illustration. For
additional information, refer to the
following sections of this Owner’s
Manual for installation guidance.
– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
ing your fingers into the lower an-
chor area. Feel to make sure there
are no obstructions over the an-
chors such as seat belt webbing or
seat cushion material. The child re-
straint will not be secured properly if
the lower anchors are obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child
restraint will not be properly installed
using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
shown. A label is attached to the seatback
to help you locate the LATCH lower
anchors.
LRS3036
1-30 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LATCH in the center rear seating
position
There are no LATCH anchors dedicated to
the center rear seating position. However,
the inboard LATCH anchors belonging to
the two outboard seating positions (indi-
cated by the arrows) can be used together
to secure a CRS in the center rear seating
position. These anchors are separated by a
distance
O
A
of 17.2 in (438.5 mm). Before
attempting to secure a CRS in this seating
position, ensure that the CRS manufactur-
er’s instructions permit the use of LATCH
anchors with the spacing indicated above.
(These are sometimes referred to as
“shared anchors” or “borrowed anchors.”)
CRS with rigid lower attachments cannot
be installed in the center seat. This type of
CRS should only be installed in the out-
board seating positions.
WARNING
Never attach two CRS attachments to
the same LATCH anchor. This may over-
load the anchor in a collision, which
could increase the risk of the occu-
pant’s serious injury or death.
When installing the CRS in the center
rear seating position with the inboard
LATCH anchors, be careful to ensure any
occupant or CRS in the outboard seat-
ing positions is properly restrained us-
ing the vehicle seat belt and there is no
inter ference with the center CRS instal-
lation. If the outboard occupants can-
not be properly restrained, consider us-
ing the vehicle seat belt to restrain the
CRS in the center seating position, or
moving the CRS to another position
instead.
When installing a CRS in the center
seating position, use the seat back re-
cline feature to align the left and right
sides of the seat back, creating one
evenly reclined surface. Never install a
CRS in the center seating position when
one part of the seat back is further re-
clined than the other. This may create
an unstable surface on which to install
the CRS. Failure to evenly recline the
seat backs before CRS installation
could increase the risk of the occu-
pant’s serious injury or death. Remem-
ber to re-check that the CRS is properly
installed any time the seats are re-
clined or adjusted.
LRS3318
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
Installing child restraint LATCH
lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-
ments that can be connected to two an-
chors located at certain seating positions
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint.Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.
Top tether anchor
WARNING
• Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to
the top tether anchor. Properly se-
cure the cargo so it does not contact
the top tether strap. Cargo that is not
properly secured or cargo that con-
tacts the top tether strap may dam-
age it during a collision. A child could
be seriously injured or killed in a col-
lision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
• Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage
the child restraint anchorages. The
child restraint will not be properly in-
stalled using the damaged anchor-
ages, and a child could be seriously
injured or killed in a collision.
LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
LRS0662
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
1-32 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located in the following
locations:
• Rear bench seat on the back side of the
seatback in the seating positions shown.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, see all Warnings
and Cautions in “Child safety” (P. 1-25) and
“Child restraints” (P. 1-27) before installing a
child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear bench seats using
the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer's instructions.
LRS2597
Rear bench seat
䊊
1
Top tether strap
䊊
2
Anchor point
LRS2997
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
Check to make sure the LATCH attach-
ment is properly attached to the lower
anchors.
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to com-
press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-
back while tightening the webbing of
the anchor attachments.
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the re-
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint or try installing by using the
LRS2996
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
LRS0673
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS0674
Rear-facing – step 4
1-34 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision.
For additional information, see all Warnings
and Cautions in “Child safety” (P. 1-25) and
“Child restraints” (P. 1-27) before installing a
child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the
seat. Always follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 1
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt re-
tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint
mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when
the seat belt is fully retracted.
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in
the belt.
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 2
LRS2395
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS2396
Rear-facing – step 4
1-36 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
5. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward
firmly in the center of the child restraint
to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the
seat belt.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try
to tug it forward and check to see if the
belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint.
Not all child restraints fit in all types of
vehicles.
7. Check to make sure that the child re-
straint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 1 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
For additional information, see all Warnings
and Cautions in “Child safety” (P. 1-25) and
“Child restraints” (P. 1-27) before installing a
child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions for installation.
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 5
LRS2397
Rear-facing – step 6
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
Follow these steps to install a forward-
facing child restraint in the rear bench
seats using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer's instructions.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.
Check to make sure the LATCH attach-
ment is properly attached to the lower
anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to the
tether anchor point. For additional infor-
mation, see “Installing top tether strap”
(P. 1-40).
LRS2995
Forward-facing webbing-mounted –
step 2
LRS2994
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
1-38 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Do not install child restraints that require
the use of a top tether strap in seating
positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
child restraint fit. If the head restraint/
headrest is removed, store it in a secure
place. Be sure to reinstall the head
restraint/headrest when the child re-
straint is removed. For additional infor-
mation, see “Head restraints/headrests”
(P. 1-9).
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and
it is interfering with the proper child re-
straint fit, try another seating position or
a different child restraint.
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your knee to com-
press the vehicle seat cushion and seat-
back while tightening the webbing of
the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer's instructions to re-
move any slack.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the re-
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
LRS0671
Forward-facing – step 4
WRS0697
Forward-facing – step 6
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 6.
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors.
Rear bench seat
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed.
For additional information, see “Head
restraints/headrests” (P. 1-9).
2. Position the top tether strap
O
1
as
shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-
chor point
O
2
as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
If you have any questions when install-
ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
LRS2597
Rear bench seat
䊊
1
Top tether strap
䊊
2
Anchor point
1-40 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child
restraint will not be properly installed
using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result
in the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front pas-
senger air bag. For additional informa-
tion, see “Front passenger air bag and
status light” (P. 1-60).
For additional information, see all Warnings
and Cautions in “Child safety” (P. 1-25) and
“Child restraints” (P. 1-27) before installing a
child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions for installation.
WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Follow these steps to install a forward-
facing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt in the rear seats or in the front passen-
ger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and,
therefore, must not be used in the
front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
child restraint fit. If the head restraint/
headrest is removed, store it in a secure
place. Be sure to reinstall the head
restraint/headrest when the child re-
straint is removed. For additional infor-
mation, see “Head restraints/headrests”
(P. 1-9).
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and
it is interfering with the proper child re-
straint fit, try another seating position or
a different child restraint.
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to the
tether anchor point. For additional infor-
mation, see “Installing top tether strap”
(P. 1-40).
WRS0680
Forward-facing – step 3
1-42 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Do not install child restraints that require
the use of a top tether strap in seating
positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt re-
tractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint
mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the
seat belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in
the belt.
LRS2394
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 5
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rear-
ward firmly in the center of the child re-
straint with your knee to compress the
vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer's instructions to remove
any slack.
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try
to tug it forward and check to see if the
belt holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint.
Not all child restraints fit in all types of
vehicles.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 8
1-44 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front
passenger air bag status light
should illuminate. If this light is not illu-
minated see “Front passenger air bag
and status light” (P. 1-60). Move the child
restraint to another seating position.
Have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.
Rear bench seat
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed.
For additional information, see “Head
restraints/headrests” (P. 1-9).
2. Position the top tether strap
O
1
as
shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether an-
chor point
O
2
as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
If you have any questions when install-
ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
LRS0865
Forward-facing – step 10
LRS2597
Rear row bench seat
䊊
1
Top tether strap
䊊
2
Anchor point
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child
restraint will not be properly installed
using the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-
structions outlined in this section.
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-
lision greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child's face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child's
arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a lap/
shoulder belt.
LRS2479
A. Low back booster seat
B. High back booster seat
1-46 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following points
in mind:
• Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Ca-
nadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
• Check the booster seat in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s
seat and seat belt system.
• Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above
the center of the child’s ears. For example,
if a low back booster seat is chosen, the
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
high back booster seat should be used.
• If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place the child in the booster
seat and check the various adjustments
to be sure the booster seat is compatible
with the child. Always follow all recom-
mended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the ve-
hicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats
or the front passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-
ing a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, see all Warnings
and Cautions in “Child safety” (P. 1-25) and
“Child restraints” (P. 1-27) before installing a
child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the rear bench seats or in the front pas-
senger seat:
LRS0453 LRS0464
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rear-
most position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manu-
facturer’s instructions.
WRS0699 LRS0454
Front passenger position
LRS0451
Rear center position
1-48 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the correct
booster seat fit. If the head restraint/
headrest is removed, store it in a secure
place. Be sure to reinstall the head
restraint/headrest when the booster
seat is removed. For additional infor-
mation, see “Head restraints/headrests”
(P. 1-9).
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint/headrest and
it is interfering with the proper booster
seat fit, try another seating position or a
different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure
to follow the booster seat manufactur-
er’s instructions for adjusting the seat
belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat
belt toward the retractor to take up ex-
tra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the top, middle por-
tion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions for adjusting the seat belt
routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-
structions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat belt
with retractor” (P. 1-17).
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch
in the ON position. The front passenger
air bag status light
may or may not
illuminate, depending on the size of the
child and the type of booster seat being
used. For additional information, see
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” (P. 1-60).
LRS0452
Rear outboard position
LRS0865
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important infor-
mation concerning the following systems:
• Driver and front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System)
• Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
•
Rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag
• Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
• Driver and front passenger supplemental
knee air bags
• Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front and
rear outboard seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag
system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head
and chest of the driver and front passenger
in certain frontal collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and
front passenger in certain side-impact col-
lisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.
Rear outboard seat-mounted side-
impact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the rear outboard
seat passengers in certain side-impact
collisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in front and
rear outboard seating positions in certain
side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags
are designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the
curtain air bags are designed to inflate and
remain inflated for a short time.
Driver and front passenger supplemen-
tal knee air bags
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the driver’s and front passenger’s
knees in certain collisions.
The SRS is designed to supplement the
crash protection provided by the driver and
front passenger and rear outboard seat
belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat
belts should always be correctly worn and
the occupant seated a suitable distance
away from the steering wheel, instrument
panel and door finishers. For additional in-
formation, see “Seat belts” (P. 1-13).
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
1-50 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
• The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower sever-
ity frontal collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents
• The front passenger air bag and front
passenger supplemental knee air
bag will not inflate if the passenger
air bag status light is lit. For addi-
tional information, see “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light”
(P. 1-60).
• The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are sit-
ting well back and upright in the seat.
The front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System, if you are un-
restrained, leaning forward, sitting
sideways or out of position in any
way, you are at greater risk of injury
or death in a crash. You may also re-
ceive serious or fatal injuries from
the front air bag if you are up against
it when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far away
as practical from the steering wheel
or instrument panel. Always properly
use the seat belts.
• The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sen-
sors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of
a collision and seat belt usage, then
inflates the air bags as needed. Fail-
ure to properly wear seat belts can
increase the risk or severity of injury
in an accident.
WRS0031
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
• The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sen-
sor (weight sensor) that turns the
front passenger air bag and front
passenger supplemental knee air
bag OFF under some conditions. This
sensor is only used in this seat. Fail-
ure to be properly seated and wear-
ing the seat belt can increase the risk
or severity of injury in an accident.
For additional information, see
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” (P. 1-60).
• Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could increase
the risk that they are injured when
the front air bag inflates.
ARS1133
1-52 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
• Never let children ride unrestrained
or extend their hands or face out of
the window. Do not attempt to hold
them in your lap or arms. Some ex-
amples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the illustrations.
WARNING
• Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-
teens and children should be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat, if
possible.
ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
WARNING
• Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating front air bag could seri-
ously injure or kill your child. For ad-
ditional information, see “Child re-
straints” (P. 1-27).
ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046
1-54 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
Front and rear outboard seat-mounted
side-impact supplemental air bags and
roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags:
• The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event
of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.
WARNING
• The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on
the floor. The side air bag and curtain
air bag inflate with great force. Do not
allow anyone to place their hand, leg
or face near the side air bag on the
side of the seatback of the front and
rear seat or near the side roof rails.
Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window
or lean against the door. Some ex-
amples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the previous
illustrations.
WRS0431 LRS3119
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
WARNING
• When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be espe-
cially careful with children, who
should always be properly re-
strained. Some examples of danger-
ous riding positions are shown in the
illustrations.
• Do not use seat covers on the front or
rear seatbacks. They may interfere
with side air bag inflation.
WRS0032 SSS0162 SSS0159
1-56 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
3. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor)
4. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bags
6. Roof-mounted cur tain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag inflators
7.
Rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
8. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (rear out-
board seats)
9. Satellite sensors (driver ’s side shown;
passengers side similar)
10. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
11. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
12. Driver and front passenger supple-
mental knee air bags
13. Crash zone sensor
LRS3179
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the pas-
senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, please observe the following
items.
• Do not allow a passenger in the rear
bench seats to push or pull on the
seatback pocket.
• Do not place heavy loads heavier
than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback,
head restraint/headrest or in the
seatback pocket.
• Make sure that there is nothing
pressing against the rear of the seat-
back, such as a child restraint in-
stalled in the rear seat or an object
stored on the floor.
• Make sure that there is no object
placed under the front passenger
seat.
• Make sure that there is no object
placed between the seat cushion and
center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.
• If a forward-facing child restraint is
installed in the front passenger seat,
do not position the front passenger
seat so the child restraint contacts
the instrument panel. If the child re-
straint does contact the instrument
panel, the system may determine the
seat is occupied and the passenger
air bag and front passenger supple-
mental knee air bag may deploy in a
collision. Also the front passenger air
bag status light may not illuminate.
For additional information, see “Child
restraints” (P. 1-27).
• Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status
light.
• If you notice that the front passenger
air bag status light is not operating
as described in this section, get the
occupant classification system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• Until you have confirmed with a
dealer that your passenger seat oc-
cupant classification system is work-
ing properly, position the occupants
in the rear seating positions.
• Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
the air bag system may determine a
sensor malfunction has occurred
and the front passenger air bag sta-
tus light may illuminate and the
supplemental air bag warning light
may flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is de-
signed to meet certification requirements
under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada. All of the information, cautions
and warnings in this manual still apply
and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the steering
wheel. The front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The front
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher
severity frontal impact. They may not in-
flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle
1-58 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-
cation of proper front air bag system
operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat
belt buckle sensors and occupation classi-
fication sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op-
eration is based on the severity of a colli-
sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For
the front passenger, the occupant classifi-
cation sensor is also monitored. Based on
information from the sensor, only one front
air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on
the crash severity and whether the front
occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi-
tionally, the front passenger air bag and
front passenger supplemental knee air
bag may be automatically turned off under
some conditions, depending on the weight
detected on the front passenger seat and
how the seat belt is used. If the front pas-
senger air bag and front passenger
supplemental knee air bag are OFF, the
front passenger air bag status light will be
illuminated. For additional information, see
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
(P. 1-60). One front air bag inflating does not
indicate improper performance of the
system.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information
about the system. If you are considering
modification of your vehicle due to a dis-
ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-
tact information is contained in the front of
this Owner's Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the re-
lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-
tion and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce seri-
ous injuries. However, an inflating front air
bag may cause facial abrasions or other
injuries. Front air bags, other than the driv-
er’s knee air bag, do not provide restraint to
the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and front passenger seated upright
as far as practical away from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. The front air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can in-
crease the risk of injury if the occupant is
too close to, or is against, the front air bag
module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
Front passenger air bag and status
light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag and front
passenger supplemental knee air bag
are designed to automatically turn OFF
under some conditions. Read this sec-
tion carefully to learn how it operates.
Proper use of the seat, seat belt, and
child restraints is necessary for most
effective protection. Failure to follow all
instructions in this manual concerning
the use of seats, seat belts, and child
restraints can increase the risk or se-
verity of injury in an accident.
Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with
an occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) that turns the front passenger air
bag and front passenger supplemental
knee air bag on or off depending on the
weight applied to the front passenger seat.
The status of the front passenger air bag
and front passenger supplemental knee
air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front
passenger air bag status light
which
is located on the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
status light on the instrument panel illumi-
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
CONDITION DESCRIPTION
PASSENGER AIR BAG
STATUS LIGHT (
)
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG AND FRONT PASSENGER
SUPPLEMENTAL KNEE AIR BAG STATUS
Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED
Nobody/Somebody
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Small Adult in front passenger seat
ON (illuminated) INHIBITED
Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED
In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may
also cause the light to operate as de-
scribed above depending on their weight.
For additional information, see “Normal op-
eration” (P. 1-62) and “Troubleshooting” (P. 1-63).
LRS0865
1-60 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as de-
scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-
lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
it will not inflate in a crash.The driver air bag
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requir-
ing the air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the
requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the
seat by weight. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF in accor-
dance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regula-
tions is on the seat, its weight and the
child’s weight can be detected and cause
the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt
as outlined in this manual should not
cause the front passenger air bag and
front passenger supplemental knee air
bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF, however
if the occupant takes his/her weight off the
seat cushion (for example, by not sitting
upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or
by otherwise being out of position), this
could cause the sensor to turn the front
passenger air bag and front passenger
supplemental knee air bag OFF. Always be
sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt
properly for the most effective protection
by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-
propriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
this is not possible, the occupant classifica-
tion sensor is designed to operate as de-
scribed above to turn the front passenger
air bag and front passenger supplemental
knee air bag OFF for specified child re-
straints as required by the regulations. Fail-
ing to properly secure child restraints and
to use the ALR mode may allow the re-
straint to tip or move in a collision or sud-
den stop.This can also result in the passen-
ger air bag and front passenger
supplemental knee air bag inflating in a
crash instead of being OFF. For additional
information about proper use and installa-
tion, see “Child restraints” (P. 1-27).
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag and front pas-
senger supplemental knee air bag are de-
signed not to inflate in a crash. However,
heavy objects placed on the seat could re-
sult in air bag inflation, because of the ob-
ject’s weight detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions
could also result in air bag inflation, such as
if a child is standing on the seat, or if two
children are on the seat, contrary to the
instructions in this manual. Always be sure
that you and all vehicle occupants are
seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status
light, you can monitor when the front pas-
senger air bag and front passenger
supplemental knee air bag are automati-
cally turned OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illu-
minated (indicating that the front passen-
ger air bag and front passenger supple-
mental knee air bag are OFF), it could be
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
that the person is a small adult, or is not
sitting on the seat properly or not using the
seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status
light may or may not be illuminated, de-
pending on the size of the child and the
type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicat-
ing that the front passenger air bag and
front passenger supplemental knee air
bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that
the child restraint or seat belt is not being
used properly. Make sure that the child re-
straint is installed properly, the seat belt is
used properly and the occupant is posi-
tioned properly. If the air bag status light is
still not illuminated, reposition the occu-
pant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light
will not illuminate even though you believe
that the child restraint, the seat belts and
the occupant are properly positioned, it is
recommended that you take your vehicle
to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can
check system status by using a special
tool. However, until you have confirmed
with a dealer that your air bag is working
properly, reposition the occupant or child
restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will
take a few seconds to register a change in
the front passenger seat status. This is nor-
mal system operation and does not indi-
cate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-
ger air bag system, the supplemental air
bag warning light
, located in the me-
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will be illuminated (blinking or
steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification
sensor system to classify the front passen-
ger based on weight, please follow the pre-
cautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
• Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
• Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear of
the seatback.
• Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the front
passenger seat.
• Make sure that the front passenger seat
or seatback is not forced back against an
object on the seat or floor behind it.
• Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
(P. 1-2) section of this manual. Sit upright,
leaning against the seatback, and cen-
tered on the seat cushion with your feet
comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your
lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
“Seat belts” (P. 1-13) section of this
manual. Front passenger seat belt
buckle status is monitored by the occu-
pant classification system, and is used
as an input to determine occupancy
status. So, it is highly recommended that
the front passenger fasten their seat
belt.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the front
passenger before the vehicle is put into
motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking
the front passenger air bag status light.
1-62 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification
sensor system generally keeps the clas-
sification locked during driving, so it is
important that you confirm that the
front passenger is properly classified
prior to driving. However, the occupant
classification sensor may recalculate the
weight of the occupant under some con-
ditions (both while driving and when
stopped), so front passenger seat occu-
pants should continue to remain seated
as outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag
status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying
the front passenger seat:
•
Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light
is functioning as intended. The front pas-
senger air bag and front passenger supple-
mental knee air bag are suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small
adult, then this may be due to the following
conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
• Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet com-
fortably ex tended to the floor.
• A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
• Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor be-
hind it.
• An object placed under the front passen-
ger seat.
• An object placed between the seat cush-
ion and center console or between the
seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Re-
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child
or child restraint occupying the front
passenger seat.
This may be due to the following condi-
tions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
• Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and cen-
tered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the floor.
• The child restraint is not properly in-
stalled, as outlined in the “Child restraints”
section of this manual.
• An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the seat-
back pocket.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63
• A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
• Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor be-
hind it.
• An object placed under the front passen-
ger seat.
• An object placed between the seat cush-
ion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Re-
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small
adult, child or child restraint should be re-
positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger
and no objects on the front passenger
seat, the vehicle should be checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible.
Other supplemental front-impact air
bag precautions
WARNING
• Do not place any objects on the
steering wheel pad or on the instru-
ment panel. Also, do not place any
objects between any occupant and
the steering wheel or instrument
panel. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause in-
jury if the front air bags inflate.
• Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will
be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
• No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the supplemental air bag system.
This is to prevent accidental inflation
of the supplemental air bag or dam-
age to the supplemental air bag
system.
• Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle's electrical system,
suspension system or front end
structure. This could affect proper
operation of the front air bag system.
• Tampering with the front air bag sys-
tem may result in serious personal
injury. Tampering includes changes
to the steering wheel and the instru-
ment panel assembly by placing ma-
terial over the steering wheel pad
and above the instrument panel or
by installing additional trim material
around the air bag system.
• Removing or modifying the front
passenger seat may affect the func-
tion of the air bag system and result
in serious personal injury.
1-64 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
• Modifying or tampering with the
front passenger seat may result in
serious personal injury. For example,
do not change the front seats by
placing material on the seat cushion
or by installing additional trim mate-
rial, such as seat covers, on the seat
that are not specifically designed to
assure proper air bag operation. Ad-
ditionally, do not stow any objects
under the front passenger seat or the
seat cushion and seatback. Such ob-
jects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classifica-
tion sensor (weight sensor).
• No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the seat belt system. This may af-
fect the front air bag system. Tam-
pering with the seat belt system may
result in serious personal injury.
• It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and
around the front air bag. It is also rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. The Supplemental Re-
straint System (SRS) wiring har-
nesses* should not be modified or
disconnected. Unauthorized electri-
cal test equipment and probing de-
vices should not be used on the air
bag system.
• A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified re-
pair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connec tors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner's
Manual.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65
Front and rear outboard
seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and
roof-mounted curtain
side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside
of the seatback of the front and rear out-
board seats. The curtain air bags are lo-
cated in the side roof rails. All of the infor-
mation, cautions and warnings in this
manual must be followed. The side air
bags and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in higher severity side collisions, al-
though they may inflate if the forces in an-
other type of collision are similar to those of
a higher severity impact. They are de-
signed to inflate on the side where the ve-
hicle is impacted. They may not inflate in
certain side collisions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate
in certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-
ments (for example, during severe off-
roading) may cause the curtain air bags to
inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
an indication of proper side air bag and
curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by the release of smoke. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indi-
cate a fire. Care should be taken not to
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breath-
ing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the chest and pelvic area of the front and
rear outboard occupants. Curtain air bags
help to cushion the impact force to the
head of occupants in the front and rear
outboard seating positions. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-
ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain air
bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.
Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn
and the driver, front passenger and rear
outboard occupants seated upright as far
as practical away from the side air bag.
Rear seat passengers should be seated as
far away as practical from the door finish-
ers and side roof rails. The side air bags and
curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to
help protect the occupants. Because of
this, the force of the side air bag and curtain
air bag inflating can increase the risk of
injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, these air bag modules during in-
flation. The side air bag will deflate quickly
after the collision is over.
The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a
short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
LRS3142
1-66 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
WARNING
• Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front and rear seats.
Also, do not place any objects (an
umbrella,bag, etc.) between the front
and rear door finisher and the front
and rear seat. Such objects may be-
come dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflate.
• Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain air bag system com-
ponents will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn
yourself.
• No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage
to or accidental inflation of the side
air bag and curtain air bag or dam-
age to the side air bag and curtain air
bag systems.
• Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle's electrical system,
suspension system or side panel.
This could affect proper operation of
the side air bag and cur tain air bag
systems.
• Tampering with the side air bag sys-
tem may result in serious personal
injury. For example, do not change
the front and rear seats by placing
material near the seatbacks or by in-
stalling additional trim material,
such as seat covers, around the side
air bag.
• It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and
around the side air bag and curtain
air bag. It is also recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for installa-
tion of electrical equipment. The SRS
wiring harnesses* should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthor-
ized electrical test equipment and
probing devices should not be used
on the side air bag or cur tain air bag
system.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner's Manual.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67
Driver and passenger
supplemental knee air bag
The knee air bag is located in the knee
bolster, on the driver’s and passenger’s
side. All of the information, cautions and
warnings in this manual apply and must
be followed. The knee air bag is designed
to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,
although it may inflate if the forces in an-
other type of collision are similar to those of
a higher severity frontal impact. It may not
inflate in certain collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
an indication of proper knee air bag
operation.
When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by release of
smoke. This smoke is not harmful and
does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irrita-
tion and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
The knee air bag helps to cushion the im-
pact force on the knees of the driver and
passenger. It can help reduce serious inju-
ries. However, an inflating knee air bag may
cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee
air bag provides restraint to the lower body.
The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to
help protect the occupants. Because of
this, the force of the knee air bag inflating
can increase the risk of injury if the occu-
pant is too close to, or is against, this air bag
module during inflation. The knee air bag
will deflate quickly after the collision is over
OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for
a short time.
The knee air bag operates only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
LRS2599
Driver’s side
LRS3250
Passenger’s side
1-68 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
• Do not place any objects between the
knee bolster and the driver’s or pas-
senger’s seat. Such objects may be-
come dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a knee air bag inflates.
• Right after inflation, the knee air bag
system components will be hot. Do
not touch them; you may severely
burn yourself.
• No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the knee air bag system. This is to
prevent damage to or accidental in-
flation of the knee air bag system.
• Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle's electrical system or
suspension system. This could affect
proper operation of the knee air bag
system.
• Tampering with the knee air bag sys-
tem may result in serious personal
injury. For example, do not change
the driver or passenger knee bolster
or install additional trim material
around the knee air bag.
• It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and
around the knee air bag. It is also rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. The SRS wiring har-
nesses* should not be modified or
disconnected. Unauthorized electri-
cal test equipment and probing de-
vices should not be used on the knee
air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are
yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the knee air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this manual.
Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front and rear outboard seats)
WARNING
• The pretensioner(s) cannot be re-
used after activation. They must be
replaced together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
• If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but pretensioner(s) are not
activated, be sure to have the preten-
sioner system checked and, if neces-
sary, replaced. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
• No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the pretensioner system. This is to
prevent damage to or accidental ac-
tivation of the pretensioner(s). Tam-
pering with the pretensioner system
may result in serious personal injury.
• It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and
around the pretensioner system. It is
also recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for installation of elec-
trical equipment. Unauthorized elec-
trical test equipment and probing
devices should not be used on the
pretensioner system.
• If you need to dispose of the preten-
sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-
posal procedures could cause per-
sonal injury.
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69
The pretensioner system may activate
with the supplemental air bag system in
certain types of collisions. Working with the
seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-
comes involved in certain types of colli-
sions, helping to restrain front and rear out-
board seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased within the
seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-
chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.
These seat belts are used the same way as
conventional seat belts.
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indi-
cate a fire. Care should be taken not to
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breath-
ing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load
limiters allow the seat belt to release web-
bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against
the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning light
is used to indicate malfunctions in the
pretensioner system. For additional infor-
mation, see "Supplemental air bag warning
light" (P. 1-71). If the operation of the supple-
mental air bag warning light indicates
there is a malfunction, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the preten-
sioner system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner's
Manual.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
cause serious injury or death.
LRS2617
1. SRS Air bag warning labels
The warning labels are located on the
surface of the sun visor.
1-70 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-
tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and
then turns off. This means the system is
operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
knee air bag and pretensioner systems
need servicing:
•
The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
• The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
• The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag or
pretensioner systems may not operate
properly. They must be checked and re-
paired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
knee air bag and/or pretensioner sys-
tems will not operate in an accident. To
help avoid injury to yourself or others,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Repair and replacement
procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, knee air bag and pretensioner(s) are
designed to inflate on a one-time-only
basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged,
the supplemental air bag warning light
remains illuminated after inflation has
occurred. These systems should be re-
paired and/or replaced as soon as pos-
sible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,
curtain air bags, knee air bag, pretension-
er(s) and related parts should be pointed
out to the person performing the mainte-
nance. The ignition switch should always
be in the LOCK position when working un-
der the hood or inside the vehicle.
LRS0100
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71
WARNING
• Once a front air bag, side air bag, cur-
tain air bag, or knee air bag has in-
flated, the air bag module will not
function again and must be replaced.
Additionally, the activated preten-
sioner(s) must also be replaced. The
air bag module and pretensioner(s)
should be replaced. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. However, the
air bag module and pretensioner(s)
cannot be repaired.
• The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag, knee air bag systems and the
pretensioner system should be in-
spected if there is any damage to the
front end or side portion of the ve-
hicle. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• If you need to dispose of a supple-
mental air bag or pretensioner sys-
tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
• If there is an impact to your vehicle
from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) should be
checked to verify it is still functioning
correctly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The OCS should be checked even if no
air bags deploy as a result of the im-
pact. Failure to verify proper OCS
function may result in an improper
air bag deployment resulting in in-
jury or death.
1-72 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
MEMO
Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel................................2-2
Meters and gauges .............................2-4
Speedometer and odometer .................2-4
Tachometer ..................................2-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge ..........2-6
Fuel gauge ...................................2-7
Distance To Empty (DTE) .....................2-7
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders .......................................2-8
Checking lights ...............................2-9
Warning/Indicator lights (red) ................2-9
Warning/Indicator lights (yellow) .............2-11
Warning/Indicator lights (other) .............2-16
Audible reminders...........................2-16
Vehicle information display ..................... 2-17
How to use the vehicle information
display ...................................... 2-17
Startup display ..............................2-18
Settings .....................................2-18
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators...............................2-25
Security systems ...............................2-31
Vehicle security system .....................2-31
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........2-32
Wiper and washer switch .......................2-33
Switch operation ............................2-33
Rear switch operation .......................2-35
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch ...............2-36
Headlight and turn signal switch ...............2-36
Headlight control switch ....................2-36
LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system ......................................2-41
Instrument brightness control ..............2-42
Turn signal switch ...........................2-42
Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............2-43
Horn ...........................................2-43
Climate controlled seat switches
(if so equipped) .................................2-44
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ..........2-45
Heated rear seat switches (if so equipped) .....2-46
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-47
Dynamic driver assistance switch ..............2-48
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch .....2-49
E-c
all (SOS) button (if so equipped) .............2-49
Rear Door Alert .................................2-50
Power outlets ..................................2-51
12v outlets ..................................2-51
Ex tended storage switch .......................2-52
Storage ........................................2-53
Front-door pockets .........................2-53
Console side pockets .......................2-54
Seatback pockets ...........................2-54
Storagetrays................................2-55
Glovebox ...................................2-56
Console box .................................2-56
Overhead sunglasses storage...............2-56
Cup holders .................................2-57
Cargo area storage bin ......................2-58
Luggage hooks .............................2-59
Coat hooks .................................2-59
Roof rack (if so equipped) ...................2-60
Windows .......................................2-61
Power windows .............................2-61
Power moonroof (if so equipped) ...............2-64........................2-64
Interior lights ...................................2-66
Console light ................................2-67
Map lights ...................................2-67
Personal lights ..............................2-67
Luggage compartment light ................2-67
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
(if so equipped) .................................2-68
Programming HomeLink® ...................2-69
Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers ...............2-70
Operating the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver ..................................2-71
Programming trouble-diagnosis ............ 2-71
Clearing the programmed information ......2-71
Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button ......................................2-72
If your vehicle is stolen ......................2-72
1. Vent (P. 4-27)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/
turn signal switch (P. 2-36)
3. Supplemental air bag (P. 1-50)
Horn (P. 2-43)
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)
Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-8)
Vehicle information display (P. 2-17)
5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-33)
Rear window wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-33)
6. Audio system/Center display controls*
7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)
8. Center display*
Navigation display (if so equipped)*
9. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-50)
10. Glove box (P. 2-53)
11. Front passenger supplemental knee air
bag (P. 1-50)
12. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-50)
13. Power outlet (P. 2-51)
14. USB ports*
AUX jack*
15. Heater and air conditioning controls
(P. 4-29)
16. Shift lever (P. 5-18)
17. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-13)
18. Cruise control switches (if so equipped)
(P. 5-55)
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches
(if so equipped) (P. 5-58)
19. Driver supplemental knee air bag
(P. 1-50)
LII2574
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2-2 Instruments and controls
20. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System/
Audio control switches*
21. Hood release (P. 3-21)
Fuel door release (P. 3-28)
22. Fuse box (P. 8-19)
23. Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 2-47)
Dynamic driver assistance switch
(P. 2-48)
Liftgate instrument panel switch
(if so equipped) (P. 3-22)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-49)
24. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-42)
Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-4)
*: Refer to the separate NissanConnect
®
Owner's Manual.
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
Instruments and controls 2-3
1. Tachometer
2. Warning and indicator lights
3. Vehicle information display
Odometer
Twin Trip Odometer
4. Speedometer
5. Fuel gauge
6. Engine coolant temperature gauge
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-
eter and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side of the meter clus-
ter. The odometer is located within the ve-
hicle information display.
LIC4125
METERS AND GAUGES
2-4 Instruments and controls
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer and the twin trip odometer
O
1
are displayed in the vehicle information
display when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the dis-
tance of individual trips.
Changing the display
Push the TRIP RESET switch
O
2
on the left
side of the instrument panel to change the
display as follows:
Trip
→ Trip → Odometer Mile-
age → Trip
Resetting the trip odometer
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch
O
2
for more
than 1 second resets the currently dis-
played trip odometer to zero.
LIC2255 LIC2921
Instruments and controls 2-5
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev
engine into the red zone
O
1
.
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the
red zone, reduce engine speed. Operat-
ing the engine in the red zone may
cause serious engine damage.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature. The engine coolant tempera-
ture is within the normal range
O
1
when
the gauge needle points within the zone
shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies
with the outside air temperature and driv-
ing conditions.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant tem-
perature near the hot (H) end of the
normal range, reduce vehicle speed to
decrease temperature. If the gauge is
over the normal range, stop the vehicle
as soon as safely possible. If the engine
is overheated, continued operation of
the vehicle may seriously damage the
engine. For additional information, see
“If your vehicle overheats” (P. 6-12) for
immediate action required.
LIC3780 LIC3538
2-6 Instruments and controls
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during brak-
ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hills.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af-
ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
The low fuel warning message shows in
the vehicle information display when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-
isters 0 (Empty).
The
indicates that the fuel-filler door
is located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
• If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
After a few driving trips, the
light
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the ve-
hicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
•
For additional information, see “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” (P. 2-13).
DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)
Displays the estimated distance the ve-
hicle can be driven before refueling. The
value is calculated based on recent fuel
economy, the amount of fuel remaining in
the fuel tank, and the actual fuel
consumption.
Changes in driving patterns or conditions
can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result,
the value displayed may differ from the ac-
tual distance that can be driven.
DTE display will change to “---” when the
fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to
the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).
NOTE:
• The DTE value after refill is estimated
based on recent fuel economy and
amount of fuel added.
• If a small amount of fuel is added, or
the ignition is on during refueling, the
display may not be updated.
• Conditions that affect the fuel
economy will also affect the estimated
DTE value (city/highway driving, idle
time, remote start time, terrain, sea-
sonal weather, added vehicle weight,
added deflectors, roof racks, etc.).
LIC2222
Instruments and controls 2-7
Warning/Indicator light (red) Warning/Indicator light (yellow) Warning/Indicator light (other)
or Brake warning light or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light
Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so
equipped)
Charge warning light Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light
High Beam Assist indicator light (green)
Engine oil pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light High beam indicator light (blue)
Master warning light Low tire pressure warning light
Side light and headlight indicator light
(green)
Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (green)
Security indicator light Master warning light
Supplemental air bag warning light Power steering warning light
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system
warning light
Slip indicator light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indica-
tor light
WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
2-8 Instruments and controls
CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. The following lights (if
so equipped) will come on:
, or , , , , ,
The following lights (if so equipped) come
on briefly and then go off:
or , , , ,
If any light fails to come on or operate in a
way other than described, it may indicate a
burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-
function. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Some indicators and warnings are also dis-
played in the vehicle information display
between the speedometer and tachom-
eter. For additional information, see “Ve-
hicle information display” (P. 2-17).
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red)
For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
formation display” (P. 2-17).
or Brake warning
light
This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine
is running with the parking brake not ap-
plied, stop the vehicle and perform the
following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. For additional infor-
mation, see “Brake fluid” (P. 8-11).
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
WARNING
• Your brake system may not be work-
ing properly if the warning light is on.
Driving could be dangerous. If you
judge it to be safe, drive carefully to
the nearest service station for re-
pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle
towed because driving it could be
dangerous.
• Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake
fluid level may increase your stop-
ping distance and braking will re-
quire greater pedal effort as well as
pedal travel.
• If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It is
recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the charging sys-
tem is not functioning properly. Turn the
engine off and check the drive belt. If the
belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light
remains on, have your vehicle serviced im-
mediately. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-9
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the drive belt
is loose, broken or missing.
Engine oil pressure
warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If
the light flickers or comes on during nor-
mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,
stop the engine immediately and call a
NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair
shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For
additional information, see “Engine oil”
(P. 8-6).
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not cov-
ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon
as it is safe to do so.
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion, the master warning light illuminates if
any of the following are displayed on the
vehicle information display:
• Parking brake release warning
• Door open warning (when vehicle is
moving)
• Shift into Park warning
• LED Headlight Failure warning (when red
warning exists)
For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
formation display” (P. 2-17).
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten
the driver and front passenger seat belts.
For additional information, see “Seat belts”
(P. 1-13).
Security indicator light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.
The blinking security indicator light indi-
cates that the security systems equipped
on the vehicle are operational.
For additional information, see “Security
systems” (P. 2-31).
Supplemental air bag
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and
then turns off. This means the system is
operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
and pretensioner seat belt systems need
servicing:
•
The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
• The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
• The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these services.
2-10 Instruments and controls
Unless checked and repaired, the supple-
mental restraint system (air bag system)
and/or the pretensioners may not function
properly. For additional information, see
“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)”
(P. 1-50).
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag sys-
tems and/or pretensioner systems will
not operate in an accident. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have
your vehicle checked as soon as pos-
sible. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
(yellow)
For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
formation display” (P. 2-17).
or Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates
and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while
the engine is running or while driving, it
may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system
then operates normally but without anti-
lock assistance. For additional information,
see “Brake system” (P. 5-120).
Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection
system warning light
This light comes on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. It turns
off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF
in the meter or when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system is turned off.
If the light illuminates when the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may
indicate that the system is unavailable. For
additional information, see “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” (P. 5-87) and “Intelligent Forward
Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-98).
Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status light will
be lit and the passenger front air bag and
passenger knee air bag will be off depend-
ing on how the front passenger seat is be-
ing used.
For additional information, see “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light” (P. 1-60).
Instruments and controls 2-11
Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-
tors the tire pressure of all tires except the
spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1
second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illumi-
nate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”
warning also appears in the vehicle in-
formation display.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
the tire pressure of all four tires to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information la-
bel located in the driver's door opening.
The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-
flated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.
The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning
appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated.
For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
formation display” (P. 2-17) and “Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5).
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning
does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a
TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, see “Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5) and
“Tire pressure” (P. 8-27).
WARNING
• Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
• If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
2-12 Instruments and controls
• If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
speed, pull off the road to a safe loca-
tion and stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Driving with under-inflated
tires may permanently damage the
tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death. Check the tire
pressure for all four tires. Adjust the
tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label lo-
cated in the driver’s door opening to
turn the low tire pressure warning
light off. If the light still illuminates
while driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may be flat or the
TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you
have a flat tire, replace it with a spare
tire as soon as possible. If no tire is
flat and all tires are properly inflated,
have the vehicle checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
• When using a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire
pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these services.
• Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could af-
fect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
CAUTION
• The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure
to check the tire pressure regularly.
• If the vehicle is being driven at
speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h),
the TPMS may not operate correctly.
• Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the four wheels correctly.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or
blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate a potential emission control
malfunction.
The MIL may also come on steady if the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least
3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the
light
should turn off if no other potential emis-
sion control system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
control system inspection/maintenance
test. For additional information, see “Readi-
ness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test”
(P. 10-31).
Instruments and controls 2-13
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
• MIL on steady — An emission control sys-
tem malfunction has been detected.
Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel
Cap warning appears in the vehicle infor-
mation display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose
or missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle. The
light should turn off after a few driving
trips. If the
light does not turn off
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You
do not need to have your vehicle towed
to the dealer.
• MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been
detected which may damage the emis-
sion control system. To reduce or avoid
emission control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph
(72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or
deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on
steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
checked and repaired as necessary
could lead to poor driveability, reduced
fuel economy, and possible damage to
the emission control system.
Master warning light
When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion, the master warning light illuminates if
any of the following are displayed on the
vehicle information display:
• No Key Detected warning
• Low windshield washer fluid warning
• Door open warning (when vehicle is
stopped)
• Low tire pressure warning
• Loose Fuel Cap warning
• Traffic Sign Recognition system fault (if so
equipped)
• Driver Attention Alert system fault (if so
equipped)
• Push Engine Start Lock warning
• Incorrect Key warning
• I-Key System Fault warning
• CVT warning
• Sonar Parking Sensor Error warning
• LED Headlight Failure warning (when no
other red warnings are on)
• Chassis Control warning
• Tire size incorrect warning
• AWD system error warning
• AWD high temperature warning
For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
formation display” (P. 2-17).
Power steering warning
light
WARNING
• If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
2-14 Instruments and controls
• When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine run-
ning, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle, but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light
illuminates. After starting the engine, the
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates the power steering is operational.
If the power steering warning light illumi-
nates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering is not function-
ing properly and may need servicing. Have
the power steering checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When the power steering warning light illu-
minates with the engine running, there will
be no power assist for the steering, but you
will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, see “Power
steering” (P. 5-119).
Rear Automatic Braking
(RAB) system warning light
This light comes on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. It turns
off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the RAB system
is turned off in the vehicle information
display.
If the light illuminates when the RAB sys-
tem is on, it may indicate that the system is
unavailable. For additional information, see
“Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-82).
Slip indicator light
This indicator light will blink when the Ve-
hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is op-
erating, thus alerting the driver to the fact
that the road surface is slippery and the
vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
You may feel or hear the system working;
this is normal.
The light will blink for a few seconds after
the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.
The
indicator light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after ap-
proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-
erational. If the light does not come on
have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the
VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indi-
cates the VDC system has been turned off.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine and the system will operate
normally. For additional information, see
“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”
(P. 5-122).
The VDC OFF indicator light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after
about 2 seconds if the system is opera-
tional. If the light stays on or comes on
along with the
indicator light while
you are driving, have the VDC system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-15
While the VDC system is operating, you
might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-
tem working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
(other)
For additional information, see “Vehicle in-
formation display” (P. 2-17).
Front fog light indicator
light (green) (if so
equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illumi-
nates when the front fog lights are on. For
additional information, see “Fog light
switch” (P. 2-43).
High Beam Assist indicator
light (green)
This indicator light illuminates when the
headlights come on while the headlight
switch is in the AUTO position with the high
beams selected. This indicates that the
high beam assist is operational.
For additional information, see “Headlight
and turn signal switch” (P. 2-36).
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the head-
light high beams are on and goes out when
the low beams are selected.
Side light and headlight
indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light
illuminates when the side light or headlight
position is selected. For additional informa-
tion, see “Headlight and turn signal switch”
(P. 2-36).
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights (green)
The appropriate light flashes when the turn
signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
turned on.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a disc brake pad requires
replacement, it makes a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-
tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-
pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver's
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before
leaving the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door
buzzer (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if
any one of the following improper opera-
tions is found.
• The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle
when locking the doors.
• The Intelligent Key is taken outside the
vehicle when operating the vehicle.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check
both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For
additional information, see “NISSAN Intelli-
gent Key®” (P. 3-7).
2-16 Instruments and controls
The vehicle information display is located
to the left of the speedometer. It displays
such items as:
• Home
• Audio information
• Navigation information (if so equipped)
• Drive computer information
• Fuel economy information
• Driving aids information (if so equipped)
• Speed Limit Sign (if so equipped)
• Tire pressure information
• Indicators and warnings
• Vehicle and meter display settings
• Cruise control status
• Odometer/twin trip odometer
• Gear position information (P, R, N, D)
• Distance To Empty and fuel indicator
• Time
• Outside Air Temperature
The display will be interrupted when a
phone call is received. Phone calls can be
answered or rejected through the steering
wheel controls.
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be
changed using the OK and
buttons located on the steering wheel.
1. OK — change or select an item in the
vehicle information display.
— scroll up or down the vehicle in-
formation menu items. If the vehicle in-
formation display is not showing a menu
with the
buttons, pressing the
will change to the previous/next audio
preset.
LIC3224 LIC3778
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
Instruments and controls 2-17
2. — go back or forward
through the vehicle information menu
items or to change from one display
screen to the next (i.e. trip, TPMS, fuel
economy).
The OK and
buttons also
control audio and control panel functions
in some conditions. Most screens and
menus offer instruction prompts of the
steering switch buttons to indicate how to
control the vehicle information display. An
orange cursor is shown to indicate where
you are in the available menu items. A scroll
bar with up and down arrows will appear if
there is more than one page of menu
items. For additional information, refer to
the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s
Manual.
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC
position the screens that display in the ve-
hicle information display include:
• Home
• Audio
• Navigation (if so equipped)
• Drive computer
• Fuel economy
• Driving aids (if so equipped)
• Speed Limit Sign (if so equipped)
• Tire pressure information
• Warning review
• Settings
The warnings review title screen will show
how many active warnings exist, or “No
items to review” in the event that no warn-
ings are active. For additional information
on warnings and indicators, see “Vehicle
information display warnings and indica-
tors” (P. 2-25).
To control what items display in the vehicle
information display, see “Customize Dis-
play” (P. 2-20).
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the
information displayed in the vehicle infor-
mation display:
• Driver Assistance
• Customize Display
• Vehicle Settings
• Maintenance
• Clock
• TPMS Settings
• Unit / Language
• Key-Linked Settings
• Factory Reset
2-18 Instruments and controls
Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the various driving aids.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.
Menu item Explanation
Lane Displays available lane options.
Lane Departure Warning Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, see “Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-27).
Lane Departure Prevention Allows user to turn the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) on or off when the engine is running The system will reset to off
after every ignition cycle. For additional information, see “Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P. 5-32).
Blind Spot Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems on or off. For additional infor-
mation, see “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-38) and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-47).
Speed Limit Sign Allows user to turn the Speed Limit Sign recognition on or off. For additional information, see “Traffic Sign Recognition”
(P. 5-24).
Parking Aids Displays available parking aids.
Sensor Displays available sensor options.
ON Front and rear sonar is on.
OFF Front and rear sonar is off.
Front Only Only front sonar is on.
Display Allows user to turn the parking aids display on or off.
Volume Allows the user to set the parking sensor volume to High/Med./Low
Range Allows user to set the parking sensor range to Near/Mid/Far.
Emergency Brake Displays available emergency brake options.
Front Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see “Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” (P. 5-87) and “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-98).
Rear Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, see “Rear Automatic Braking
(RAB)” (P. 5-82)..
Driver Attention Alert Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) on or off. For additional information, see “Intelligent Driver Alertness
(I-DA)” (P. 5-110).
Timer Alert Allows user to set or reset the timer alert. The timer alert is based on when the ignition is placed in the ON position.
Low Temperature Alert Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off.
Cruise Control Alerts Allows user to turn the cruise control alerts on or off.
Instruments and controls 2-19
Customize Display
The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display.
Some menu items shown below may not be equipped on your vehicle.
Menu item Explanation
Main Menu Selection Displays available main menu items to display in the vehicle information display.
Home Allows user to turn the home screen on or off.
Audio Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off.
Navigation Allows user to turn the navigation screen on or off.
Drive Computer Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off.
Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy screen on or off.
Driving Aids Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off.
Speed Limit Sign Allows user to turn the speed limit sign screen on or off.
Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off.
Car Icon Color Allows user to select the color of the vehicle shown in the vehicle information display.
ECO Info Settings Displays the various ECO info settings.
ECO Drive Report Select to display this report for a period of time when the ignition is turned off.
View History Select to view the vehicle’s fuel consumption history.
Navigation Settings Displays the various navigation settings.
Alerts Allows user to disable the interrupt alerts for upcoming turns.
View Mode Allows user to select the “Arrow” mode for displaying the upcoming turn or “City” mode for displaying the intersec-
tion on a map when available.
Welcome Effect Displays the various welcome effect settings.
Gauges Allows the user to disable the gauge pointer sweep during vehicle startup.
Animation Allows the user to disable the welcome animation during vehicle startup.
2-20 Instruments and controls
Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.
Some menu items shown below may not equipped on your vehicle.
Menu item Explanation
Rear Door Alert Displays the available Rear Door Alert options. For additional information, see “Rear Door Alert” (P. 2-50).
OFF When selected, no alert or horn will be active.
Horn & Alert When selected, the alert is displayed and horn sounds.
Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed.
Lighting Displays the various lighting settings.
Accent Lighting Allows the user to adjust the brightness of the accent lights.
Light Sensitivity Allows the user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.
Light Off Delay Allows the user to change the duration of time, from 0 to 180 seconds, that the automatic headlights stay on
after the vehicle is shut off.
Turn Indicator Displays available turn indicator settings.
3 Flash Pass Allows the user to turn the 3 flash pass on or off.
Locking Displays the various locking settings.
Ext. Door Switch Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is acti-
vated.
Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on and off. When turned on, the driver’s door is unlocked and the door
handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corre-
sponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed
again within 1 minute. When this item is turned to OFF, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock
operation is performed once.
Answer Back Horn Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators
will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.
Auto Door Unlock Displays the options for the auto door unlock.
OFF Doors will have to be manually unlocked.
Ignition OFF Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.
Instruments and controls 2-21
Menu item Explanation
Shift into Park Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Wipers Displays the various wipers settings.
Speed Dependent Allows the user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off.
Driving Position Displays the various driving position settings.
Exit Seat Slide Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, the driver seat will slide back after ignition
is turned off for easy exit of the vehicle. For additional information, see "Memory seat" (P. 3-36).
Exit Steering Up Allows the user to turn the exit steering up on or off. When turned on, the steering wheel will rise after ignition
is turned off for easy exit of the vehicle. For additional information, see "Memory seat" (P. 3-36).
Remote Engine Star t Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start on or off. When turned on, the engine can be restarted remotely.
For additional information, see “Remote Engine Start” (P. 3-18).
2-22 Instruments and controls
Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional informa-
tion, see “Changing wheels and tires” (P. 8-35). Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions
affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not
mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks.
Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could
occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.
Menu item Explanation
Maintenance Displays various maintenance reminder options.
Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Clock
Menu item Explanation
Clock The vehicle clock can only be adjusted from the audio center display. When selected, the user will be
instructed to go to the settings menu in the audio center display. For additional information, refer to the
separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.
Instruments and controls 2-23
TPMS Settings
The TPMS settings menu allows the user to change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.
Menu item Explanation
Tire Pressure Unit Allows the user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.
Unit/Language
The Unit/Language menu allows the user to change the units and language shown in the vehicle information display.
Menu item Explanation
Mileage/Fuel Allows user to select different mileage display units.
Tire Pressure Unit Allows user to select different pressure display units.
Temperature Allows user to select different temperature display units.
Language Allows user to select different languages.
Key-Linked Settings
Menu item Explanation
System Allows user to turn the Key-Linked Settings on or off. For additional information, see "Memory seat" (P. 3-36).
Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.
Menu item Explanation
Factory Reset
Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,
the user can confirm or cancel the reset.
2-24 Instruments and controls
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
The following messages may appear in
your vehicle information display.
Engine start operation for
Intelligent Key system
(if I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator appears when the battery of
the Intelligent Key is low and when the In-
telligent Key system and the vehicle are not
communicating normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch
with the Intelligent Key while depressing
the brake pedal. For additional information,
see “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis-
charge” (P. 5-15).
Key Battery Low
This indicator appears when the Intelligent
Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator appears, replace the bat-
tery with a new one. For additional infor-
mation, see “Battery replacement” (P. 8-23).
Key ID Incorrect
This warning appears when the ignition
switch is placed from the OFF position and
the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the
system. You cannot start the engine with
an unregistered key.
For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
telligent Key®” (P. 3-7).
Key System Fault See
Owner’s Manual
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this warning appears for a period
of time and then turns off.
The Key System Fault message warns of a
malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys-
tem. If the warning appears while the en-
gine is stopped, it may be impossible to
start the engine.
If the warning appears while the engine is
running, you can drive the vehicle. However,
in these cases, have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
No Key Detected
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni-
tion switch in the ON position. Make sure
the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
telligent Key®” (P. 3-7).
Brightness indicator
This indicator shows the brightness ad-
justment of the instrument panel. For addi-
tional information, see “Instrument bright-
ness control” (P. 2-42).
Rear Door Alert is activated
When the system is enabled, this message
appears when the Rear Door Alert system
is active and can remind the driver to check
the back seat.
• Using the steering wheel switch, a driver
can select “Dismiss Message” to clear the
display for a period of time. If no selection
is made, this message automatically
turns off after a period of time.
• Using the steering wheel switch, a driver
can select “Disable Alert” to disable the
horn alert for the remainder of the cur-
rent trip.
Instruments and controls 2-25
WARNING
Selecting “Dismiss Message” during a
stop within a trip temporarily dis-
misses the message for that stop with-
out turning the system off. Alerts can
be provided for other stops during the
trip. Selecting “Disable Alert” turns off
the Rear Door Alert system for the re-
mainder of a trip and no audible alert
will be provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver en-
ables it using the vehicle information
display. For additional information, see
“How to use the vehicle information dis-
play” (P. 2-17).
For additional information, see “Rear Door
Alert” (P. 2-50).
Check Rear Seat For All Articles
When the system is enabled, this message
appears when the vehicle comes to a com-
plete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from
the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position,
and the driver exits the vehicle. This mes-
sage alerts the driver, after a period of time,
to check for items in the rear seat after the
audible alert has been provided.
NOTE:
This system is disabled until a driver en-
ables it using the vehicle information
display. For additional information, see
“How to use the vehicle information dis-
play” (P. 2-17).
For additional information, see “Rear Door
Alert” (P. 2-50).
Door/liftgate Open
This warning appears when a door or the
liftgate has been opened.
Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual
This warning appears when the LED head-
lights are not functioning properly.
If this warning appears, have your system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Loose Fuel Cap
This warning appears when the fuel-filler
cap is not tightened correctly after the ve-
hicle has been refueled. For additional in-
formation, see “Fuel-filler cap” (P. 3-29).
Low Fuel
This warning appears when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon
as it is convenient, preferably before the
fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be
a small reserve of fuel in the tank when
the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside tem-
perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera-
ture can be changed to display in Celsius or
Fahrenheit. For additional information, see
“Settings” (P. 2-18).
Low Washer Fluid
This warning appears when the windshield-
washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-
washer fluid as necessary. For additional
information, see “Windshield-washer fluid”
(P. 8-12).
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle infor-
mation display after a period of time if the
ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON po-
sition and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For
additional information, see “Push-button
ignition switch positions” (P. 5-13).
2-26 Instruments and controls
Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition
switch is automatically turned to off. For
additional information, see “Push-button
ignition switch positions” (P. 5-13)
Push brake and start
switch to drive
This indicator appears when the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator also appears when the ve-
hicle has been started using the Remote
Engine Start (if so equipped) function.
This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the ignition switch with
the brake pedal depressed. You can start
the engine from any position of the ignition
switch.
Push Ignition to OFF
After the Push Ignition to OFF warning ap-
pears, the warning will appear if the ignition
switch is placed in the ACC position when
the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)
position.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ig-
nition switch in the ON position and then in
the LOCK position.
Release Parking Brake
This warning appears in the message area
of the vehicle information display when the
parking brake is set and the vehicle is
driven.
Reminder: Turn OFF
Headlights
This warning appears when the headlights
are left in the ON position when exiting the
vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the
OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor-
mation, see “Headlight and turn signal
switch” (P. 2-36).
Shift to Park
This warning appears when the ignition
switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the
shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also,
a chime sounds when the ignition switch is
in the ACC or OFF position.
If this warning appears, move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position or start the engine.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended
storage switch is not pushed in. When this
warning appears, push in the extended
storage switch to turn off the warning. For
additional information, see “Extended stor-
age switch” (P. 2-52).
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air
This warning appears when the low tire
pressure warning light in the meter illumi-
nates and low tire pressure is detected. The
warning appears each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position as long
as the low tire pressure warning light re-
mains illuminated. If this warning appears,
stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres-
sures of all four tires to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional
information, see “Low tire pressure warning
light” (P. 2-12) and “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5).
Transmission Shift Position
indicator
This indicator shows the transmission shift
position.
AWD Error: See Owner’s
Manual
This warning appears when the all-wheel
drive system is not functioning properly
while the engine is running.
Instruments and controls 2-27
AWD High Temp. Stop
Vehicle
This warning may appear while trying to
free a stuck vehicle due to increased oil
temperature. The driving mode may
change to 2-Wheel Drive (2WD). If this
warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with
the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do
so. Then if the warning turns off, you can
continue driving.
Tire Size Incorrect: See
Owner’s Manual
This warning may appear if there is a large
difference between the diameters of the
front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a
safe area, with the engine idling. Check that
all the tire sizes are the same, that the tire
pressure is correct and that the tires are
not excessively worn.
CVT Error: See Owner's
Manual
This warning appears when the there is a
problem with the CVT system. If this
warning appears, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Alarm - Time for a break?
This indicator appears when the driver en-
ables the timer alert function within the
driver assistance settings and the selected
set time is expired. The time is based on
ignition on time and can be set up to six
hours.
Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection
emergency warning
indicator
This indicator appears along with an au-
dible warning, when the system detects
the possibility of a forward collision.
For additional information, see “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” (P. 5-87).
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
and Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA) indicator
This indicator appears when the BSW and
RCTA systems are engaged.
For additional information, see “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” (P. 5-38) and “Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-47).
Cruise control indicator
These indicators show the cruise control
system status.
For additional information, see “Cruise con-
trol” (P. 5-55).
Cruise ON
This message appears if the cruise
control switch on the steering wheel is
pressed and Cruise Control Alerts are en-
abled in the vehicle information display.
For additional information, see “Cruise con-
trol” (P. 5-55).
Cruise Target Speed SET
This message will appear if the Cruise Control
system is on when the SET switch is pushed
and the Cruise Control Alerts are enabled.
For additional information, see “Cruise con-
trol” (P. 5-55).
Currently Unavailable
This message appears when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system is turned
off. The Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
system will be turned off automatically.
For additional information, see “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system” (P. 5-122) and
“Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P. 5-32).
2-28 Instruments and controls
Driver Attention Alert -
TakeaBreak?
This alert appears when the system has
detected that the driver may be displaying
fatigue or a lack of attention.
Driver Attention Alert
Malfunction
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Driver Alertness (I-DA) system is not func-
tioning properly. For additional information,
see “Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)”
(P. 5-110).
Forward Driving Aids temporarily
disabled. Front Sensor blocked. See
Owner’s Manual
This message appears when the front ra-
dar sensor may be obstructed due to:
• mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc.
• inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
All forward driving aids are temporarily dis-
abled until the system detects that the
front radar sensor is no longer obstructed.
For additional information, see:
• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection (P. 5-87)
• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (P. 5-58)
• Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-
FCW ) (P. 5-98)
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW)/ Intelligent Lane
Intervention (I-LI) indicator
This indicator appears when the LDW
and/or Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
systems are engaged.
For additional information, see “Lane De-
parture Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-27) and “Intelli-
gent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P. 5-32).
Intelligent Cruise Control
(ICC) indicators
These indicators show the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC) system status. For ad-
ditional information, see “Intelligent Cruise
Control (ICC)” (P. 5-58).
Intelligent Cruise ON
This message appears if the Intelli-
gent Cruise Control (ICC) switch on the
steering wheel is pressed and Cruise Con-
trol Alerts are enabled in the vehicle infor-
mation display.
For additional information, see “Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC)” (P. 5-58).
Malfunction See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears when one of the fol-
lowing systems (if so equipped) is not func-
tioning properly:
• Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection
• Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
• Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)
• Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW )
• Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
• Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
• Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
If one or more of these warning appears,
have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
For additional information, see “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” (P. 5-87), “Blind Spot Warning
(BSW)” (P. 5-38), “Driver Attention Alert”
(P. 5-110), “Intelligent Forward Collision
Warning (I-FCW)” (P. 5-98), “Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-27), “Rear Automatic
Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-82) and “Rear Cross Traf-
fic Alert (RCTA)” (P. 5-47).
Instruments and controls 2-29
Parking Sensor
This indicator appears when the sensor is
activated. Pressing the
button while
the sonar screen is displayed will dismiss
this message until the next time the sen-
sors are activated. The Parking Sensor sys-
tem will remain on, unless it is disabled in
the vehicle information display. For addi-
tional information, see “Front and rear so-
nar system” (P. 5-125).
Rear Automatic Braking
(RAB) indicator
This indicator appears to indicate the sta-
tus of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
system. For additional information, see
“Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-82).
Speed Limit Sign indicator
This message may appear when the Traffic
Sign Recognition system is engaged.
For additional information, see “Traffic Sign
Recognition” (P. 5-24).
Target Speed SET with Intelligent
Distance Control
This message will appear if the Intelligent
Cruise Control system is on when the SET
switch is pushed and the Cruise Control
Alerts are enabled.
For additional information, see “Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC)” (P. 5-58).
Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature
This message appears when the camera
detects an interior temperature of more
than 104°F (40°C). For additional informa-
tion, see “Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) with Pedestrian Detection” (P. 5-87),
“Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” (P. 5-58), “In-
telligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P. 5-32),
“Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” (P. 5-27) or
“Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)” (P. 5-24).
Unavailable: Road is Slippery
This message appears when the Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC) or the Intelligent Lane
Intervention (I-LI) systems become un-
available because the road is slippery. For
additional information, see “Intelligent
Cruise Control (ICC)” (P. 5-58) or “Intelligent
Lane Intervention (I-LI)” (P. 5-32).
Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction
This message appears when one of the
following systems (if so equipped) be-
comes unavailable because a radar block-
age is detected.
• Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (P. 5-38)
• Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (P. 5-47)
Vehicle ahead detection
indicator
This indicator appears when the Auto-
matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe-
destrian Detection system is engaged and
has detected a vehicle.
For additional information, see “Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian
Detection” (P. 5-87).
2-30 Instruments and controls
Your vehicle has two types of security
systems:
• Vehicle security system
• NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual
and audible alarm signals if someone
opens the doors, liftgate or the hood when
the system is armed. It is not, however, a
motion detection type system that acti-
vates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-
nents in all situations. Always secure your
vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your Intelligent Key in the ve-
hicle, and always lock the vehicle when un-
attended. Be aware of your surroundings,
and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever
possible.
Many devices offering additional protec-
tion, such as component locks, identifica-
tion markers, and tracking systems, are
available at auto supply stores and spe-
cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer
such equipment. Check with your insur-
ance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection
features.
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
so equipped). The system can be
armed even if the windows and moon-
roof are open.
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the
vehicle.
3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock
all doors. The doors can be locked with
the Intelligent Key, door handle request
switch or power door lock switch.
Key fob operation:
4. Confirm that the
indicator light
comes on. The
indicator stays
illuminated for a period of time indicat-
ing that the system is in the pre-armed
phase.
The
indicator light will blink every
3 seconds once the security system is
armed.
If during the pre-armed phase one of
the following occurs, the system will not
arm:
• A door is opened with the release button
with the Intelligent Key on your person.
• The doors are unlocked using the unlock
button on the Intelligent Key.
• The ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position.
LIC2930
SECURITY SYSTEMS
Instruments and controls 2-31
• Even when the driver and/or passen-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate when all the doors, hood and
liftgate are locked with the ignition
switch placed in the LOCK position.
When placing the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position, the system will be
released.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the
following alarm:
• The turn signals blink and the horn
sounds intermittently.
• The alarm automatically turns off after a
period of time. However, the alarm reacti-
vates if the vehicle is tampered with
again. The alarm can be shut off by un-
locking the driver's door or liftgate by
pressing the
button on the Intelli-
gent Key.
The alarm is activated by:
• Opening the door or liftgate without us-
ing the Intelligent Key (even if the door is
unlocked by releasing the door inside
lock switch).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driv-
er’s door or the liftgate by pressing the
button on the Intelligent Key or push-
ing the request switch on the driver's or
passenger's door with the Intelligent Key in
range of the door handle.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of a registered key.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device contains licence-exempt
transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply
with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada’s licence-exempt
RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause interference. (2) This de-
vice must accept any interference, in-
cluding interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
2-32 Instruments and controls
Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF,
LOCK or ACC position.
This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is
malfunctioning, the light will remain on
while the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, seek service for the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as
soon as possible. Please bring all regis-
tered keys that you have. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may
lead to an accident. Warm the wind-
shield with the defroster before you
wash the windshield.
LIC0474 LIC3028
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-33
CAUTION
• Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
• Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
• Do not fill the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir with windshield-
washer fluid concentrates at full
strength. Some methyl alcohol
based windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
• Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid
concentrates with water to the
manufacturer’s recommended levels
before pouring the fluid into the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
Do not use the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-
washer fluid concentrate and water.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is in-
terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that
is on and around the wiper arms. In ap-
proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on
again to operate the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper
at the following speed:
䊊
1
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent opera-
tion can be adjusted by turning the
knob toward
O
A
(slower) or
O
B
(faster).
Also, the intermittent operation speed
varies in accordance with the vehicle
speed (if so equipped). (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the in-
termittent operation speed will be
faster.)
䊊
2
Low (LO) — continuous low speed
operation
䊊
3
High (HI) — continuous high speed
operation
Push the lever up
O
4
to have one sweep
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you
O
5
to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
NOTE:
The Speed Dependent feature may be
disabled. For additional information, see
“Vehicle information display” (P. 2-17).
2-34 Instruments and controls
REAR SWITCH OPERATION
If the rear window wiper operation is inter-
rupted by snow, etc., the wiper may stop
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove
the snow, etc. on and around the wiper
arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch
ON again to operate the wiper.
The rear window wiper and washer oper-
ate when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. Turn the switch clockwise from
the OFF position to operate the wiper.
䊊
1
Intermittent (INT) — intermittent opera-
tion (not adjustable)
䊊
2
Low (ON) — continuous low speed
operation
Push the switch forward
O
3
to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the window and
obscure your vision.Warm the rear win-
dow with the defroster before you
wash the rear window.
CAUTION
• Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
• Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
• Do not fill the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir with windshield-
washer fluid concentrates at full
strength. Some methyl alcohol
based windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
• Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid
concentrates with water to the
manufacturer's recommended lev-
els before pouring the fluid into the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
Do not use the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-
washer fluid concentrate and water.
LIC3101
Instruments and controls 2-35
To defrost the rear window glass and out-
side mirrors (if so equipped), place the igni-
tion switch in the ON position and push the
rear window defroster switch on. The rear
window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to
turn the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.
NOTE:
The top and bottom few rows of wires on
the rear window are not part of the rear
window defroster system. These wires
make up the antenna for the audio
system.
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
䊊
1
Rotate the switch to the position,
and the front parking, tail, license plate,
and instrument panel lights will come
on.
䊊
2
Rotate the switch to the position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.
LIC2923 LIC3240
Type A (if so equipped)
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
2-36 Instruments and controls
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
LIC3241
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC4564
Type C (if so equipped)
LIC4597
Type D (if so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-37
Autolight system
The autolight system allows the headlights
to turn on and off automatically. The auto-
light system can:
• Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights
automatically when it is dark.
• Turn off all the lights (except daylight run-
ning lights) when it is light.
• Keep all the lights on for a period of time
after you place the ignition switch in the
OFF position and all doors are closed.
NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and
the time delay for autolight shutoff
can be adjusted. For additional infor-
mation, see “Vehicle information dis-
play” (P. 2-17).
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
position
O
1
.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position.
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned off
and a door is opened and left open, the
headlights remain on for a period of time. If
another door is opened while the head-
lights are on, then the timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
switch to the OFF (if so equipped),
,or
position.
Be sure you do not put anything on top of
the autolight sensor located in the top
side
O
1
of the instrument panel. The auto-
light sensor controls the autolight; if it is
covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it
is dark out and the headlights will illumi-
nate. If this occurs while parked with the
engine off and the ignition switch placed
in the ON position, your vehicle's battery
could become discharged.
LIC3474 LIC2237
2-38 Instruments and controls
Headlight beam select
䊊
1
To select the high beam function, push
the lever forward while the low beams
are on. The high beam lights come on
and the
indicator light illuminates.
䊊
2
Pull the lever back to return to the low
beams.
䊊
3
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off.
The low beams do not need to be on
for this to function.
High Beam Assist
The High Beam Assist system will operate
when the vehicle is driven at speeds of ap-
proximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above.
If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle
appears in front of your vehicle when the
headlight high beam is on, the headlight
will be switched to the low beam
automatically.
WARNING
• The High Beam Assist system is a
convenience but it is not a substitute
for safe driving operation. The driver
should remain alert at all times, en-
sure safe driving practices and
switch the high beams and low beam
manually when necessary.
• The high beam or low beam may not
switch automatically under the fol-
lowing conditions. Switch the high
beam and low beam manually.
– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, wind, etc.).
– When a light source similar to a
headlight or tail light is in the vi-
cinity of the vehicle.
– When the headlights of the on-
coming vehicle or the leading ve-
hicle are turned off, when the color
of the light is affected due to for-
eign materials on the lights, or
when the light beam is out of
position.
– When there is a sudden, continu-
ous change in brightness.
– When driving on a road that
passes over rolling hills, or a road
that has level differences.
– When driving on a road with many
curves.
– When a sign or mirror-like surface
is reflecting intense light towards
the front of the vehicle.
– When the container, etc. being
towed by a leading vehicle is re-
flecting intense light.
– When a headlight on your vehicle
is damaged or dirty.
– When the vehicle is leaning at an
angle due to a punctured tire, be-
ing towed, etc.
LIC3250
Instruments and controls 2-39
• The timing of switching the low
beam and high beam may change
under the following situations.
– The brightness of the headlights
of the oncoming vehicle or leading
vehicle.
– The movement and direction of
the oncoming vehicle and the
leading vehicle.
– When only one light on the on-
coming vehicle or the leading ve-
hicle is illuminated.
– When the oncoming vehicle or the
leading vehicle is a two-wheeled
vehicle.
– Road conditions (incline, curve,
the road surface, etc.).
– The number of passengers and
the amount of luggage.
High Beam Assist operation
To activate the High Beam Assist system,
turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po-
sition
O
1
and push the lever forward
O
2
(high beam position). The High Beam
Assist indicator light in the meter will illumi-
nate while the headlights are turned on.
If the High Beam Assist indicator light does
not illuminate in the above condition, it may
indicate that the system is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
When the vehicle speed lowers to less than
approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the head-
light uses the low beam.
To turn off the High Beam Assist system,
turn the headlight switch to the
posi-
tion or select the low beam position by
placing the lever in the neutral position.
LIC4115
2-40 Instruments and controls
Ambient image sensor maintenance
The ambient image sensor
O
A
for the High
Beam Assist system is located in front of
the inside mirror. To maintain the proper
operation of the high beam assist system
and prevent a system malfunction, be sure
to observe the following:
• Always keep the windshield clean.
• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-
parent material) or install an accessory
near the ambient image sensor.
• Do not strike or damage the areas
around the ambient image sensor. Do
not touch the sensor lens that is located
on the ambient image sensor.
If the ambient image sensor is damaged
due to an accident, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Battery saver system
The battery saver system automatically
turns off the following lights after a period
of time when the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position and the doors are closed:
• Headlights, when the headlight switch is
in the
or position
• Interior lights, when left in the ON position
After the headlights automatically turn off
with the headlight switch in the
or
position, the headlights will illuminate
again if the headlight switch is moved to
the OFF position and then turned to the
or position.
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature
automatically turns off the headlights
after a period of time, you should turn
the headlight switch to the OFF posi-
tion when the engine is not running to
avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
(DRL) SYSTEM
The LED portion of the headlights auto-
matically illuminate at 100% intensity when
the engine is started with the parking
brake released. The LED DRL operate with
the headlight switch in the OFF position or
in the
position. Turn the headlight
switch to the
position for full illumina-
tion when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi-
nate. The LED DRL illuminate when the
parking brake is released. The LED DRL will
remain on until the ignition switch is placed
in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the LED DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and
others.
LSD4102
Instruments and controls 2-41
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
Press the “+” button
O
A
to increase the
brightness of instrument panel lights.
Press the “-” button
O
B
to decrease the
brightness of instrument panel lights.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
䊊
1
Move the lever up or down to signal
the turning direction. When the turn is
completed, the turn signal cancels
automatically.
Lane change signal
䊊
2
Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever
does not latch, to signal a lane change.
Hold the lever until the lane change is
completed.
Move the lever up or down until the turn
signal begins to flash, but the lever does
not latch, and release the lever. The turn
signal will automatically flash three times.
Choose the appropriate method to signal
a lane change based on road and traffic
conditions.
NOTE:
The 3 Flash Pass feature may be dis-
abled. For additional information, see
“How to use the vehicle information dis-
play” (P. 2-17).
LIC4161 LIC3252
2-42 Instruments and controls
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so
equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
switch to the
position, then turn the
fog light switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight
switch in the AUTO position, the headlights
must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
the
position.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low
beams selected for the fog lights to oper-
ate. The fog lights automatically turn off
when the high beam headlights are
selected.
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon
on the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental
front air bag system may result in seri-
ous personal injury.
LIC3256 LIC2227
HORN
Instruments and controls 2-43
The climate controlled seat warms up or
cools down the front seat by blowing warm
or cool air from under the surface of the
seat. The climate control switch is located
on the center console.
The climate controlled seat can be oper-
ated as follows:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position.
2. Turn the control knob
O
A
to the heat side
O
1
or the cool side
O
2
. The indicator light
O
B
on the control knob will illuminate.
3. Adjust the desired amount of air using
the control knob. The climate controlled
seat blower remains on low speed for
approximately 60 seconds after turning
the switch on or selecting the desired
temperature.
4. When the vehicle's interior is warmed or
cooled, or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the control knob to the
off (center) position. The indicator light
O
B
on the control knob goes off with the
switch in the off (center) position.
To check the air filter for the climate con-
trolled seat, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the climate controlled seats if you or
the occupants cannot monitor seat
temperatures or have an inability to
feel pain in those body parts in contact
with the seat. Use of the climate con-
trolled seats by such people could re-
sult in serious injury.
CAUTION
• The battery could run down if the cli-
mate control seat is operated while
the engine is not running.
• Do not use the climate control seat
for extended periods or when no one
is using the seat.
• Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates heat, such as a blan-
ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other-
wise, the seat may become
overheated.
• Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar objects. This may result in
damage to the climate controlled
seat.
• Any liquid spilled on the seat should
be removed immediately with a dry
cloth.
• The climate controlled seat has an air
filter. Do not operate the climate con-
trolled seat without an air filter. This
may result in damage to the system.
• When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
similar materials.
SIC4334
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT
SWITCHES (if so equipped)
2-44 Instruments and controls
• If any malfunctions are found or the
climate controlled seat does not op-
erate, turn the switch off and have
the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat tem-
peratures or have an inability to feel
pain in those body parts in contact with
the seat. Use of the seat heater by such
people could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
• The battery could run down if the
seat heater is operated while the en-
gine is not running.
• Do not use the seat heater for ex-
tended periods or when no one is us-
ing the seat.
• Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates heat, such as a blan-
ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other-
wise, the seat may become
overheated.
• Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in
damage to the heater.
• Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with
a dry cloth.
• When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
similar materials.
• If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LIC3475
HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-45
The front seats are warmed by built-in
heaters.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
as desired. The indicator light in the
switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and
off. The indicator light will remain on as
long as the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to push the
switch to turn it off.
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat tem-
peratures or have an inability to feel
pain in body parts that contact the
seat. Use of the seat heater by such
people could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
• The battery could run down if the
seat heater is operated while the en-
gine is not running.
• Do not use the seat heater for ex-
tended periods or when no one is us-
ing the seat.
• Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates heat, such as a blan-
ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other-
wise, the seat may become
overheated.
LIC3475
HEATED REAR SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
2-46 Instruments and controls
• Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in
damage to the heater.
• Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with
a dry cloth.
• When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
similar materials.
• If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The rear seats are warmed by built-in heat-
ers. The switches are located on the rear of
the front center console and can be oper-
ated independently of each other.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON
position.
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,
as desired. The indicator light in the
switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and
off. The indicator light will remain on as
long as the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the
switch off.
The heated steering wheel system is de-
signed to operate only when the surface
temperature of the steering wheel is below
68°F (20°C).
Push the heated steering wheel switch to
warm the steering wheel after the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
indicator light will come on.
If the surface temperature of the steering
wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will
heat the steering wheel and cycle off and
on to maintain a temperature above 68°F
(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as
long as the system is on.
LIC2221
HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH
(if so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-47
Push the switch again to turn the heated
steering wheel system off manually. The
indicator light will go off.
NOTE:
• Once activated, your heated steering
wheel will automatically turn on and
off to maintain a temperature above
68°F (20°C).
• When the temperature of the steering
wheel is above 122°F (50°C) and the
heated steering wheel switch is turned
on, the system will not heat the steer-
ing wheel. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
The dynamic driver assistance switch is
used to temporarily activate the Intelligent
Lane Intervention (I-LI) system that is en-
abled using the settings menu of the ve-
hicle information display.
The I-LI system can be turned on with the
dynamic driver assistance switch after
starting the engine.
The dynamic driver assistance switch illu-
minates for a few seconds when the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON position.
When the dynamic driver assistance
switch is turned off, the indicator
O
1
on the
switch is off. The indicator will also be off if
the I-LI system is deactivated using the ve-
hicle information display.
The I-LI system warns the driver with a
warning light and a chime, and helps assist
the driver to return the vehicle to the center
of the traveling lane by applying the brakes
to the left or right wheels individually (for a
short period of time). For additional infor-
mation, see “Intelligent Lane Intervention
(I-LI)” (P. 5-32) and “Vehicle information dis-
play” (P. 2-17).
LIC3681
DYNAMIC DRIVER ASSISTANCE
SWITCH
2-48 Instruments and controls
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is de-
pressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
OFF switch. The
indicator light will
come on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. For addi-
tional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” (P. 5-122).
When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off
the VDC system, the Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection
and Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) systems
are also turned off. For additional informa-
tion, see “Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) with Pedestrian Detection”(P. 5-87)
and “Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)” (P. 5-82).
The E-call (SOS) button is used in combina-
tion with a NissanConnect® Services sub-
scription to call for assistance in case of an
emergency.
Pressing the button will (with a paid sub-
scription) reach a response specialist that
will provide assistance based on the situa-
tion described by the vehicle’s occupant.
For additional information, or to enroll your
vehicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/
connect, www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect,
or www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect/fr or
call 855–426–6628.
LIC3344 LIC3357
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
E-CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so
equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-49
The Rear Door Alert system functions un-
der certain conditions to indicate there
may be an object or passenger in the rear
seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the
vehicle.
The Rear Door Alert system is initially dis-
abled. The driver can enable the system
using the vehicle information display. For
additional information, see “Vehicle infor-
mation display warnings and indicators”
(P. 2-25).
When the system is enabled:
• The system is activated when a rear door
is opened and closed within 10 minutes of
the vehicle being driven. When the driver
door is closed and the system is acti-
vated, a visual message appears in the
vehicle information display. For additional
information, see “Rear Door Alert is acti-
vated” (P. 2-25).
• If a rear door is opened and closed but
the vehicle is not driven within approxi-
mately 10 minutes, the system will not be
activated. A rear door must be opened
and closed and the car driven within 10
minutes for the system to activate.
When the Rear Door Alert system is acti-
vated:
• When the driver puts the vehicle in the P
(Park) position, a notification message
appears in the vehicle information dis-
play with the options to “Dismiss Mes-
sage” or “Disable Alert” if desired.
• Select “Disable Alert” to temporarily
disable for that stop.
• No selection or ‘Dismiss Message” will
keep the alert enabled for that stop.
• If the alert is enabled when a driver exits
the vehicle, a message will appear in the
vehicle information display that states
“Check Rear Seat for All Articles.”
If “Horn & Alert” setting is selected:
• An audible horn sound will occur after
a short time unless a rear door is
opened and closed within a short time
to deactivate the alert.
• If the doors are locked before the aler t
is deactivated by opening a rear door,
the horn will sound.
• If the liftgate is opened before a rear
door is opened, the horn will be de-
layed until after the liftgate is closed.
NOTE:
If “Alert Only” setting is selected, the
message alert will still be shown in the
vehicle information display but the horn
will not sound.
WARNING
• If the driver selects “Disable Alert”, no
audible alert will be provided regard-
less of rear door open/close status.
• There may be times when there is an
object or passenger in the rear
seat(s) but the audible alert does not
sound. For example, this may occur if
rear seat passengers enter or exit the
vehicle during a trip.
• The system does not directly detect
objects or passengers in the rear
seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a
rear door is opened and closed, indi-
cating that there may be something
in the rear seat(s).
NOTE:
There may be times when the horn
sounds but there are no objects or pas-
sengers in the rear seat(s).
REAR DOOR ALERT
2-50 Instruments and controls
For additional information, see “Rear Door
Alert is activated” (P. 2-25).
12V OUTLETS
The power outlets are for powering electri-
cal accessories such as cellular tele-
phones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A)
maximum.
The vehicle’s power outlets are powered
only when the ignition switch is in the ACC
or ON position.
Open the cap to use a power outlet.
LIC4598
Instrument Panel
LIC3705
Center Console
POWER OUTLETS
Instruments and controls 2-51
CAUTION
• The outlet and plug may be hot dur-
ing or immediately after use.
• Only certain power outlets are de-
signed for use with a cigarette lighter
unit. Do not use any other power out-
let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
• Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
• Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
• Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the ve-
hicle battery.
• Avoid using power outlets when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear
window defroster is on.
• Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned off.
• Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal tem-
perature fuse may open.
• When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.
The extended storage switch is pulled out
when in transit from the factory to the re-
tailer. It is located in the fuse panel to the
left of the steering wheel on the instrument
panel. If any electrical equipment does not
operate, ensure the extended storage
switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.
LIC3199
Cargo Area
LIC4599
EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH
2-52 Instruments and controls
FRONT-DOOR POCKETS
LIC3266
Pulled position
LIC3268
Pushed position
LIC3671
STORAGE
Instruments and controls 2-53
CONSOLE SIDE POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS
There may be one or two seatback pockets
located on the back of the driver and pas-
senger seats. The pockets can be used to
store maps.
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the driv-
er’s and/or front passenger’s NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System (if so
equipped), please observe the follow-
ing items:
• Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket or head restraint/headrest.
• Do not place heavy loads heavier
than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback,
head restraint/headrest or in the
seatback pocket.
LIC3200 LIC1328
2-54 Instruments and controls
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays
to help prevent injury in an accident or
sudden stop.
LIC3854
Front console
LIC2214
Rear armrest
LIC3202
Rear center console
Instruments and controls 2-55
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock
the glove box. The valet key (if so equipped)
cannot be used to lock or unlock the glove
box.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or
a sudden stop.
CONSOLE BOX
To open the console box, press in on the
lever and raise the lid.
To close, push the lid down until the lock
latches.
OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES
STORAGE
To open the sunglasses holder, push and
release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the
holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to avoid obstructing the
driver’s view and to help prevent an
accident.
LIC3003 LIC3991 LIC2312
2-56 Instruments and controls
CAUTION
• Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
• Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
• Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used to
prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid
is hot, it can scald you or your
passenger.
• Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
• Do not recline the rear seatback
when you use the cup holders on the
rear armrest. Doing so may cause the
beverages to spill over, and if they are
hot, they may scald the passengers.
LIC3854
Front console
LIC2915
Bench seat
Instruments and controls 2-57
CAUTION
• Do not use the bottle holder for any
other objects that could be thrown
about in the vehicle and possibly in-
jure people during sudden braking or
an accident.
• Do not use the bottle holder for open
liquid containers.
CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN
To access the floor storage area, pull up on
the left and right side of the cargo floor.
LIC3672
Bottle holder — front
LIC2933
Bottle holder — rear
LIC3204
2-58 Instruments and controls
LUGGAGE HOOKS
When securing items using luggage hooks
located on the back of the seat or side
finisher do not apply a load over more than
6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single hook.
The luggage hooks that are located on the
floor should have loads less than 110 lbs.
(490 N) to a single hook.
The luggage hooks can be used to secure
cargo with ropes or other types of straps.
WARNING
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from slid-
ing or shifting. Do not place cargo
higher than the seatbacks. In a sud-
den stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
• Use suitable ropes and hooks to se-
cure cargo.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-
gage area. It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area inside of a ve-
hicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be se-
riously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat belts.
• The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
items in the cargo area. Secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in
a collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
a seat and using a seat belt properly.
COAT HOOKS
The coat hooks, located on the rear assist
grips, may be used to store coats and other
articles of clothing.
CAUTION
Do not apply more than 33 lbs. (15 kg) to
the rear assist grip coat hook.
LTI2113 LIC4173
Instruments and controls 2-59
ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
WARNING
• Always install the crossbars onto the
roof side rails before loading cargo of
any kind. Loading cargo directly onto
the roof side rails or the vehicle’s roof
may cause vehicle damage.
• Roof rack cross bars should be evenly
distributed.
• Do not exceed maximum roof rack
crossbars load capacity and always
distribute the load uniformly.
• Heavy loading of the crossbars has
the potential to affec t the vehicle
stability and handling during sudden
or unusual handling maneuvers.
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from slid-
ing or shifting. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
• Drive extra carefully when the vehicle
is loaded at or near the cargo carry-
ing capacity, especially if the signifi-
cant portion of that load is carried on
the crossbars.
CAUTION
• Use care when placing or removing
items from the roof rack. If you can-
not comfortably lift the items onto
the roof rack from the ground, use a
ladder or a stool.
Do not apply any load directly to the roof
side rails
O
A
. Crossbars
O
B
must be in-
stalled before applying load/cargo/
luggage to the roof of the vehicle.
Genuine NISSAN accessory crossbars may
be available through a NISSAN dealer. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
The service load capacity for the roof side
rails is 165 lbs. (74 kg.), however do not ex-
ceed the crossbars load capacity.
Be careful that your vehicle does not ex-
ceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR front and rear).
For additional information regarding GVWR
and GAWR, refer to:
• F.M.V.S.S. or C.M.V.S.S. certification label
(located on the driver’s door pillar).
LIC4202
2-60 Instruments and controls
Installing crossbars (if so
equipped)
WARNING
• It is recommended that you have the
roof rack crossbars installed by a
NISSAN dealer.
•
Protect the painted area on the vehi-
cle’s roof under the crossbars by plac-
ing a piece of cloth under the cross
bars to prevent scratch damage.
• Make sure the moonroof (if so
equipped) is in the closed position
during the installation process.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
• Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before clos-
ing the windows. Use the window
lock switch to prevent unexpected
use of the power windows.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadver-
tent door lock activation, do not
leave children, people who require
the assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
The power windows operate when the ig-
nition switch is placed in the ON position or
for a period of time after the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's
or passenger's door is opened during this
period of time, the power to the windows is
canceled.
Driver's side power window
switch
The driver's side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close all of the
windows.
LIC3238
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
3. Front passenger side automatic switch
4. Right rear passenger side switch
5. Left rear passenger side switch
6. Driver’s side automatic switch
WINDOWS
Instruments and controls 2-61
To open a window, push the switch to the
detent and continue to hold down until the
desired window position is reached. To
close a window, pull the switch to the de-
tent and continue to hold up until the de-
sired window position is reached.
Locking passengers' windows
When the window lock switch is pushed,
only the driver's side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel
the window lock function.
Front passenger's power window
switch
The passenger's window switch operates
only the corresponding passenger's win-
dow.To open the window partially, push the
switch down lightly until the desired win-
dow position is reached. To close the win-
dow partially, pull the switch up until the
desired window position is reached.
Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or
close only the corresponding windows. To
open the window, push the switch and hold
it down
O
1
. To close the window, pull the
switch up
O
2
.
LIC2397 LIC2663
2-62 Instruments and controls
Automatic operation
To fully open a window, push the window
switch down to the second detent and re-
lease it; it need not be held. The window
automatically opens all the way. To stop
the window, lift the switch up while the win-
dow is opening.
To fully close a window, pull the switch up to
the second detent and release it; it need
not be held. To stop the window, push the
switch down while the window is closing.
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be acti-
vated when a window is closed by auto-
matic operation.
Depending on the environment or driv-
ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-
tion may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the window occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances imme-
diately before the closed position
which cannot be detected. Make sure
that all passengers have their hands,
etc., inside the vehicle before closing
the window.
If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, re-
placed, or jump started, the power window
auto-reverse function may not operate
properly. Have the power window auto-
reverse system re-initialized. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
If the control unit detects something
caught in a window equipped with auto-
matic operation as it is closing, the window
will be immediately lowered.
LIC0410
Instruments and controls 2-63
The moonroof will only operate when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The moonroof is operational for a period of
time, even if the ignition switch is placed in
the ACC (if so equipped) or OFF position. If
the driver's door or the front passenger's
door is opened during this period of time,
the power to the moonroof is canceled.
When operating the power moonroof or
panoramic sunshade, the switch need not
be held continuously. To stop the moon-
roof or sunshade at any point while it is
opening or closing, push the switch
momentarily.
Sliding the moonroof
To open the moonroof, push the switch to
the open
O
1
position and release it; it need
not be held. The roof will automatically
open or close all the way.
Push the switch again to fully open the
moonroof.
To close the moonroof, push the switch to
the
O
2
position and release it. The roof will
automatically close all the way.
To stop the moonroof, push the switch
once more while it is opening or closing.
Tilting the moonroof
To tilt the moonroof up, first close the
moonroof. Push the switch to the
O
2
posi-
tion and release it; it need not be held.
To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch
to the
O
2
position and release it.
Auto-reverse function (when
closing or tilting down the
moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be acti-
vated when the moonroof is closed or
tilted down by automatic operation when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition or for a period of time after the igni-
tion switch is placed in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driv-
ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-
tion may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the moonroof occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances imme-
diately before the closed position
which cannot be detected. Make sure
that all passengers have their hands,
etc., inside the vehicle before closing
the moonroof.
When closing
If the control unit detects something
caught in the moonroof as it moves to the
front, the moonroof will immediately open
backward.
When tilting down
If the control unit detects something
caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the
moonroof will immediately tilt up.
LIC4148
POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped)
2-64 Instruments and controls
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions
and repeats opening or tilting up the
moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down
switch within 5 seconds after it happens;
the moonroof will fully close gradually.
Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.
WARNING
• In an accident you could be thrown
from the vehicle through an open
moonroof. Always use seat belts and
child restraints.
• Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out
of the moonroof opening while the
vehicle is in motion or while the
moonroof is closing.
CAUTION
• Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from the moonroof before
opening.
• Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
Panoramic sunshade
The panoramic sunshade operates when
the ignition switch is in the ON position. The
sunshade switch is located near the roof
console. When opening or closing the sun-
shade the switch need not be held.
To open the sunshade:
• To fully open the sunshade, push the
switch toward the open position
O
1
.
To close the sunshade:
• To fully close the sunshade, push the
switch toward the close position
O
2
.
WARNING
• To avoid personal injur y, keep your
hands, fingers and head away from
the sunshade arm, the arm rail and
sunshade inlet port.
• Do not allow children near the rear
sunshade system. They could be
injured.
• Do not place objects on or near the
rear sunshade. This could cause im-
proper operation or damage it.
• Do not pull or push the rear sun-
shade. This could cause improper op-
eration or damage it.
CAUTION
• Do not place objects (such as news-
papers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the
sunshade inlet port. Doing so may
entangle these objects in the sun-
shade when it is extending or retract-
ing, causing improper operation or
damage to the sunshade.
• Do not push the sunshade arm with
your hands, etc., as this may deform
it. Improper operation or damage to
the sunshade may result.
LIC4149
Instruments and controls 2-65
• Do not put any object into the sun-
shade inlet port as this may result in
improper operation or damage the
sunshade.
• Do not hang any object on the arm
rail as this may result in improper op-
eration or damage the sunshade.
• Do not forcefully pull the sunshade.
Doing so may elongate the sun-
shade. Improper operation or dam-
age to the sunshade may result.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your moonroof checked and re-
paired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the ON switch
O
1
is pushed, the foot-
well lights (if so equipped), step lights (if so
equipped), map lights and rear personal
lights will automatically turn on and stay on
for a period of time when:
• The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent
Key, a key or the request switch (if so
equipped) while all doors are closed and
the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
• The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
• Individually pushed.
When the OFF switch
O
2
is pushed, the in-
terior lights will illuminate when pushed.
When the DOOR/OFF switch is pushed and
the ON switch is pushed, all of the lights will
come on.
NOTE:
The footwell lights (if so equipped) and
step lights (if so equipped) illuminate
when the driver and passenger doors
are open regardless of the interior light
switch position. These lights will turn off
automatically after a period of time
while doors are open to prevent the bat-
tery from becoming discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery.
LIC2302
INTERIOR LIGHTS
2-66 Instruments and controls
CONSOLE LIGHT
The console light will turn on whenever the
parking lights or headlights are illuminated.
The console light brightness can be ad-
justed with the illumination brightness
control in the vehicle information display.
MAP LIGHTS
Press the button to turn the map lights on.
To turn them off, press the button again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery.
PERSONAL LIGHTS
To turn the rear personal lights on, push the
switch. To turn them off, push the switch
again.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
The light illuminates when the liftgate is
opened. When the liftgate is closed, the
light will turn off. The lights will turn off au-
tomatically after a period of time while
doors are open to prevent the batter y from
becoming discharged.
LIC2303 LIC2304 LIC3907
Rear personal lights
Instruments and controls 2-67
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-
vides a convenient way to consolidate the
functions of up to three individual hand-
held transmitters into one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
• Will operate most radio frequency de-
vices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and
security systems.
• Is powered by your vehicle's battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the
vehicle's battery is discharged or is dis-
connected, HomeLink® will retain all
programming.
When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-
ceiver is programmed, retain the original
transmitter for future programming pro-
cedures (Example: new vehicle purchases).
Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes.
For additional information, see “Program-
ming HomeLink®” (P. 2-69).
WARNING
• Your vehicle's engine should be
turned off while programming the
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. For
additional information, see “Push-
button ignition switch” (P. 5-13). Do
not breathe exhaust gases; they con-
tain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-
gerous. It can cause unconscious-
ness or death.
• Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
verse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards
became effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A
garage door opener which cannot
detect an object in the path of a clos-
ing garage door and then automati-
cally stop and reverse does not meet
current federal safety standards. Us-
ing a garage door opener without
these features increases the risk of
serious injury or death.
HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
2-68 Instruments and controls
• During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people
or objec ts are clear of the garage
door, gate, etc., that you are
programming.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position (without starting the engine)
when programming HomeLink®. It is also
recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device being programmed to
HomeLink® for quicker programming
and accurate transmission of the radio
frequency.
1. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink® surface, keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light
O
1
in view.
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press
and hold the desired HomeLink® button
and hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release until the HomeLink® indica-
tor light
O
1
flashes slowly and then rap-
idly. When the indicator light flashes
rapidly, both buttons may be released.
(The rapid flashing indicates successful
programming.)
NOTE:
Some devices may require you to replace
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in
“Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
customers and gate openers” (P. 2-70).
LIC2365 LIC4600
Instruments and controls 2-69
3. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the indi-
cator light.
• If the indicator light
O
1
is solid/
continuous, programming is com-
plete and your device should activate
when the HomeLink® button is
pressed and released.
• If the indicator light
O
1
blinks rapidly
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue
with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de-
vice. A second person may make the
following steps easier. Use a ladder or
other device. Do not stand on your ve-
hicle to perform the next steps.
4. At the receiver located on the garage
door opener motor in the garage, locate
the “learn” or “smart” button (the name
and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer but it is usually located
near where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the unit). If there is difficulty
locating the button, reference the ga-
rage door opener’s manual.
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”
button.
NOTE:
Once the button is pressed, you have
approximately 30 seconds to initiate
the next step.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press
and hold the trained HomeLink® button
for 2 seconds and release. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence up to
three times to complete the training
process. HomeLink® should now acti-
vate your rolling code equipped device.
7. If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web
site at: www.homelink.com or call
1-800-355-3515.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE
OPENERS
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
training. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-
eout” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
culties training a gate operator or garage
door opener by using the “Training” proce-
dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”
step 2 with the following:
NOTE:
When programming a garage door
opener, etc., unplug the device during
the “cycling” process to prevent possible
damage to the garage door opener
components.
1. For additional information, see “Pro-
gramming HomeLink®” step 1 (P. 2-69).
2-70 Instruments and controls
2. Using both hands, simultaneously press
and hold the desired HomeLink® button
and the hand-held transmitter button.
During training, your hand-held trans-
mitter may automatically stop transmit-
ting. Continue to press and hold the de-
sired HomeLink® button while you press
and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every 2 seconds until the
frequency signal has been learned. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several
seconds upon successful training. DO
NOT release until the HomeLink® indica-
tor light flashes slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light flashes rapidly,
both buttons may be released. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®”
step 3 to complete.
If the device was unplugged during the
programming procedure, remember to
plug it back in when programming is
completed.
OPERATING THE HOMELINK®
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after
it is programmed, can be used to activate
the programmed device. To operate, sim-
ply press and release the appropriate pro-
grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans-
ceiver button. The amber indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being
transmitted.
For convenience, the hand-held transmit-
ter of the device may also be used at any
time.
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-
DIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
hand-held transmitter information:
• replace the hand-held transmitter bat-
teries with new batteries.
• position the hand-held transmitter with
its battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface.
• press and hold both the HomeLink® and
hand-held transmitter buttons without
interruption.
• position the hand-held transmitter1-3in
(26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink®
surface. Hold the transmitter in that posi-
tion for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is
not programmed within that time, try
holding the transmitter in another posi-
tion – keeping the indicator light in view at
all times.
If you have any questions or are having
difficulty programming your HomeLink®
buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
The following procedure clears the pro-
grammed information from both buttons.
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-
ever, individual buttons can be repro-
grammed. For additional information, see
“Reprogramming a single HomeLink® but-
ton” (P. 2-72).
To clear all programming:
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do
not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Instruments and controls 2-71
HomeLink® is now in the programming
mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with “Programming
HomeLink®” - Step 1 (P. 2-69).
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver button, complete the following:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash af-
ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-
gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1 (P. 2-69).
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but-
ton has now been reprogrammed. The new
device can be activated by pressing the
HomeLink® button that was just pro-
grammed. This procedure will not affect any
other programmed HomeLink® buttons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change
the codes of any non-rolling code device
that has been programmed into HomeLink®.
Consult the Owner's Manual of each device
or call the manufacturer or dealer of those
devices for additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-
versal Transceiver with your new trans-
mitter information.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device contains licence-exempt
transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply
with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada’s licence-exempt
RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause interference. (2) This de-
vice must accept any interference, in-
cluding interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
2-72 Instruments and controls
MEMO
Instruments and controls 2-73
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys.............................................3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® .......................3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys..........................................3-4
Doors ...........................................3-5
Locking with key .............................3-5
Locking with inside lock knob ................3-6
Locking with power door lock switch .........3-6
Automatic door locks ........................3-7
Child safety rear door lock ....................3-7
NISSAN Intelligent Key® system ..................3-7
Operating range .............................3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution ...............3-9
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation ...........3-10
How to use the remote keyless entry
function .....................................3-13
Warning signals .............................3-16
Troubleshooting guide ......................3-16
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...........3-18
Remote Engine Start operating range .......3-18
Remote starting the vehicle .................3-19
Ex tending engine run time ..................3-19
Canceling a Remote Engine Start ...........3-19
Conditions the Remote Engine Start will
notwork....................................3-20
Hood ...........................................3-21
Liftgate ........................................3-21
Operating the manual liftgate
(if so equipped) ..............................3-22
Operating the power liftgate
(if so equipped) ..............................3-22
Motion-Activated Liftgate
(if so equipped) ..............................3-25
Liftgate release .............................3-26
Liftgate position setting
(if so equipped) ..............................3-28
Fuel-filler door ..................................3-28
Opener operation ...........................3-28
Fuel-filler cap ................................3-29
Steering wheel ................................. 3-31
Manual operation (if so equipped) ...........3-31
Automatic operation (if so equipped) ........ 3-31
Sun visors ......................................3-32
Vanity mirrors ...............................3-33
Card holder .................................3-33
Mirrors .........................................
3-34
Manual
anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) ..............................3-34
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) ..............................3-34
Outside mirrors .............................3-35
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to
your vehicle’s Intelligent Key System com-
ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System components.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The
new keys must be registered prior to use
with the Intelligent Key System and NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Since the registra-
tion process requires erasing all memory in
the Intelligent Key components when reg-
istering new keys, be sure to take all Intelli-
gent Keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer.
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can
be duplicated without knowing the key
number.
LPD2842
Type A (if so equipped)
1. Intelligent Key (two sets)
2. Mechanical key
3. Key number plate (one plate)
LPD2844
Type B (if so equipped)
LPD2941
Type C (if so equipped)
KEYS
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelli-
gent Key:
• Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical compo-
nents, to come into contact with wa-
ter or salt water. This could affect the
system function.
• Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
• Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
• Do not change or modify the Intelli-
gent Key.
• Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is com-
pletely dry.
• Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
• Do not attach the Intelligent Key with
a key holder that contains a magnet.
• Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID
code of that Intelligent Key from the
vehicle. This may prevent the unau-
thorized use of the Intelligent Key to
operate the vehicle. For information re-
garding the erasing procedure, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechani-
cal key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the
lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it
into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob
returns to the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock
the driver's door and glove box.
SPA1951
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key in-
stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.
For additional information, see “Doors”
(P. 3-5) and “Storage” (P. 2-53).
Valet hand-off
When you have to leave a key with a valet,
give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep
the mechanical key with you to protect
your belongings.
To prevent the glove box from being
opened during valet hand-off, follow the
procedure below.
1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical
key.
3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and
keep the mechanical key with you.
For additional information, see “Storage”
(P. 2-53).
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com-
ponents in your vehicle.
The mechanical key can be used for all the
locks.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-
isting key can be duplicated without know-
ing the key number. As many as four
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys
can be used with one vehicle. You should
bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer for registration. This is because the
registration process will erase the memory
of all key codes previously registered into
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af-
ter the registration process, these compo-
nents will only recognize keys coded into
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
during registration. Any key that is not
given to the dealer at the time of registra-
tion will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system
key, which contains an electrical tran-
sponder, to come into contact with wa-
ter or salt water. This could affect sys-
tem function.
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be
opened using the inside or outside door
handles. The doors must be unlocked to
open the doors.
WARNING
• Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping to
prevent persons from being thrown
from the vehicle. This also helps keep
children and others from uninten-
tionally opening the doors, and will
help keep out intruders.
• Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadver-
tent door lock activation, do not
leave children, people who require
the assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
LOCKING WITH KEY
To lock the door using the mechanical key,
turn the key toward the front of the vehicle
O
1
. This will only lock the door and will not
activate the security system. To arm the
security system, press the
button
on the Intelligent Key.
To unlock the door using the mechanical
key, turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle
O
2
. This will only unlock the corre-
sponding door and will not disarm the se-
curity system.
LPD2841
Driver's side
DOORS
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
For additional information, see “Security
systems” (P. 2-31).
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the lock position
O
1
,
then close the door.
To unlock the door without the key, move
the inside lock knob to the unlock position
O
2
.
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver's or front passen-
ger's side) to the lock position
O
1
. When
locking the door this way, be certain not to
leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push
the door lock switch (driver's or front pas-
senger's side) to the unlock position
O
2
.
LPD2092
Inside lock
LPD2309
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
• All doors lock automatically when the ve-
hicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
• All doors unlock automatically when the
transmission is placed in the P (Park) po-
sition or when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, depending on
the option selected in the “Vehicle Set-
tings” menu.
NOTE:
The Auto Door Unlock (if so equipped) fea-
ture can be changed using the “Vehicle
Settings” menu on the vehicle information
display. For additional information, see
“Vehicle information display” (P. 2-17).
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear
doors from being opened accidentally, es-
pecially when small children are in the
vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on
the edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the LOCK position,
the door can be opened only from the
outside.
WARNING
• Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
• The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and com-
munication systems. Do not operate
the Intelligent Key while on an air-
plane. Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored for a flight.
• Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all
the door locks using the remote control
function or pushing the request switch on
the vehicle without taking the key out from
a pocket or purse. The operating environ-
ment and/or conditions may affect the In-
telligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using
the Intelligent Key system.
LPD2374
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® SYSTEM
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
CAUTION
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is capable of receiving
and transmitting radio waves. The Intelli-
gent Key system transmits weak radio
waves from various distances. Environ-
mental conditions may interfere with the
operation of the Intelligent Key system un-
der the following operating conditions:
• When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such
as a TV tower, power station and broad-
casting station.
• When in possession of wireless equip-
ment, such as a cellular telephone, trans-
ceiver or a CB radio.
• When the Intelligent Key is in contact with
or covered by metallic materials.
• When any type of radio wave remote con-
trol is used nearby.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal
computer.
• When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating condi-
tions before using the Intelligent Key func-
tion or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies de-
pending on the operating conditions, the
battery’s life is approximately two years. If
the battery is discharged, replace it with a
new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the
“Key Battery Low” indicator illuminates in
the vehicle information display. For addi-
tional information, see “Vehicle information
display” (P. 2-17).
Since the Intelligent Key is capable of re-
ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near
equipment which transmits strong radio
waves, such as signals from a TV and per-
sonal computer, the battery life may be-
come shorter.
For additional information, see “Battery re-
placement” (P. 8-23).
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. For
information about the purchase and use of
additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range from the request
switch
O
1
.
LPD2286
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent
Key operating range becomes narrower,
and the Intelligent Key may not function
properly.
The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)
from each request switch
O
1
.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-
ating range, it is possible for anyone, even
someone who does not carry the Intelli-
gent Key, to push the request switch to
lock/unlock the doors.
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
• Do not push the door handle request
switch with the Intelligent Key held in your
hand as illustrated. The close distance to
the door handle will cause the Intelligent
Key system to have difficulty recognizing
that the Intelligent Key is outside the
vehicle.
• After locking with the door handle re-
quest switch, verify the doors are se-
curely locked by testing them.
• To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left inside the vehicle, make sure you
carry the Intelligent Key with you and then
lock the doors.
• Do not pull the door handle before push-
ing the door handle request switch. The
door will be unlocked but will not open.
Release the door handle once and pull it
again to open the door.
LPD2554
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket
or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,
you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing
the door handle request switch within the
range of operation.
Locking doors
1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close the driver’s door and push the
driver’s door request switch OR close all
doors and push any door request switch
while carrying the Intelligent Key with
you.
3. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.
4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice
and the outside chime sounds twice.
NOTE:
• Request switches for all doors and lift-
gate can be deactivated when the Ext.
Door Switch feature is switched to OFF
in the vehicle settings of the vehicle
information display. For additional in-
formation, see “Vehicle information
display” (P. 2-17).
• Doors lock with the door handle re-
quest switch while the ignition switch
is not in the LOCK position.
LPD2301 LPD2962 LPD2700
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
• Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while the driv-
er’s door is open. However, doors lock
with the mechanical key even if any
door is open.
• Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key
inside the vehicle and a chime sounds
to warn you. However, when an Intelli-
gent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can
be locked with another Intelligent Key.
WARNING
After locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure that the doors
have been securely locked by operat-
ing the door handles. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in inad-
vertently unlocking the doors, which
may decrease the safety and security
of your vehicle.
CAUTION
• When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession
before operating the request switch
to prevent the Intelligent Key from
being left in the vehicle.
• The request switch is operational
only when the Intelligent Key has
been detected by the Intelligent Key
system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key.
When the driver’s side door is open, the
doors are locked, then the Intelligent Key is
left inside the vehicle and the door is
closed, all doors will unlock automatically.
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
gent Key is in the same hand that is op-
erating the request switch to lock the
door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,
pocket or your other hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not func-
tion under the following conditions:
• When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch or
power liftgate request switch.
3. The hazard indicator lights flash once
and the outside chime sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch
again within 1 minute to unlock all doors.
NOTE:
Request switches for all doors can be
deactivated when the Ext. Door Switch
feature is switched to OFF using the
“Vehicle Settings” menu on the vehicle
information display. For additional in-
formation, see “Vehicle information
display” (P. 2-17).
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking
the doors, that door may not be unlocked.
Returning the door handle to its original
position will unlock the door. If the door
does not unlock after returning the door
handle, push the door handle request
switch to unlock the door.
All doors will be locked automatically un-
less one of the following operations is per-
formed within 1 minute after pushing the
request switch.
• Opening any door.
• Pushing the ignition switch.
Using the interior lights
The interior lights illuminate for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the inte-
rior light switch is in the DOOR position.
The lights can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following
operations:
• Placing the ignition switch in the ON
position.
• Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
• Switching the interior lights switch to the
“OFF” position.
For additional information, see “Interior
lights” (P. 2-66).
LPD2962 LPD2700
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can op-
erate all door locks using the remote key-
less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-
mote keyless function can operate at a
distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve-
hicle. The operating distance depends
upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not
function under the following conditions:
• When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
• When the Intelligent Key battery is
discharged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intel-
ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key
in the vehicle.
Type A (if so equipped)
1. (lock) button
2.
(unlock) button
3.
(panic) button
Type B (if so equipped)
1. (remote engine start) button
2.
(lock) button
3.
(unlock) button
4.
(panic) button
LPD3600 LPD3602
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Type C (if so equipped)
1. (remote engine start) button
2.
(lock) button
3.
(unlock) button
4.
(liftgate) button
5.
(panic) button
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the
button on the Intelli-
gent Key.
4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice
and the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.
WARNING
After locking the doors using the Intel-
ligent Key, be sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the
door handles. Failure to follow these in-
structions may result in inadvertently
unlocking the doors, which may de-
crease the safety and security of your
vehicle.
Unlocking doors
1. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key to unlock the driver’s door.
2. The hazard indicator lights flash once
and the driver’s door unlocks.
3. Press the
button again within 1
minute to unlock all doors.
NOTE:
The Selective Unlock feature can be
changed using the “Vehicle Settings”
menu on the vehicle information display.
For additional information, see “Vehicle
information display” (P. 2-17).
All doors will be locked automatically un-
less one of the following operations is per-
formed within 1 minute after pressing the
button:
• Opening any doors.
• Pushing the ignition switch.
Using the interior lights
The interior lights illuminate for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the inte-
rior light switch is in the DOOR position.
The lights can be turned off without waiting
by performing one of the following
operations:
• Placing the ignition switch in the ON
position.
• Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
• Switching the interior lights switch to the
“OFF” position.
For additional information, see “Interior
lights” (P. 2-66).
LPD3026
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Opening windows
The Intelligent Key allows you to simultane-
ously open windows equipped with auto-
matic operation.
To open the windows, press and hold the
button on the Intelligent Key for lon-
ger than 3 seconds.
The door windows will lower while holding
down the
button on the Intelligent
Key.
NOTE:
The windows will stop lowering at the
time the
button is released. How-
ever, the door windows cannot be closed
with the Intelligent Key.
Releasing the rear liftgate (if so
equipped)
The rear liftgate can be opened and closed
by performing the following:
• Press the
button for longer than 1
second to open the rear liftgate.
• Press the
button again for longer
than 1 second to close the rear liftgate.
When the
button is pressed during
the open or close process, the liftgate
motors will stop. When the
button is
pressed again for longer than 1 second the
liftgate will reverse direction.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
ened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding the
button on the Intelligent Key for lon-
ger than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on
for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
• It has run for a period of time.
• Any button is pressed on the Intelligent
Key.
• The request switch on the driver or pas-
senger door is pushed and the Intelligent
Key is in range of the door handle.
Answer back horn feature
If desired, the answer back horn feature
can be deactivated using the Intelligent
Key. When it is deactivated and the
button is pressed, the hazard indicator
lights flash twice. When the
button is
pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights
nor the horn operates.
NOTE:
If you change the Answer Back Horn
feature with the Intelligent Key, the ve-
hicle information display screen will
show the current mode after the igni-
tion switch has been cycled from the
OFF to the ON position. The vehicle in-
formation display screen can also be
used to change the answer back horn
mode.
For additional information, see “Ve-
hicle settings” (P. 2-17).
To deac tivate:
Press and hold the
and but-
tons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard
indicator lights will flash three times to con-
firm that the answer back horn feature has
been deactivated.
To activate:
Press and hold the
and but-
tons for at least 2 seconds once more.
The hazard indicator lights will flash once
and the horn will sound once to confirm
that the horn beep feature has been
reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does
not silence the horn if the alarm is
triggered.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
Intelligent Key button operation
light
The light blinks only when you press any
button on the Intelligent Key. The light illu-
mination only signifies that the key fob has
transmitted a signal. You may look and/or
listen to verify that the vehicle has per-
formed the intended operation. The num-
ber of blinks identifies each registered key
(i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for
your own identification purposes.
If the light does not blink, your battery may
be too weak to communicate to the ve-
hicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to
be replaced. For additional information re-
garding the replacement of a battery, see
“Battery replacement” (P. 8-23).
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
vehicle from being stolen, a chime or
buzzer sounds from inside and outside the
vehicle and a warning is displayed in the
instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning
is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle
and the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, see “Trouble-
shooting guide” (P. 3-16) and “Vehicle infor-
mation display” (P. 2-17).
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that
are programmed for the vehicle. If another
Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve-
hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif-
ferently than expected.
LPD2836
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When stopping the engine
The Shift to Park warning appears on the display
and the inside warning chime sounds continu-
ously.
The shift lever is not in the P (Park)
position.
Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
When shifting the shift lever to the
P (Park) position
The Push Ignition to OFF warning appears in the
display.
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When opening the driver's door to
get out of the vehicle
The Door/liftgate open warning appears on the
display and the inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
Place the ignition switch in the ON
position or close the driver’s door.
When closing the door after getting
out of the vehicle
The No Key Detected warning appears on the
display, the outside chime sounds three times
and the inside warning chime sounds for ap-
proximately three seconds.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The Shift to Park warning appears on the display
and the inside and outside chimes sound con-
tinuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or
OFF position and the shift lever is
not in the P (Park) position
Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position and place the ignition
switch in the OFF position.
The Rear Door Alert warning message appears
on the display, the horn sounds three times
twice, or a Check Rear Seat for All Articles
warning appears on the display.
The Rear Door Alert is activated.
Check the back seat for all articles,
press the OK button to clear the
Rear Door Alert warning message.
When closing the door with the
inside lock knob turned to LOCK
The outside chime sounds for approximately
three seconds and all the doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is inside the ve-
hicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When pushing the door handle re-
quest switch or the
button
on the Intelligent Key to lock the
door
The outside chime sounds for approximately
two seconds.
The Intelligent Key is inside the ve-
hicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When pushing the ignition switch
to start the engine
The Key Battery Low warning appears on the
display.
The battery charge is low.
Replace the battery with a new one.
For additional information, see
“Battery replacement” (P. 8-23).
The No Key Detected warning appears on the
display, the inside chime sounds three times.
The Intelligent Key is not in the ve-
hicle.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When pushing the ignition switch The Key System Fault message appears.
It warns of a malfunction with the
Intelligent Key system.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
The button will be on the NISSAN
Intelligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote
Engine Start. This feature allows the engine
to start from outside the vehicle.
Vehicles with an automatic climate control
system will default to either a heating or
cooling mode depending on outside and
cabin temperatures. For additional infor-
mation, see “Remote Engine Start with In-
telligent Climate Control” (P. 4-30).
Laws in some local communities may re-
strict or prohibit the use of Remote Engine
Start, or the amount of time a parked ve-
hicle engine may idle. For example, some
laws require a person using Remote Engine
Start to have the vehicle in view or may
restrict idling time except in freezing tem-
peratures. Check local regulations for any
requirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of
the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi-
tional information, see “Conditions the Re-
mote Engine Start will not work” (P. 3-20).
Other conditions can affect the perfor-
mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.
For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
telligent Key®” (P. 3-2).
REMOTE ENGINE START
OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
• To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadver-
tent door lock activation, do not
leave children, people who require
the assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
• Do not use Remote Engine Start in
closed spaces such as a garage. Do
not breathe exhaust gases; they con-
tain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-
gerous. It can cause unconscious-
ness or death.
CAUTION
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged or other strong radio wave
sources are present near the operating
location, the Intelligent Key operating
range becomes narrower, and the Intel-
ligent Key may not function properly.
The Remote Engine Start function can only
be used when the Intelligent Key is within
the specified operating range from the
vehicle.
The Remote Engine Start operating range
is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the
vehicle.
LPD2995
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE
To use the Remote Engine Start feature to
start the engine perform the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press the
button to lock all doors.
3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the
button until the turn signal lights
flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the
vehicle is not within view press and hold
the
button for at least 2 seconds.
The following events will occur when the
engine starts:
• The parking lights will turn on and remain
on as long as the engine is running.
• The doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
• The engine will continue to run for 10 min-
utes. Repeat the steps to extend the time
for an additional 10 minutes. For addi-
tional information, see “Extending engine
run time” (P. 3-19).
Press and hold the brake then push the
push-button ignition switch to the ON po-
sition before driving. For additional infor-
mation, see “Driving the vehicle” (P. 5-18).
EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The Remote Engine Start feature can be
extended one time by performing the
steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle”
(P. 3-19). Run time will be calculated as
follows:
• The first 10–minute run time will start
when the Remote Engine Start function is
performed.
• The second 10 minutes will start immedi-
ately when the Remote Engine Start
function is performed again. For example,
if the engine has been running for 5 min-
utes, and 10 minutes are added, the en-
gine will run for a total of 15 minutes.
• Extending engine run time will bring you
to the two Remote Engine Start limit.
A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,
or a single start with an extension, are al-
lowed between ignition cycles.
The ignition switch must be cycled to the
ON position and then back to the OFF po-
sition before the Remote Engine Start pro-
cedure can be used again.
CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE
START
To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform
one of the following:
• Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and
press
until the parking lights turn off.
• Turn on the hazard indicator flashers.
• Cycle the ignition switch on and then off.
• The extended engine run time has
expired.
• The first 10–minute timer has expired.
• The engine hood has been opened.
• The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
• The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into
the vehicle.
• The ignition switch is pushed without an
Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
• The ignition switch is pushed with an In-
telligent Key in the vehicle but the brake
pedal is not depressed.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE
START WILL NOT WORK
The Remote Engine Start will not operate if
any of the following conditions are present:
• The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
• The hood is not securely closed.
• The hazard indicator lights are on.
• The engine is still running. The engine
must be completely stopped. Wait at
least 6 seconds if the engine goes from
running to off. This is not applicable when
extending engine run time.
• The
button is not pressed and held
for at least 2 seconds.
• The
button is not pressed and held
within 5 seconds of pressing the lock
button.
• The brake is pressed.
• The doors are not closed and locked.
• The liftgate is open.
• The Key System Fault warning light re-
mains solid is in the vehicle information
display.
• The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into
the vehicle.
• Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single
Remote Engine Start with an extension,
have already been used.
• The vehicle is not in P (Park).
• There is a detected registered key already
inside of the vehicle.
• The Remote Engine Start function has
been switched to the OFF position in Ve-
hicle Settings of the vehicle information
display. For additional information, see
“Vehicle information display” (P. 2-17).
The Remote Engine Start may display a
warning or indicator in the vehicle informa-
tion display. For additional information, see
“Vehicle information display” (P. 2-17).
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
1. Pull the hood lock release handle
O
1
lo-
cated below the driver side instrument
panel until the hood springs up slightly.
2. Locate the lever
O
2
in between the hood
and grille and push the lever sideways
with your fingertips and raise the hood
O
3
.
When closing the hood, lower the hood to
approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch
and release it. This allows proper engage-
ment of the hood latch.
WARNING
• Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the hood
to fly open and result in an accident.
• If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.
WARNING
• Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from
opening while driving.
•
Do not drive with the liftgate open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For
additional information, see “Exhaust
gas (carbon monoxide)” (P. 5-4).
• To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadver-
tent door lock activation, do not
leave children, people who require
the assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
• Always be sure that hands and feet
are clear of the door frame to avoid
injury while closing the liftgate.
LPD3063
HOOD LIFTGATE
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
CAUTION
Do not use accessory carriers that at-
tach to the liftgate. Doing so will cause
damage to the vehicle.
OPERATING THE MANUAL
LIFTGATE (if so equipped)
The power door lock system allows you to
lock or unlock all doors including the lift-
gate simultaneously.
To open the liftgate, push the liftgate opener
switch
O
A
and pull up on the handle.
To close, lower and push the liftgate down
securely.
OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE
(if so equipped)
WARNING
• Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
before closing the liftgate.
• Do not leave children unattended in-
side the vehicle. They could unknow-
ingly activate switches or controls.
Unattended children could become
involved in serious accidents.
LPD2318 LPD2212
Instrument panel switch
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
NOTE:
To open, close or reverse the power lift-
gate, the shift lever must be in P (Park).
Also, the power liftgate will not operate if
battery voltage is low.
Power Open:
The power liftgate automatically moves
from the fully closed position to the fully
open position in approximately5–8sec-
onds. The power open feature can be acti-
vated by the switch on the Intelligent Key,
the instrument panel switch, the liftgate
opener switch
O
A
. A chime sounds to indi-
cate the power open sequence has been
started.
• The liftgate can be opened by the instru-
ment panel switch, liftgate opener switch
O
A
with the Intelligent Key in operating
range and liftgate button on the key fob,
even if the vehicle is locked. The liftgate
will individually unlock and open. Once
the liftgate is closed, the vehicle will re-
main in the unlock status.
• The Intelligent Key button must be held
for 1 second before the liftgate opens.
• The liftgate must be unlocked to open it
with the liftgate opener switch
O
A
if the
Intelligent Key is not in operating range.
Power Close:
The power liftgate automatically moves
from the fully open position to the second-
ary position. When the liftgate reaches the
secondary position, the cinching motor en-
gages and pulls the liftgate to its primary
latch position. Power close takes approxi-
mately7–10seconds. The power close
feature can be activated by the switch on
the Intelligent Key, the instrument panel
and the liftgate close switch
O
B
. A chime
sounds to indicate the power close se-
quence has been started.
LPD2295
Liftgate opener switch
LPD2407
Liftgate close switch
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
• If the liftgate close switch
O
B
is activated
while the cinching motor is engaged, the
cinching motor will disengage and re-
lease the latch.
• The Intelligent Key button must be held
for 1 second before the liftgate closes.
Reverse:
The power liftgate will stop immediately
during power open or power close if the
Intelligent Key switch, instrument panel
switch, liftgate opener switch
O
A
or liftgate
close switch
O
B
is pushed. The power lift-
gate will reverse direction if the Intelligent
Key switch, instrument panel switch, lift-
gate opener switch
O
A
or liftgate close
switch
O
B
is pushed a second time. A
chime will sound to announce the reversal.
Auto Reverse:
If an obstacle is detected during power
open or power close, a warning chime will
sound and the liftgate will reverse direction
and return to the full open or full close po-
sition. If a second obstacle is detected, the
liftgate motion will stop and the liftgate will
enter manual mode.
A pinch strip is mounted on each side of
the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a
pinch strip during power close, the liftgate
will reverse direction and return to the full
open position.
NOTE:
If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,
the power close function will not operate.
WARNING
There are some small distances imme-
diately before the closed position
which cannot be detected. Make sure
that all passengers have their hands,
etc., inside the vehicle before closing
the liftgate.
Manual Mode:
If power operation is not available, the lift-
gate may be operated manually. Power op-
eration may not be available if multiple ob-
stacles have been detected in a single
power cycle or if batter y voltage is low.
If the liftgate opener switch
O
A
is pushed
during power open or close, the power op-
eration will be canceled and the liftgate can
be operated manually.
To open the liftgate manually, push the lift-
gate opener switch
O
A
and lift the liftgate.
To close, lower and push the liftgate down
securely.
LPD2295
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Auto Power Liftgate System Battery
Power Saving Mode:
The vehicle goes into power saving mode
when the liftgate is open for a long time
(approximately 12 hours). This is to prevent
deterioration of the battery. The power
saving mode automatically cuts the power
supply of the power liftgate door.
When the power to the liftgate is cut off, the
manual mode must be performed. After
the manual mode is performed, the power
liftgate function is restored.
NOTE:
When a battery voltage is lower than ap-
proximately 11V, the power liftgate may
not operate after automatic return.
MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE
(if so equipped)
The liftgate can be operated using a quick
kicking motion under the center of the rear
bumper.
To operate, the Intelligent Key must be
within 47 in (120 cm) of the liftgate.
NOTE:
Tow hitches are available as an acces-
sory for this vehicle. If a tow hitch is in-
stalled, the Motion-Activated Liftgate
electronic control unit (ECU) needs to be
replaced with an ECU programmed with
towing logic for the Motion-Activated
Liftgate to function properly.
Proper operation technique
• While at the rear of the vehicle, begin
making a quick forward kicking motion.
• Raise your foot straight under the center
of the rear bumper then immediately re-
turn your foot to the ground in a continu-
ous motion.
• The kicking motion should be straight,
smooth and consistent.
• After your kick motion is complete, step
back and allow the liftgate to open/close.
•
Three beeps will sound and the liftgate will
begin moving within two seconds after the
kick.
LPD2770
Activation zone
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
CAUTION
Before performing the kicking motion,
steady your stance to prevent any loss
of balance. Also, while making the kick-
ing motion, take caution around hot ex-
haust system parts. Otherwise, there
may be danger of injury.
WARNING
Prevent unintentional liftgate
opening/closing. There may be condi-
tions when opening/closing the lift-
gate is not desired. Keep the Intelligent
Key out of range of the liftgate, (31.5 in
or 80 cm), when washing or working
around the back of the vehicle.
CAUTION
• Inter ference or malfunction can be
caused by parking in close proximity
to radio or satellite towers.
• Intelligent Key interference could be
caused if you h ave your key fob
stored next to your cell phone or any
RF-enabled smart card. For addi-
tional information, see “NISSAN Intel-
ligent Key® system” (P. 3-7).
LIFTGATE RELEASE
WARNING
• Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from
opening while driving.
•
Do not drive with the liftgate open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For
additional information, see “Exhaust
gas (carbon monoxide)” (P. 5-4).
• To avoid personal injury, do not at-
tempt to activate the power liftgate
if one or both of the liftgate struts are
removed.
LPD2771
DO: Quick forward kick and return while
the key fob is within range
LPD2764
DO NOT: Swing foot side to side or
pause during kick
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
CAUTION
• If the power liftgate does not stay
open or if the liftgate unexpectedly
closes at any time while a continuous
warning chime sounds, do not oper-
ate the liftgate. There may be a pres-
sure loss in one or both of the liftgate
struts. It is recommended that you
have the liftgate inspected. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
• Do not activate the power liftgate if
one or both of the liftgate struts are
removed. Damage to the liftgate or
power liftgate mechanisms may
occur.
Liftgate release (manual and
power)
The liftgate release mechanism allows the
liftgate to be opened in the event of a dis-
charged battery.
To release the liftgate from the inside of the
vehicle, perform the following operations:
1. Position the rear bench seat for ward. For
additional information, see “Rear bench
seat adjustment” (P. 1-6).
2. Insert a suitable tool into the top access
opening at about a 45 degree angle and
rotate to the left until the lock releases.
3. Push the liftgate up to open.
NOTE:
If you had to open the liftgate using this
procedure, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LPD2319
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING (if so
equipped)
The liftgate can be set to open to a specific
height (garage mode) by performing the
following:
1. Open the liftgate using the liftgate in-
strument panel switch, liftgate opener
switch or the Intelligent Key button.
2. Pull the liftgate down and move to the
desired height position (the liftgate will
have some resistance when being
manually adjusted).
3. Press and hold the power liftgate close
switch
O
B
located on the liftgate for
more than 3 seconds or until two beeps
are heard.
The liftgate will open to the selected posi-
tion setting. To change the position of the
liftgate, repeat steps 1-3 for setting the po-
sition of the liftgate.
OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located below
the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler
door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel-
filler door securely.
LPD2615 LPD2022
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
• Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seri-
ously injured if it is misused or mis-
handled. Always stop the engine and
do not smoke or allow open flames
or sparks near the vehicle when
refueling.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel
tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically. Continued
refueling may cause fuel overflow,
resulting in fuel spray and possibly a
fire.
• Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has
a built-in safety valve needed for
proper operation of the fuel system
and emission control system. An in-
correct cap can result in a serious
malfunction and possible injury. It
could also cause the
Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) to come on.
• Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.
• Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable
fuel containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices
when filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
• Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For
additional information, see “Fuel rec-
ommendation” (P. 10-4).
• The Loose Fuel Cap warning mes-
sage will appear if the fuel-filler cap
is not properly tightened. It may take
a few driving trips for the message to
be displayed. Failure to tighten the
fuel-filler cap properly after the
Loose Fuel Cap warning message
appears may cause the
Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL) to
illuminate.
• Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the
Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL) to illu-
minate. If the
light illuminates
because the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle. The
light should turn off after a few
driving trips. If the
light does not
turn off after a few driving trips, have
the vehicle inspected. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
•
For additional information, see “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” (P. 2-13).
• If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid
paint damage.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise
to remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder
O
1
while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until it
clicks.
Loose Fuel Cap warning message
The Loose Fuel Cap warning message ap-
pears in the vehicle information display
when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened
correctly after the vehicle has been refu-
eled. It may take a few driving trips for the
message to be displayed. To turn off the
warning message, perform the following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as
soon as possible. For additional informa-
tion, see “Fuel-filler cap” (P. 3-29).
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
3. Press the OK button on the steering
wheel for about one second to turn off
the Loose Fuel Cap warning message
after tightening the fuel-filler cap.
LPD2288 LPD3029
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WARNING
• Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving. You could lose control
of your vehicle and cause an
accident.
• Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and com-
fort. The driver's air bag inflates with
great force. If you are unrestrained,
leaning forward, sitting sideways or
out of position in any way, you are at
greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious
or fatal injuries from the air bag if you
are up against it when it inflates. Al-
ways sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel. Always use the seat
belts.
MANUAL OPERATION (if so
equipped)
Tilt and telescopic operation
Push the lock lever
O
1
down:
• Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
direction
O
2
to the desired position.
• Adjust the steering wheel forward or
backward in direction
O
3
to the desired
position.
Pull the lock lever
O
1
up firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so
equipped)
Tilt and telescopic operation
To adjust the steering wheel move the
switch
O
1
in the following directions:
• Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
direction
O
2
to the desired tilt position.
• Adjust the steering wheel forward or
backward in direction
O
3
to the desired
telescopic position.
LPD2741 LPD3132
STEERING WHEEL
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
CAUTION
For vehicles with memory seat: Failure
to reset the tilt and telescoping func-
tions of the steering wheel, after the
vehicle’s battery has been discharged,
may prevent the steering wheel posi-
tion from being adjusted.
Both the tilt and telescopic steering opera-
tion must be reset after the vehicle’s bat-
tery has been discharged in order to pre-
vent the tilt and telescopic operation from
locking in one position. When the battery
has been recharged or replaced, per form
the following:
• For tilt operation: Adjust the switch
O
1
so
the steering wheel moves to the highest
position
O
2
that can be reached.
• For telescopic operation: Adjust the
switch
O
1
so the steering wheel moves to
the most forward and backward position
O
3
that can be reached.
Performing these operations resets the
range of the steering wheel’s tilt and tele-
scopic function.
Entry/Exit function (if so
equipped)
The memory seat will make the steering
wheel move up automatically when the
driver's door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position. This lets the
driver get into and out of the seat more
easily. The steering wheel moves back into
position when the driver's door is closed
and the ignition switch is pushed.
For additional information, see “Memory
seat” (P. 3-36).
WPD0344
SUN VISORS
3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
1. To block glare from the front, swing
down
O
1
the main sun visor.
2. To block glare from the side, remove the
main sun visor from the center mount
and swing the visor to the side
O
2
.
3. To extend
O
3
the sun visor, slide in or out
as needed.
CAUTION
• Do not store the sun visor before re-
turning the extension to its original
position.
• Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.
VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun
visor down and flip open the mirror cover.
The vanity mirror will illuminate when the
mirror cover is open.
CARD HOLDER
To use the card holder, slide card into the
clip. Do not view information while operat-
ing the vehicle.
LPD2703 LPD2340
Driver’s and passenger’s side
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33
MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
MIRROR (if so equipped)
Use the night position
O
1
to reduce glare
from the headlights of vehicles behind you
at night.
Use the day position
O
2
when driving in
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when nec-
essary, because it reduces rear view
clarity.
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it au-
tomatically dims during nighttime condi-
tions and according to the intensity of the
headlights of the vehicle following you. The
automatic anti-glare feature is activated
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
The indicator light
O
2
will illuminate when
the automatic anti-glare feature is
operating.
NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sen-
sors
O
1
or apply glass cleaner to the sen-
sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensors, resulting in improper
operation.
Type A (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it au-
tomatically dims during night time condi-
tions and according to the intensity of the
headlights of the vehicle following you. The
automatic anti-glare feature is activated
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
WPD0126 LPD2418
MIRRORS
3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Type B (if so equipped)
The indicator light
O
2
will illuminate when
the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-
ing.
• To turn off the automatic anti-glare fea-
ture, press the O button. The indicator
light will turn off.
• To turn on the automatic anti-glare fea-
ture, press the | button again. The in-
dicator light will turn on.
For additional information on HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver operation, see
“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” (P. 2-68).
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
• Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-
ing. You could lose control of your ve-
hicle and cause an accident.
• Objects viewed in the outside mirror
on the passenger side are closer than
they appear. Be careful when moving
to the right. Using only this mirror
could cause an accident. Use the in-
side mirror or glance over your
shoulder to properly judge distances
to other objects.
Electric control type
The outside mirror remote control will op-
erate only when the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position.
Move the small switch
O
1
to select the left
or right mirror. Adjust each mirror to the
desired position using the large switch
O
2
.
Move the small switch to the center (neu-
tral) position to prevent accidentally mov-
ing the mirror.
LPD0469 LPD2452
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35
Manual folding outside mirrors
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to
fold it.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to
defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved
visibility. For additional information, see
“Rear window and/or outside mirror (if so
equipped) defroster switch” (P. 2-36).
Reverse tilt-down feature (if so
equipped)
The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both
outside mirror surfaces downward to pro-
vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle
when the mirror control switch is in either
the L or R position.
The mirrors automatically return to their
original position when you shift out of R
(Reverse).
The outside mirror surfaces will return to
their original position when one of the fol-
lowing conditions has occurred:
• The shift lever is moved to any position
other than R (Reverse).
• The outside mirror control switch is set to
the neutral or center position.
• The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
NOTE:
If the outside mirror control switch is in
the center position, the mirror surface
will NOT turn downward when the shift
lever is moved to R (Reverse).
For additional information, see “Memory
seat” (P. 3-36).
The memory seat system has three
features:
• Memory storage function (Key-link)
• Memory storage function (Switch)
• Entry/exit function
Key-link, when enabled, automatically re-
tains the driver’s last seat, outside mirrors
and steering wheel (if so equipped) posi-
tions for that specific key when the ignition
is turned from ON to OFF.
Each memory switch button (1 or 2) on the
driver’s door can also store one additional
position which is independent of the key-
linked position.
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
(key-link)
Use the following process to setup key-link:
1. Unlock the vehicle with the desired Intel-
ligent Key while the ignition is OFF.
2. Place the ignition in the ON position.
3. Within the “Settings” menu of the vehicle
information display, select “Key-Linked
Settings” and press the OK button on the
steering switch.
LPD2112
MEMORY SEAT (if so equipped)
3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
4. While in the menu, press the OK button
on the steering switch to turn the sys-
tem ON/OFF.
Once step 4 is completed, every time the
ignition is switched from ON to OFF, the
memory positions of the driver’s seat, out-
side mirrors and automatic steering wheel
(if so equipped) are linked to the Intelligent
Key.
Follow the same procedure if you want
to link the 2nd, 3rd or 4th Intelligent Key.
NOTE:
If new memory positions are set prior to
turning the ignition from ON to OFF, the
previously linked memory positions for
the respective key will be overwritten by
new positions.
Recalling Intelligent Key memory
positions
If the “Key-Linked Settings” are enabled in
the vehicle information display for that par-
ticular key, every time you enter the vehicle
the driver’s seat, mirrors and automatic
steering wheel (if so equipped) will auto-
matically move to the driver’s last position
of the respective Intelligent Key.
NOTE:
The key-linked memory positions can be
different from the positions stored in the
memory switch (1 or 2).
MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
(switch)
Use the following process to manually store
the two memory positions in the switch:
NOTE:
The vehicle should be stopped while set-
ting the memory.
1. Adjust the driver's seat, outside mirrors
and steering wheel (if so equipped) to
the desired positions by manually oper-
ating each adjusting switch. For addi-
tional information, see “Seats” (P. 1-2).
LPD2508
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37
2. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-
onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).
The indicator light for the pushed memory
switch will come on and stay on for ap-
proximately 5 seconds. The chime will
sound when the memory is stored.
NOTE:
If a new memory position is stored in the
same memory switch, the previous
memory position will be overwritten by
the new stored position.
Recalling switch memory
positions
To recall the manually stored positions,
push the memory switch (1 or 2). The driv-
er’s seat and automatic steering wheel (if
so equipped) will move to the positions
stored to those buttons.
ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION (if so
equipped)
This system is designed so that the driver's
seat and steering column will automati-
cally move when the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position. This allows the driver to
easily get in and out of the driver’s seat.
The driver’s seat will slide backward and
the steering wheel will move up when the
ignition is switched to OFF and the driver’s
door is open.
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will
return to the previous position when the
ignition switch is switched to ON.
The entry/exit function can be enabled or
disabled through the “Vehicle Settings” in
the vehicle information display by perform-
ing the following:
• Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF.
• Switch the Exit Steering Up from ON to
OFF.
Restarting the entry/exit function
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the
fuse opens, the stored memory positions
may be lost and some of the functions will
be restricted.
1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).
OR
2. Open and close the driver's door more
than two times with the ignition switch
in the OFF position.
The entry/exit function should now work
properly.
SYSTEM OPERATION
The memory seat system will not work or
will stop operating under the following
conditions:
• When the vehicle speed is above 4 mph
(7 km/h).
• When any of the memory switches are
pushed while the memory seat is
operating.
• When the switch for the driver ’s seat and
steering column is pushed while the
memory seat is operating.
• When the seat has already been moved
to the memorized position.
• When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
• When the shift lever is moved from P
(Park) to any other position.
3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual ...............4-2
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ...............4-3
RearView Monitor system operation ..........4-4
How to read the displayed lines ..............4-4
Difference between predicted and
actual distances .............................4-5
How to park with predicted course
lines ..........................................4-7
Adjusting the screen .........................4-8
How to turn on and off predicted
course lines ..................................4-8
RearView Monitor system limitations .........4-8
System maintenance .......................4-10
Intelligent Around View Monitor
(if so equipped) ..................................4-11
Intelligent Around View Monitor system
operation ...................................4-12
Difference between predicted and
actual distances ............................4-16
How to park with predicted course
lines .........................................4-17
How to switch the display ...................4-18
Adjusting the screen ........................4-19
Intelligent Around View Monitor system
limitations ..................................4-20
System maintenance .......................4-22
Moving Object Detection (MOD)
(if so equipped) .................................4-23
MOD system operation ......................4-24
Turning MOD on and off .....................4-26
MOD system limitations .....................4-26
System maintenance .......................4-27
Vents ..........................................4-27
Heater and Air Conditioner (automatic) .........4-29
Automatic operation ........................4-30
Manual operation ...........................4-31
Operating tips ...............................4-32
Servicing air conditioner ........................4-32
USB/iPod® charging port .......................4-33
Antenna........................................4-33
Car phone or CB radio..........................4-33
iPod®/iPhone® .................................4-34
Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s
Manual that includes the following infor-
mation.
• NissanConnect® Services (if so equipped)
• Navigation system (if so equipped)
• Audio system
• Apple CarPlay®
• Android Auto
TM
• Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system
• Viewing information
• Other settings
• Voice recognition
• General system information
NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S
MANUAL
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1. CAMERA button
WARNING
• Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the Rear-
View Monitor system could result in
serious injury or death.
• RearView Monitor is a convenience
feature and is not a substitute for
proper backing. Always turn and look
out the windows and check mirrors
to be sure that it is safe to move be-
fore operating the vehicle. Always
back up slowly.
• The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large station-
ary objects directly behind the ve-
hicle, to help avoid damaging the
vehicle.
LHA5076
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
• The distance guide line and the ve-
hicle width line should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on
a level paved surface. The distance
viewed on the monitor is for refer-
ence only and may be different than
the actual distance between the ve-
hicle and displayed objects.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automati-
cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when
the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
position. While in the R (Reverse), pressing
the CAMERA button will cycle through
guideline options. The radio can still be
heard while the RearView Monitor is active.
To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-
tor system uses a camera located just
above the vehicle’s license plate
O
1
.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-
sition to operate the RearView Monitor.
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
width and distances to objects with refer-
ence to the vehicle body line
O
A
are dis-
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
• Red line
O
1
: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
• Yellow line
O
2
: approx. 3 ft (1 m)
• Green line
O
3
: approx. 7 ft (2 m)
LHA3828 LHA4805
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Vehicle width guide lines
O
4
Indicate the vehicle width when backing
up.
Predicted course lines
O
5
Indicate the predicted course when back-
ing up. The predicted course lines will be
displayed on the monitor when the shift
lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the
steering wheel is turned. The predicted
course lines will move depending on how
much the steering wheel is turned and will
not be displayed while the steering wheel is
in the straight-ahead position.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width
of the predicted course lines are wider than
the actual width and course.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their loca-
tions on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-
ally located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the ac-
tual distance. Note that any object on the
hill is further than it appears on the
monitor.
LHA5040
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill,
the distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines are shown farther than
the actual distance. Note that any object
on the hill is closer than it appears on the
monitor.
Backing up near a projecting
object
The predicted course lines
O
A
do not touch
the object in the display. However, the ve-
hicle may hit the object if it projects over
the actual backing up course.
Backing up behind a projecting
object
The position
O
C
is shown farther than the
position
O
B
in the display. However, the po-
sition
O
C
is actually at the same distance as
the position
O
A
. The vehicle may hit the
LHA5041 LHA4995 LHA5042
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
object when backing up to the position
O
A
if the object projects over the actual back-
ing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
• If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
• On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the ac-
tual course line.
• If the battery is disconnected or be-
comes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incor-
rectly. If this occurs, please perform
the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock
to lock while the engine is
running.
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road
for more than 5 minutes.
• When the steering wheel is turned
with the ignition switch in the ACC
position, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
1. Visually check that the parking space is
safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
on the screen
O
A
when the shift lever is
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predicted
course lines
O
B
enter the parking space
O
C
.
LHA5043 LHA4770
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
the vehicle width guide lines
O
D
parallel
to the parking space
O
C
while referring
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking
brake.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. While on the main menu screen, press
the CAMERA button.
2. Touch the “Display Settings” key.
3. Touch the “Brightness,” “Contrast,” “Tint,”
“Color,” or “Black Level” key.
4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–”
key on the touch-screen display.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the RearView Monitor while the ve-
hicle is moving. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied.
HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF
PREDICTED COURSE LINES
To toggle on and off the predicted course
lines while in the P (Park) position:
1. Press the CAMERA button.
2. Touch the “Predicted Course Lines” key
to turn the feature on or off.
To toggle on and off the predicted course
lines while in the R (Reverse) position, press
the CAMERA button.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for RearView Monitor. Failure to oper-
ate the vehicle in accordance with
these system limitations could result in
serious injury or death.
LHA5047
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
• The system cannot completely elimi-
nate blind spots and may not show
every object.
• Underneath the bumper and the cor-
ner areas of the bumper cannot be
viewed on the RearView Monitor be-
cause of its monitoring range limita-
tion. The system will not show small
objects below the bumper, and may
not show objects close to the bum-
per or on the ground.
• Objects viewed in the RearView
Monitor differ from actual distance
because a wide-angle lens is used.
• Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared
to when viewed in the rearview and
outside mirrors.
• Use the displayed lines as a refer-
ence. The lines are highly affected by
the number of occupants, fuel level,
vehicle position, road conditions and
road grade.
• Make sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when backing up.
• Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is in-
stalled above the license plate.
• When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
• Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may
malfunction or cause damage result-
ing in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
• When the temperature is extremely high
or low, the screen may not clearly display
objects.
• When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
• Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong reflected
light from the bumper.
• The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.
• The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
• Objects on the monitor may not be clear
in a dark environment.
• There may be a delay when switching
between views.
• If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe
off any wax with a clean cloth dampened
with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then
wipe with a dry cloth.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin-
ner to clean the camera. This will
cause discoloration.
• Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera
O
1
, the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-
ing it with a dry cloth.
LHA3828
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1. CAMERA button
LHA5076
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
WARNING
• Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for the proper use of the
Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-
tem could result in serious injury or
death.
• The Intelligent Around View Monitor
is a convenience feature and is not a
substitute for proper vehicle opera-
tion because it has areas where ob-
jects cannot be viewed. The four cor-
ners of the vehicle in particular, are
areas where objects do not always
appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear
views. Always check your surround-
ings to be sure that it is safe to move
before operating the vehicle. Always
operate the vehicle slowly.
• The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other
maneuvers.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-
tem is designed as an aid to the driver in
situations such as slot parking or parallel
parking.
The monitor displays various views of the
position of the vehicle in a split screen for-
mat. Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
• Front View
An approximately 150–degree view of the
front of the vehicle.
• Rear View
An approximately 150–degree view of the
rear of the vehicle.
• Bird's-Eye View
The surrounding views of the vehicle
from above.
• Front-Side View
The view around and ahead of the front
passenger's side wheel.
• Full Screen Rear View
The view to the rear of the vehicle (which
is a little wider than the standard Rear
View).
To display the multiple views, the Intelligent
Around View Monitor system uses cam-
eras located in the front grille, on the vehi-
cle’s outside mirrors and one just above
the vehicle’s license plate
O
1
.
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-
sition to operate the Intelligent Around
View Monitor.
LHA3830
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
When the camera is first activated with the
bird’s-eye view in the display, a red icon (if so
equipped) will flash on the screen. This in-
dicates that the sonar system (if so
equipped) is activated. For additional infor-
mation on the front and rear sonar system
(if so equipped), see “Front and rear sonar
system” (P. 5-125).
The screen displayed on the Intelligent
Around View Monitor will automatically re-
turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after
the CAMERA button has been pressed with
the shift lever in a position other than the R
(Reverse) position.
Available views
WARNING
• The distance guide lines and the ve-
hicle width lines should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on
a paved, level surface. The apparent
distance viewed on the monitor may
be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed
objects.
• Use the displayed lines and the
bird’s-eye view as a reference. The
lines and the bird’s-eye view are
greatly affected by the number of oc-
cupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle po-
sition, road condition and road
grade.
• If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
and the bird's-eye view may be dis-
played incorrectly.
• When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-
jects viewed in the monitor are fur-
ther than they appear. When driving
the vehicle down a hill, objects
viewed in the monitor are closer than
they appear.
• Objects in the rear view will appear
visually opposite compared to when
viewed in the monitor and outside
mirrors.
• Use the mirrors or actually look to
properly judge distances to other
objects.
• On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course lines and the
actual course line.
• The vehicle width and predicted
course lines are wider than the actual
width and course.
• The displayed lines will appear
slightly off to the right, because the
rearview camera is not installed in
the rear center of the vehicle.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
Front and rear view
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
vehicle width and distance to objects with
reference to the vehicle body line
O
A
are
displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
• Red line
O
1
: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
• Yellow line
O
2
: approximately 3 ft (1 m)
• Green line
O
3
: approximately 7 ft (2 m)
• Green line
O
4
: approximately 10 ft (3 m)
(if so equipped)
Vehicle width guide lines
O
5
:
Indicate the approximate vehicle width
when backing up.
Predicted course lines
O
6
:
Indicate the predicted course when oper-
ating the vehicle. The predicted course
lines will be displayed on the monitor when
the steering wheel is turned. The predicted
course lines will move depending on how
much the steering wheel is turned and will
not be displayed while the steering wheel is
in the straight-ahead position.
The front view will not be displayed when
the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front
view and the steering wheel turns about
90 degrees or less from the straight-
ahead position, both the right and left
predicted course lines
O
6
are displayed.
When the steering wheel turns about 90
degrees or more, a line is displayed only
on the opposite side of the turn.
SAA1840
Front view
LHA4992
Rear view
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Bird’s-eye view
The bird's-eye view shows the overhead
view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the
vehicle position and the predicted course
to a parking space.
The vehicle icon
O
1
shows the position of
the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis-
tance between objects viewed in the
bird's-eye view may differ somewhat from
the actual distance to the vehicle.
The areas that the cameras cannot cover
O
2
are indicated in black.
After the ignition switched is placed in the
ON position, the non-viewable area
O
2
is
highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the
birds-eye view is displayed.
In addition, the non-viewable corners (if so
equipped) are displayed in red and will blink
for the first 3 seconds
O
3
to remind the
driver to be cautious.
WARNING
• Objects in the bird's-eye view will ap-
pear fur ther than the actual distance.
• Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,
may be misaligned or not displayed
at the seam of the views.
• Objects that are above the camera
cannot be displayed.
• The view of the bird's-eye view may
be misaligned when the camera po-
sition alters.
• A line on the ground may be mis-
aligned and is not seen as being
straight at the seam of the views. The
misalignment will increase as the
line proceeds away from the vehicle.
Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
width and the front end of the vehicle are
displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line
O
1
shows the front
part of the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line
O
2
shows the ap-
proximate vehicle width including the out-
side mirrors.
The extensions
O
3
of both the front
O
1
and
side
O
2
lines are shown with a green dotted
line.
LHA4264 LHA2652
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their loca-
tions on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-
ally located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the ac-
tual distance. Note that any object on the
hill is further than it appears on the
monitor.
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill,
the distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines are shown farther than
the actual distance. Note that any object
on the hill is closer than it appears on the
monitor.
LHA5040 LHA5041
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Backing up near a projecting
object
The predicted course lines
O
A
do not touch
the object in the display. However, the ve-
hicle may hit the object if it projects over
the actual backing up course.
Backing up behind a projecting
object
The position
O
C
is shown farther than the
position
O
B
in the display. However, the po-
sition
O
C
is actually at the same distance as
the position
O
A
. The vehicle may hit the
object when backing up to the position
O
A
if the object projects over the actual back-
ing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
• If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
• On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the ac-
tual course line.
• If the battery is disconnected or be-
comes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incor-
rectly. If this occurs, please perform
the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock
to lock while the engine is
running.
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road
for more than 5 minutes.
• When the steering wheel is turned
with the ignition switch in the ACC
position, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
LHA4995 LHA5042
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
1. Visually check that the parking space is
safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
on the screen
O
A
when the shift lever is
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predicted
course lines
O
B
enter the parking space
O
C
.
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
the vehicle width guide lines
O
D
parallel
to the parking space
O
C
while referring
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking
brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
press the CAMERA button or move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate
the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor dis-
plays different split screen views depend-
ing on the position of the shift lever. Press
the CAMERA button to switch between the
available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,
the available views are:
• Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
• Rear view/front-side view split screen
• Full screen rear view
LHA5043 LHA4770
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive)
position, the available views are:
• Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
• Front view/front-side view split screen
The display will switch from the Intelligent
Around View Monitor screen when:
• The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position
and the vehicle speed increases above
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
• A different screen is selected.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the “ >” key to move to the next
page.
4. Touch the “Camera” key.
5. Touch “Display settings” key.
6. Touch the “Brightness,” “Contrast,” “Tint,”
“Color,” or “Black Level” key.
7. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “-”
key on the touch-screen display or by
turning the Tune-Scroll knob.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the Intelligent Around View Monitor
while the vehicle is moving. Make sure
the parking brake is firmly applied.
LHA5047
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for Intelligent Around View Monitor.
Failure to operate the vehicle in accor-
dance with these system limitations
could result in serious injury or death.
• Do not use the Intelligent Around
View Monitor with the outside mir-
rors in the stored position, and make
sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when operating the vehicle
using the Intelligent Around View
Monitor.
• The apparent distance between ob-
jects viewed on the Intelligent
Around View Monitor differs from the
actual distance.
• The cameras are installed on the
front grille, the outside mirrors and
above the rear license plate. Do not
put anything on the vehicle that cov-
ers the cameras.
• When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the cameras. Otherwise, wa-
ter may enter the camera unit caus-
ing water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
• Do not strike the cameras. They are
precision instruments. Doing so
could cause a malfunction or cause
damage resulting in a fire or an elec-
tric shock.
There are some areas where the system
will not show objects and the system does
not warn of moving objects. When in the
front or rear view display, an object below
the bumper or on the ground may not be
viewed
O
1
. When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall
object near the seam
O
2
of the camera
viewing areas will not appear in the
monitor.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
• There may be a delay when switching
between views.
• When the temperature is extremely high
or low, the screen may not display objects
clearly.
• When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
• The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.
• The colors of objects on the Intelligent
Around View Monitor may differ some-
what from the actual color of objects.
LHA3831
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
• Objects on the Intelligent Around View
Monitor may not be clear and the color
of the object may differ in a dark
environment.
• There may be differences in sharpness
between each camera view of the bird's-
eye view.
• Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe
off any wax with a clean cloth that has
been dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry
cloth.
System temporarily unavailable
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,
there are abnormal conditions in the Intel-
ligent Around View Monitor. This will not
hinder normal driving operation but the
system should be inspected. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the
screen, the camera image may be receiv-
ing temporary electronic disturbances
from surrounding devices. This will not hin-
der normal driving operation but the sys-
tem should be inspected if it occurs fre-
quently. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
LHA3591 LHA3592
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin-
ner to clean the camera. This will
cause discoloration.
• Do not damage the cameras as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras
O
1
, the Intelligent Around
View Monitor may not display objects
clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a
cloth dampened with a diluted mild clean-
ing agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.
LHA5038
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1. CAMERA button
LHA5076
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)
(if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
WARNING
• Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the Mov-
ing Object Detection (MOD) system
could result in serious injury or death.
• The MOD system is not a substitute
for proper vehicle operation and is
not designed to prevent contact with
objects surrounding the vehicle.
When maneuvering, always use the
outside mirrors and rearview mirror
and turn and check the surroundings
to ensure it is safe to maneuver.
• The system is deactivated at speeds
above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti-
vated at lower speeds.
• The MOD system is not designed to
detect surrounding stationary
objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of
moving objects near the vehicle when
backing out of garages, maneuvering in
parking lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects
by using image processing technology on
the image shown in the display.
MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
The MOD system will turn on automatically
under the following conditions:
• When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position.
• When vehicle speed decreases below ap-
proximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the
camera screen is displayed.
The MOD system operates in the following
conditions when the camera view is
displayed:
• When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the vehicle is
stopped, the MOD system detects mov-
ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. The
MOD system will not operate if the out-
side mirrors are moving in or out, in the
stowed position, or if either front door is
opened.
LHA4190
Front and bird’s-eye views
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
• When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD
system detects moving objects in the
front view.
• When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD
system detects moving objects in the
rear view. The MOD system will not oper-
ate if the liftgate is open.
The MOD system does not detect moving
objects in the front-side view. The MOD
icon is not displayed on the screen when in
this view.
When the MOD system detects moving ob-
jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard
and a yellow frame will be displayed on the
view where the objects are detected. While
the MOD system continues to detect mov-
ing objects, the yellow frame continues to
be displayed.
NOTE:
While the Rear Cross Traffic Alert chime
(if so equipped) is beeping, the MOD sys-
tem does not chime
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame
O
1
is
displayed on each camera image (front,
rear, right, left) depending on where mov-
ing objects are detected.
The yellow frame
O
2
is displayed on each
view in the front view and rear view modes.
LHA5171
Rear and bird’s-eye views
LHA4997
Rear and front-side views
LHA4998
Full screen rear view
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
A blue MOD icon
O
3
is displayed in the view
where the MOD system is operative. A gray
MOD icon is displayed in the view where the
MOD system is not operative.
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
icon
O
3
is not displayed.
TURNING MOD ON AND OFF
To turn the MOD system on or off, press and
hold the CAMERA button for more than 2
seconds.
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle
in accordance with these system limi-
tations could result in serious injury or
death.
• Do not use the MOD system when
towing a trailer. The system may not
function properly.
• Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume or open vehicle win-
dow) will interfere with the chime
sound, and it may not be heard.
• The MOD system performance will be
limited according to environmental
conditions and surrounding objects
such as:
– When there is low contrast be-
tween background and the mov-
ing objects.
– When there is a blinking source of
light.
– When strong light such as another
vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is
present.
– When camera orientation is not in
its usual position, such as when a
mirror is folded.
– When there is dirt, water drops or
snow on the camera lens.
– When the position of the moving
objects in the display is not
changed.
• The MOD system might detect flow-
ing water droplets on the camera
lens, white smoke from the muffler,
moving shadows, etc.
• The MOD system may not function
properly depending on the speed, di-
rection, distance or shape of the
moving objects.
• If your vehicle sustains damage to
the parts where the camera is in-
stalled, leaving it misaligned or bent,
the sensing zone may be altered and
the MOD system may not detect ob-
jects properly.
• When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not dis-
play objects clearly. This is not a
malfunction.
NOTE:
The blue MOD icon will change to orange
if one of the following has occurred:
• When the system is malfunctioning.
• When the component temperature
reaches a high level (icon will blink).
• When the RearView camera has detected
a blockage (icon will blink).
If the icon light continues to illuminate
orange, have the MOD system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thin-
ner to clean the camera. This will
cause discoloration.
• Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras
O
1
, the MOD system may not
operate properly. Clean the camera by wip-
ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted
mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a
dry cloth.
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.
Open or close the vents by using the dial.
Move the dial toward the
to open the
vents or toward the
to close them.
LHA3830 LHA4390
Side
VENTS
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
LHA5028
Center
LHA1134
Rear
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1. Temperature control dial (driver’s side)/
AUTO button
2. ON-OFF button
3. Display screen
4. MODE (manual air flow control) button
5. Temperature control dial (passenger’s
side)/DUAL button
6.
Fresh air intake button
7.
Air recirculation button
8. A/C (air conditioner) button
9.
fan speed control buttons
10.
REAR window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
11.
FRONT (defroster) button
WARNING
• The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
• Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
• Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the inte-
rior air to become stale and the win-
dows to fog up.
NOTE:
• Odors from inside and outside the ve-
hicle can build up in the air conditioner
unit. Odor can enter the passenger
compartment through the vents.
• When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air re-
circulation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. This should
help reduce odors inside the vehicle.
LHA3200
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling and/or dehumidified
heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the
system automatically works to keep a con-
stant temperature. Air flow distribution and
fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on. The indicator
on the button will illuminate.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to
the left or right to set the desired
temperature.
• The temperature of the passenger com-
partment will be maintained automati-
cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.
• A visible mist may be seen coming from
the vents in hot, humid conditions as the
air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate
a malfunction.
3. You can individually set driver's and front
passenger's side temperature using
each temperature control dial. When the
DUAL button is pressed or passenger's
side temperature dial is turned, the
DUAL indicator will come on. To turn off
the passenger's side temperature con-
trol, press the DUAL button.
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate.When
you need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
the desired temperature.
• The temperature of the passenger com-
partment will be maintained automati-
cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.
• Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Otherwise,
the system may not work properly.
• Not recommended if windows fog up.
Dehumidified defrosting or
defogging
1. Press the front defroster button on.
The indicator light on the button will
come on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
the maximum temperature to aid in de-
frosting or defogging.
• To quickly remove ice from the outside of
the windows, use the
fan speed con-
trol buttons to set the fan speed to
maximum.
• As soon as possible after the windshield
is clean, press the AUTO button to return
to the automatic mode.
•
When the front defroster button is
pressed, the air conditioner will automati-
cally be turned on at outside temperatures
above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode
automatically turns off, allowing outside air
to be drawn into the passenger compart-
ment to further improve the defogging
performance. When the air recirculate
mode automatically turns off, the air fresh
mode will automatically turn on.
Remote Engine Start with
Intelligent Climate Control (if so
equipped)
Vehicles equipped with automatic climate
controls and Remote Engine Start function
may go into automatic heating or cooling
mode when Remote Engine Start is acti-
vated depending on outside and cabin
temperatures. During this period, the cli-
mate control display and buttons will be
inoperable until the ignition switch is
turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost-
ing mode, the rear window defroster,
heated seats (if so equipped) and heated
steering wheel (if so equipped) may be ac-
tivated automatically.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Press the fan speed control buttons
to manually control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to auto-
matic control of the fan speed.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right. Temperature can be ad-
justed on the driver’s and passenger’s side.
Air recirculation
Press the air recirculation button to
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
The
indicator light on the button will
come on.
The air recirculation cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the
front
defrosting mode.
When the outside temperature exceeds
70°F (21°C), the air conditioning system may
default to air recirculation mode automati-
cally to reduce overall power consumption.
To exit air recirculation mode, select the fresh
air intake button to enter fresh air mode.
Fresh air intake
Press the fresh air intake button to
draw outside air into the passenger
compartment.
A/C (air conditioner) button
Start the engine, press the fan speed
control buttons to the desired position and
press the
button to turn on the air
conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,
press the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
Air flow control
Pressing the MODE button manually con-
trols air flow and selects the air outlet:
— Air flows mainly from center and
side vents.
— Air flows mainly from center and
side vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets
and partly from defroster.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
and foot outlets.
To turn system off
Press the ON-OFF button.
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, see “Rear win-
dow and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch” (P. 2-36).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
OPERATING TIPS
Sensors,
O
A
and
O
B
on the instrument
panel, help the system maintain a constant
temperature. Do not put anything on or
around these sensors.
• When the climate system is in automatic
operation and the engine coolant tem-
perature and outside air temperature are
low, the air flow outlet may default to de-
froster mode for a maximum of 2 min-
utes and 30 seconds. This is not a mal-
function. After the engine coolant
temperature warms up, the air flow outlet
will return to foot mode and operation will
continue normally.
• When the outside and interior cabin tem-
peratures are moderate to high, the in-
take setting may default to turn off air
recirculation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. You may no-
tice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level
mode, or side demist vent outlets for a
maximum of 15 seconds. This may occur
when the previous climate setting was
turned off. This is not a malfunction. After
the initial warm air is expelled, the intake
will return to automatic control, air flow
outlet will return to previous settings, and
operation may continue normally. To exit,
press any climate control button.
• Keep the moonroof (if so equipped)
closed while the air conditioner is in
operation.
• If you feel that the air flow mode you have
selected and the outlets the air is coming
out do not match, select the
mode.
• When you change the air flow mode, you
may feel air flow from the foot outlets for
just a moment. This is not a malfunction.
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-
signed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the
earth's ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is
required when servicing your NISSAN air
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or
lubricants will cause severe damage to your
air conditioner system. For additional infor-
mation, see “Air conditioner system refriger-
ant and oil recommendations” (P. 10-8).
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to service your “environmentally
friendly” air conditioner system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper equipment.
LHA5046
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
There are USB/iPod® charging ports lo-
cated in the 2nd row on the back of the
center console. These ports will charge
compatible devices.
NOTE:
Only the USB connection port(s) located
below the instrument panel will allow
operation of USB/iPod® devices through
the audio system.
The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin
antenna and an antenna pattern is printed
inside the rear window.
CAUTION
• Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any
metal parts to it. This may cause poor
reception or noise.
• When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.
When installing a CB, ham radio or car
phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe
the following precautions; otherwise, the
new equipment may adversely affect the
engine control system and other electronic
parts.
WARNING
• A cellular phone should not be used
for any purpose while driving so full
attention may be given to vehicle op-
eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit
the use of cellular phones while
driving.
• If you must make a call while your
vehicle is in motion, the hands free
cellular phone operational mode is
highly recommended. Exercise ex-
treme caution at all times so full at-
tention may be given to vehicle
operation.
• If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while talk-
ing on the phone, pull off the road to
a safe location and stop your vehicle.
LHA5039
2nd row
USB/iPod® CHARGING PORT ANTENNA CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
CAUTION
• Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
sible from the electronic control
modules.
• Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic
control system harnesses. Do not
route the antenna wire next to any
harness.
• Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the
manufacturer.
• Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
• For additional information, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.
“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone” and
“Made for iPad” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect
specifically to iPod, iPhone or iPad, respec-
tively, and has been certified by the devel-
oper to meet Apple performance stan-
dards. Apple is not responsible for the
operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory
with iPod, iPhone or iPad may affect wire-
less performance.
iPad, iPhone, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod
shuffle and iPod touch are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries. Lightning is a trademark of
Apple Inc.
iPod®/IPHONE®
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ..........5-4
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..............5-4
Three-way catalyst ...........................5-4
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) .......................................5-5
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions ..................................5-8
Avoiding collision and rollover ................5-9
Off-roadrecovery ............................5-9
Rapid air pressure loss .......................5-9
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ..........5-10
Driving safety precautions ...................5-10
Push-button ignition switch ....................5-13
Operating range ............................5-13
Push-button ignition switch positions .......5-14
Emergency engine shut off ..................5-15
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
discharge ...................................5-15
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........5-16
Before starting the engine .....................5-16
Starting the engine .............................5-16
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ........ 5-17
Driving the vehicle ..............................5-18
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) ........................................5-18
Parking brake ..................................5-23
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so equipped) . . . 5-24
System operation ...........................5-25
Turning the Traffic Sign Recognition
(TSR) system on and off .....................5-26
System temporarily unavailable .............5-26
System malfunction .........................5-26
System maintenance .......................5-26
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) .................5-27
LDW system operation ......................5-28
How to enable/disable the LDW system .....5-29
LDW system limitations .....................5-30
System temporarily unavailable .............5-31
System malfunction .........................5-31
System maintenance .......................5-31
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) ...............5-32
I-LI system operation ........................5-33
How to enable/disable the I-LI system ......5-34
I-LI system limitations
.......................5-35
S
ystem temporarily unavailable .............5-36
System malfunction .........................5-37
System maintenance .......................5-37
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) .......................5-38
BSW system operation ......................5-39
How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-40
BSW system limitations .....................5-41
BSW driving situations .......................5-42
System temporarily unavailable .............5-45
System maintenance .......................5-46
RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA) ..................5-47
RCTA system operation .....................5-48
How to enable/disable the RCTA
system ......................................5-50
RCTA system limitations.....................5-51
System temporarily unavailable .............5-53
System maintenance .......................5-54
Cruise control (if so equipped) ..................5-55
Precautions on cruise control ...............5-55
Cruise control operations ...................5-56
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . .5-58
How to select the cruise control mode ......5-60
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode .......................................5-60
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode operation .............................5-61
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode switches .............................5-63
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode limitations ............................5-70
System temporarily unavailable .............5-74
System maintenance .......................5-76
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode ...............................5-78
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) ..................5-82
RAB system operation.......................5-83
Turning the RAB system on/off ..............5-84
RAB system limitations ......................5-85
System malfunction .........................5-86
System maintenance .......................5-87
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection ...........................5-87
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
operation ...................................5-88
Turning the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system on/off ....................5-90
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
limitations ..................................5-91
System temporarily unavailable .............5-94
System malfunction .........................5-96
System maintenance .......................5-97
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . .5-98
I-FCW system operation ....................5-100
Turning the I-FCW system on/off
...........5-101
I-FCW
system limitations ...................5-102
System temporarily unavailable ............5-107
System malfunction ........................5-108
System maintenance ......................5-109
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) ...............5-110
Intelligent Driver Alertness system
operation ...................................5-111
How to enable/disable the Intelligent
Driver Alertness (I-DA) system ..............5-112
Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA)
system limitations ......................... 5-113
Break-in schedule .............................5-114
Fuel efficient driving tips .......................5-114
Increasing fuel economy ......................5-115
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ..........5-115
Parking/parking on hills .......................5-118
Power steering ................................5-119
Brake system .................................5-120
Brake precautions ..........................5-120
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .............5-120
Brake Assist ................................5-122
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ........5-122
Rise-up and build-up .......................5-124
Brake force distribution ....................5-124
Hill start assist system ........................5-125
Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . 5-125
How to enable/disable the front and
rear sonar system ..........................5-127
Cold weather driving ..........................5-128
Freeing a frozen door lock ..................5-128
Antifreeze ..................................5-128
Battery.....................................5-128
Draining of coolant water ..................5-128
Tire equipment .............................5-128
Special winter equipment ..................5-128
Driving on snow or ice ......................5-128
WARNING
• Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from slid-
ing or shifting. Do not place cargo
higher than the seatbacks. In a sud-
den stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
• Exceeding the roof rack capacity can
change the vehicle's center of gravity
and adversely affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle resulting
in an accident causing death or seri-
ous injury.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
• Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless car-
bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is
dangerous. It can cause uncon-
sciousness or death.
• If you suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering the vehicle, drive with all
windows fully open, and have the ve-
hicle inspected immediately.
• Do not run the engine in closed
spaces such as a garage.
• Do not park the vehicle with the en-
gine running for any extended length
of time.
• Keep the liftgate and rear vent win-
dows closed while driving, otherwise
exhaust gases could be drawn into
the passenger compartment. If you
must drive with the liftgate or rear
vent windows open, follow these pre-
cautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the
air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial
to high to circulate the air.
• If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer
through the seal on the liftgate or the
body, follow the manufacturer's rec-
ommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle.
• The exhaust system and body should
be inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involv-
ing damage to the exhaust sys-
tem, underbody, or rear of the
vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission con-
trol device installed in the exhaust system.
Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst
are burned at high temperatures to help
reduce pollutants.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
5-4 Starting and driving
WARNING
• The exhaust gas and the exhaust
system are very hot. Keep people,
animals or flammable materials
away from the exhaust system
components.
• Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
• Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously
reduce the three-way catalyst's abil-
ity to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
• Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if no-
ticeable loss of performance or other
unusual operating conditions are de-
tected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
• Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damag-
ing the three-way catalyst.
• Do not race the engine while warm-
ing it up.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-
rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This se-
quence will continue upon subsequent ve-
hicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to de-
tect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of re-
placement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
tioning properly. Always check the TPMS
Starting and driving 5-5
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-
sure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
Additional information:
• When using a wheel without the TPMS
such as the spare tire, the TPMS does not
monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.
• The TPMS will activate only when the ve-
hicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a flat tire while driving).
• The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-
flated to the recommended pressure, the
vehicle must be driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS
and turn off the low tire pressure warning
light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check
the tire pressure.
• The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warning
appears in the vehicle information dis-
play when the low tire pressure warning
light is illuminated and low tire pressure is
detected. The “Tire Pressure Low — Add
Air” warning turns off when the low tire
pressure warning light turns off.
• The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warning
appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the
low tire pressure warning light remains
illuminated.
• The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warning
does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a
TPMS malfunction.
• Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s opera-
tion and the outside temperature. Do not
reduce the tire pressure after driving be-
cause the tire pressure rises after driving.
Low outside temperature can lower the
temperature of the air inside the tire
which can cause a lower tire inflation
pressure. This may cause the low tire
pressure warning light to illuminate. If the
warning light illuminates, check the tire
pressure for all four tires.
• The Tire and Loading Information label is
located in the driver's door opening.
• You can also check the pressure of all
tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle
information display screen. The order of
the tire pressure figures displayed on the
screen corresponds with the actual order
of the tire position.
For additional information, see “Low tire
pressure warning light” (P. 2-12) and “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” (P. 6-3).
WARNING
• Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
•
If the low tire pressure warning light il-
luminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to
a safe location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident
and could result in serious personal in-
jury. Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the rec-
ommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information la-
bel to turn the low tire pressure warning
light off. If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as possible.
(For additional information on chang-
ing a flat tire, see “Flat tire” (P. 6-3).)
5-6 Starting and driving
• When using a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, tire pressure will not be in-
dicated, the TPMS will not func tion
and the low tire pressure warning
light will flash for approximately 1
minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
• Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could af-
fect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
• Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pres-
sure sensors.
CAUTION
• The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with
tire chains or the wheels are buried in
snow.
• Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the
windows. This may cause poor re-
ception of the signals from the tire
pressure sensors, and the TPMS will
not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may tem-
porarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
• Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
• If a transmitter set to similar frequencies
is being used in or near the vehicle.
• If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near
the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may
illuminate in the following cases:
• If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and
tire without TPMS.
• If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID
has not been registered.
• If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's au-
thority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device contains licence-exempt
transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply
with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada’s licence-exempt
RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause interference. (2) This de-
vice must accept any interference, in-
cluding interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
Starting and driving 5-7
TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
When adding air to an under-inflated tire,
the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides
visual and audible signals outside the ve-
hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec-
ommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion. Do not start the engine.
Operation
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-
tors will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is
reached, the horn beeps once and the
hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
• If the tire is over-inflated more than
approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators flash
three times. To correct the pressure,
push the core of the valve stem on the
tire briefly to release pressure. When
the pressure reaches the designated
pressure, the horn beeps once.
• If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds after
starting to inflate the tire, it indicates
that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not
operating.
•
The TPMS will not activate the Easy-Fill
Tire Alert under the following conditions:
– If there is interference from an exter-
nal device or transmitter.
– The air pressure from the inflation
device is not sufficient to inflate the
tire.
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or
hazard indicators.
– The identification code of the tire
pressure sensor is not registered to
the system.
– The battery of the tire pressure sen-
sor is low.
• If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not oper-
ate due to TPMS interference, move
the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward
or forward and try again.
If the Easy-Fill Tire Aler t is not working, use a
tire pressure gauge.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than
passenger cars to make them capable of
performing in a variety of on-pavement
and off-road applications. This gives them
a higher center of gravity than ordinary ve-
hicles. An advantage of higher ground
clearance is a better view of the road, allow-
ing you to anticipate problems. However,
they are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional 2-Wheel
Drive vehicles any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satis-
factorily under off-road conditions. If at all
possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a per-
son wearing a seat belt.
For additional information, see “Driving
safety precautions” (P. 5-10).
5-8 Starting and driving
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden
steering maneuvers, because these driving
practices could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
particularly if the loss of control causes
the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the in-
fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which
may cause drowsiness). Always wear your
seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-
tem” section of this manual, and also in-
struct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a
person wearing a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side
wheels may unintentionally leave the road
surface. If this occurs, maintain control of
the vehicle by following the procedure be-
low. Please note that this procedure is only
a general guide. The vehicle must be driven
as appropriate based on the conditions of
the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the ac-
celerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road sur-
face until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires return
to the road surface. When all tires are on
the road surface, steer the vehicle to
stay in the appropriate driving lane.
• If you decide that it is not safe to return
the vehicle to the road surface based
on vehicle, road or traffic conditions,
gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in
a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
pressure loss can also be caused by driving
on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-
dling and stability of the vehicle, especially
at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
maintaining the correct air pressure and
visually inspecting the tires for wear and
damage. For additional information, see
“Wheels and tires” (P. 8-27). If a tire rapidly
loses air pressure or “blows-out” while driv-
ing, maintain control of the vehicle by fol-
lowing the procedure below. Please note
that this procedure is only a general guide.
Starting and driving 5-9
The vehicle must be driven as appropriate
based on the conditions of the vehicle, road
and traffic.
WARNING
If there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-
sure, the vehicle will generally move or
pull in the direction of the flat tire. In
this situation, losing control of the ve-
hicle may cause a collision and result in
personal injury.
To help avoid loss of control:
• Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
• Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
• Do not rapidly turn the steering
wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the ac-
celerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe lo-
cation off the road and away from traffic
if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-
ally stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire. For additional infor-
mation, see “Changing a flat tire” (P. 6-3).
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alco-
hol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-
stream reduces coordination, delays
reaction time and impairs judgement.
Driving after drinking alcohol increases
the likelihood of being involved in an
accident injuring yourself and others.
Additionally, if you are injured in an ac-
cident, alcohol can increase the sever-
ity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-
ever, you must choose not to drive under
the influence of alcohol. Every year thou-
sands of people are injured or killed in
alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo-
cal laws vary on what is considered to be
legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most
people underestimate the effects of
alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don't mix!
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don't
drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
physical condition.
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal
and off-road use. However, avoid driving in
deep water or mud as your NISSAN is
mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a
conventional off-road vehicle.
Remember that 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod-
els are less capable than All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) models for rough road driving and
extrication when stuck in deep snow or
mud, or the like.
5-10 Starting and driving
Please observe the following precautions:
WARNING
• Spinning the front wheels on slippery
sur faces may cause the AWD
warning message to display and the
AWD system to automatically switch
from the AWD to the 2WD mode. This
could reduce the traction. Be espe-
cially careful when towing a trailer
(AWD models).
• Drive carefully when off the road and
avoid dangerous areas. Every person
who drives or rides in this vehicle
should be seated with their seat belt
fastened. This will keep you and your
passengers in position when driving
over rough terrain.
• Do not drive across steep slopes. In-
stead drive either straight up or
straight down the slopes. Off-road
vehicles can tip over sideways much
more easily than they can forward or
backward.
• Many hills are too steep for any ve-
hicle. If you drive up them, you may
stall. If you drive down them, you may
not be able to control your speed. If
you drive across them, you may roll
over.
• Do not shift gears while driving on
downhill grades as this could cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
• Stay alert when driving to the top of a
hill. At the top there could be a drop-
off or other hazard that could cause
an accident.
• If your engine stalls or you cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill,
never attempt to turn around. Your
vehicle could tip or roll over. Always
back straight down in R (Reverse)
gear and apply brakes to control your
speed.
• Heavy braking going down a hill
could cause your brakes to overheat
and fade, resulting in loss of control
and an accident. Apply brakes lightly
and use a low gear to control your
speed.
• Unsecured cargo can be thrown
around when driving over rough ter-
rain. Properly secure all cargo so it
will not be thrown forward and cause
injury to you or your passengers.
• Exceeding the roof rack capacity can
raise the center of gravity excessively
and affect the handling and stability
of the vehicle.
• Secure heavy loads in the cargo area
as far forward and as low as possible.
Do not equip the vehicle with tires
larger than specified in this manual.
This could cause your vehicle to roll
over.
• Do not grip the inside or spokes of
the steering wheel when driving off-
road. The steering wheel could move
suddenly and injure your hands. In-
stead drive with your fingers and
thumbs on the outside of the rim.
• Before operating the vehicle, ensure
that the driver and all passengers
have their seat belts fastened.
• Always drive with the floor mats in
place as the floor may become hot.
• Lower your speed when encounter-
ing strong crosswinds. With a higher
center of gravity, your NISSAN is more
affected by strong side winds. Slower
speeds ensure bet ter vehicle control.
• Do not drive beyond the perfor-
mance capability of the tires, even
with AWD engaged.
Starting and driving 5-11
• For AWD equipped vehicles, do not
attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result
in drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could result
in serious vehicle damage or per-
sonal injury.
• Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-
mometer (such as the dynamom-
eters used by some states for emis-
sions testing) or similar equipment
even if the other two wheels are
raised off the ground. Make sure you
inform test facility personnel that
your vehicle is equipped with AWD
before it is placed on a dynamom-
eter. Using the wrong test equipment
may result in drivetrain damage or
unexpected vehicle movement
which could result in serious vehicle
damage or personal injury.
• When a wheel is off the ground due to
an unlevel surface, do not spin the
wheel excessively.
• Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
maneuvers or sudden braking may
cause loss of control.
• If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
maneuvers, particularly at high
speeds. Your NISSAN vehicle has a
higher center of gravity than a pas-
senger car. The vehicle is not de-
signed for cornering at the same
speeds as passenger cars.
• Failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly could result in loss of control
and/or a rollover accident.
• Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction (bias, bias-
belted, or radial), and tread pattern
on all four wheels. Install tire chains
on the front wheels when driving on
slippery roads and drive carefully.
• Be sure to check the brakes immedi-
ately after driving in mud or water.
For additional information, see
“Brake precautions” (P. 5-120).
• Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and
it rolls forward, backward or side-
ways, you could be injured.
• Whenever you drive off-road through
sand, mud or water as deep as the
wheel hub, more frequent mainte-
nance may be required. For addi-
tional information, see “Maintenance
schedules” (P. 9-7).
5-12 Starting and driving
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button igni-
tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-
cept in an emergency. (The engine will
stop when the ignition switch is pushed
three consecutive times in less than 1.5
seconds or the ignition switch is
pushed and held for more than 2 sec-
onds.) If the engine stops while the ve-
hicle is being driven, this could lead to a
crash and serious injur y.
When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch will illuminate.
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF
position, push the ignition switch center:
• Once to change to ACC.
• Two times to change to ON.
• Three times to change to OFF.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the ignition switch cannot be moved
from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for opera-
tion are displayed on the vehicle informa-
tion display. For additional information, see
“Vehicle information display” (P. 2-17).
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are pres-
ent near the operating location, the Intelli-
gent Key system’s operating range be-
comes narrower and may not function
properly.
LSD2014 LSD2020
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
Starting and driving 5-13
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even some-
one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,
to push the ignition switch to start the
engine.
The operating range of the engine start
function is inside of the vehicle
O
1
.
• The luggage area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key
may function.
• If the Intelligent Key is placed on the in-
strument panel or inside the glove box,
storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent
Key may not function.
• If the Intelligent Key is placed near the
door or window outside the vehicle, the
Intelligent Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in
this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it
is placed in the ACC position while carrying
the Intelligent Key.
The ignition switch will lock when any door
is opened or closed with the ignition
switched off.
ACC (Accessories)
This position activates electrical accesso-
ries, such as the radio, when the engine is
not running.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will
place the ignition switch in the OFF position
after a period of time under the following
conditions:
• All doors are closed.
• The shift lever is in P (Park).
• The hazard lamps are off.
• The turn signals are off.
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
• Any door is opened.
• The shift lever is moved out of P (Park).
• The ignition switch changes position.
• The hazard lamps are turned on.
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system
and electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will
place the ignition switch in the OFF posi-
tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some
time under the following conditions:
• All doors are closed.
• The shift lever is in P (Park).
• The hazard lamps are off.
• The turn signals are off.
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
• Any door is opened.
• The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)
position.
• The ignition switch changes position.
• The hazard lamps are turned on.
• The turn signals are turned on.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the igni-
tion switch in the ACC or ON position
when the engine is not running for an
extended period. This can discharge
the battery.
5-14 Starting and driving
OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position
when the engine is turned off using the
ignition switch. The ignition switch heart
beat function (pulsed illumination) may ac-
tivate for a period of time when any door is
unlocked and when the door opened/
closed status changes in the OFF and ACC
positions.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the follow-
ing procedure:
• Rapidly push the ignition switch three
consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-
onds, or
• Push and hold the ignition switch for
more than 2 seconds.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®
is discharged, or environmental conditions
interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,
start the engine according to the following
procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park)
position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel-
ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will
sound.)
(After step 3 is performed, when the ig-
nition switch is pushed without de-
pressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch position will change to ON.)
4. Push the ignition switch while depress-
ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds
after the chime sounds. The engine will
start.
NOTE:
• When the ignition switch is pushed to
the ON position or the engine is started
by the above procedure, the Intelligent
Key bat tery discharge indicator ap-
pears in the vehicle information dis-
play even when the Intelligent Key is
inside the vehicle. This is not a mal-
function. To turn off the Intelligent Key
battery discharge indicator, touch the
ignition switch with the Intelligent Key
again.
• If the Intelligent Key battery discharge
indicator appears, replace the battery
as soon as possible. For additional in-
formation, see “Battery replacement”
(P. 8-23).
SSD0860
Starting and driving 5-15
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an auto-
mated toll road device or automatic pay-
ment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the de-
vice (which may have caused the inter-
ference) separate from the registered
key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.
• Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
• Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer
fluid as frequently as possible, or at least
whenever you refuel.
• Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
• Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
• Check that all doors are closed.
• Position seat and adjust head restraints/
headrests.
• Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
• Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers
to do likewise.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position. For additional information,
see “Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders” (P. 2-8).
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate
unless the shift lever is in either P
(Park) or N (Neutral).
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion. Depress the brake pedal and push
the ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push
and release the ignition switch while de-
pressing the brake pedal with the igni-
tion switch in any position.
• If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when re-
starting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the
floor) and while holding, crank the en-
gine. Release the accelerator pedal
when the engine starts.
• If the engine is very hard to start be-
cause it is flooded, depress the accel-
erator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Push the ignition switch to
the ON position to start cranking the
engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop
cranking by pushing the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. After
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE
5-16 Starting and driving
cranking the engine, release the accel-
erator pedal. Crank the engine with
your foot off the accelerator pedal by
depressing the brake pedal and push-
ing the ignition switch to start the en-
gine. If the engine starts, but fails to
run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, push the ignition switch
to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds
before cranking again, otherwise the
starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up:
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after star ting. Do not race the
engine while warming it up. Drive at a
moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather. In cold
weather, keep the engine running for a
minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before shut-
ting it off. Starting and stopping the en-
gine over a short period of time may
make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever
into the P (Park) position and push the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situa-
tions that can lead to potential battery
discharge and potential no-start con-
ditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine
Start require the ignition switch to be
placed in the ON position before the shift
lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-
tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON
position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on
you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON
position.
For additional information, see “NISSAN In-
telligent Key®” (P. 3-2).
Starting and driving 5-17
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
WARNING
• Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M
(Manual shift mode). Always depress
the brake pedal until shifting is com-
pleted. Failure to do so could cause
you to lose control and have an
accident.
• Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
• Do not downshift abruptly on slip-
pery roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
• Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is
reversing. This could cause an acci-
dent or damage the transmission.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible damage to your ve-
hicle, when stopping the vehicle on
an uphill grade, do not hold the ve-
hicle by depressing the accelerator
pedal. The foot brake should be used
for this purpose.
• Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driv-
ing. Coasting with the transmission
in the N (Neutral) position may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically
controlled to produce maximum power
and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures
for this transmission are shown on the fol-
lowing pages. Follow these procedures for
maximum vehicle performance and driv-
ing enjoyment.
Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
This Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion is designed so that the foot brake
pedal must be depressed before shift-
ing from P (Park) to any driving posi-
tion while the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of
the P (Park) position and into any of
the other positions if the ignition
switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or
ACC position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever to a driving
position.
3. Release the parking brake and foot
brake pedal, and then gradually start the
vehicle in motion.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
5-18 Starting and driving
WARNING
• Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M
(Manual shift mode) position. Always
depress the brake pedal until shifting
is completed. Failure to do so could
cause you to lose control and have an
accident.
• Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
• Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is
reversing. This could cause an acci-
dent or damage the transmission.
• Do not downshift abruptly on slip-
pery roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible damage to your ve-
hicle, when stopping the vehicle on
an uphill grade, do not hold the ve-
hicle by depressing the accelerator
pedal. The foot brake should be used
for this purpose.
• Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driv-
ing. Coasting with the transmission
in the N (Neutral) position may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal, press the shift lever button
and move the shift lever from the P (Park)
position to any of the desired shift
positions.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift le-
ver is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could
cause the vehicle to move unexpect-
edly or roll away and result in serious
personal injury or proper ty damage.
LSD3162
Starting and driving 5-19
CAUTION
Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position
only when the vehicle is completely
stopped.
P (Park)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the P (Park) position only when the ve-
hicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when
the vehicle is parked or when starting the
engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped. The brake pedal must be de-
pressed and the shift lever button
pressed in to move the shift lever from N
(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a
hill, apply the parking brake first, then move
the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the R (Reverse) position only when the
vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
position. The brake pedal must be de-
pressed and the shift lever button
pressed in to move the shift lever from P
(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to
R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-
gaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is
moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward
driving.
Manual shift mode
When the shift lever is in the manual shift
gate, the transmission is ready for the
manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be
selected manually by moving the shift le-
ver up or down. To cancel manual shift
mode, return the shift lever to the D (Drive)
position. The transmission returns to auto-
matic driving mode.
When the shift lever is moved from D (Drive)
to the manual shift gate with the vehicle
stopped or while driving, the transmission
enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges
can be selected manually. In the manual
LSD2489
5-20 Starting and driving
shift mode, the shift range is displayed on
the position indicator in the meter. When
moving the shift lever to the manual shift
gate, the position indicator displays 1 (First)
up to 7 (Seventh) depending on vehicle
speed.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as
follows:
1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5⇔ 6⇔ 7
7 (Seventh)
Use this position for all normal forward
driving at highway speeds.
6 (Sixth) and 5 (Fifth)
Use this position when driving up long
slopes, or for engine braking when driving
down long slopes.
4 (Fourth), 3 (Third) and 2 (Second)
Use these positions for hill climbing or en-
gine braking on downhill grades.
1 (First)
Use this position when climbing steep hills
slowly or when driving slowly, or for maxi-
mum engine braking on steep downhill
grades.
• Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than
seventh gear. This reduces fuel economy.
When shifting up
Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts
to higher range.)
When shifting down
Move the shift lever to the − (down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.)
• The transmission will automatically
downshift the gears. (For example, if you
select the third range, the transmission
will shift down between the third and first
gears.)
• Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in
succession.
When canceling the manual shift mode
Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) posi-
tion to return the transmission to the nor-
mal driving mode.
• In the manual shift mode, the trans-
mission may not shift to the selected
gear. This helps maintain driving per-
formance and reduces the chance of
vehicle damage or loss of control.
• When this situation occurs, the Con-
tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light will blink and
the chime will sound.
• In the manual shift mode, the trans-
mission may shift up automatically to a
higher range than selected if the en-
gine speed is too high. When the ve-
hicle speed decreases, the transmis-
sion automatically shifts down and
shifts to first gear before the vehicle
comes to a stop.
• CVT operation is limited to automatic
drive mode when CVT fluid temperature
is extremely low even if manual shift
mode is selected. This is not a malfunc-
tion. When CVT fluid warms up, manual
mode can be selected.
• When the CVT fluid temperature is high,
the shift range may upshift in lower rpm
than usual. This is not a malfunction.
Starting and driving 5-21
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged,
the shift lever may not be moved from the
P (Park) position even with the brake pedal
depressed and the shift lever button
pressed. To move the shift lever, perform
the following procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover us-
ing a suitable tool.
4. Push down the shift lock release using a
suitable tool.
5. Press the shift lever button and move
the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
while holding down the shift lock
release. The vehicle may be moved to
the desired location. Replace the re-
moved shift lock release cover after the
operation. If the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the P (Park) position, have
the Continuously Variable Transmission
system checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is de-
pressed, the stop lights may not work.
Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
an accident injuring yourself and
others.
Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts
the transmission down into a lower gear,
depending on the vehicle speed.
High fluid temperature protection
mode
This transmission has a high fluid tem-
perature protection mode. If the fluid tem-
perature becomes too high (for example,
when climbing steep grades in high tem-
peratures with heavy loads, such as when
towing a trailer), engine power and, under
some conditions, vehicle speed will be de-
creased automatically to reduce the
chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
speed can be controlled with the accelera-
tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed
may be limited.
LSD3163
5-22 Starting and driving
Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel
spinning and subsequent hard braking,
the fail-safe system may be activated.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may come on to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. For additional infor-
mation, see “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” (P. 2-13). This will occur even if all
electrical circuits are functioning prop-
erly. In this case, place the ignition switch
in the OFF position and wait for 10 sec-
onds. Then push the switch back to the
ON position. The vehicle should return to
its normal operating condition. If it does
not return to its normal operating condi-
tion, have the transmission checked and
repaired, if necessar y. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature pro-
tection mode or fail-safe operation oc-
curs, vehicle speed may be gradually
reduced. The reduced speed may be
lower than other traffic, which could in-
crease the chance of a collision. Be es-
pecially careful when driving. If neces-
sary, pull to the side of the road at a safe
place and allow the transmission to re-
turn to normal operation, or have it re-
paired if necessary.
WARNING
• Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to
an accident.
• Do not release the parking brake
from outside the vehicle.
• Do not use the shift lever in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.
LSD0158
PARKING BRAKE
Starting and driving 5-23
• To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require
the assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
To engage:
Firmly depress the parking brake.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal
and it will release.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake
warning light goes out.
The TSR system provides the driver with
information about the most recently de-
tected speed limit. The system captures
the road sign information with the multi-
sensing front camera unit
O
A
located on
the windshield in front of the inside rear-
view mirror and displays the detected
signs in the vehicle information display. For
vehicles equipped with a navigation sys-
tem, the speed limit displayed is based on a
combination of navigation system data
and live camera recognition. TSR informa-
tion is always displayed at the top of the
vehicle information display if the system is
enabled in the Driver Assistance settings.
WARNING
The TSR system is only intended to be a
support device to help provide the
driver with information. It is not a re-
placement for the driver’s attention to
traffic conditions or responsibility to
drive safely. It cannot prevent acci-
dents due to carelessness. It is the driv-
er’s responsibility to stay alert and
drive safely at all times.
LSD3360
TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR)
(if so equipped)
5-24 Starting and driving
SYSTEM OPERATION
The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system
displays the following types of road signs:
䊊
A
Speed sign detected (in Canada)
䊊
B
Speed sign detected (in USA)
䊊
C
Speed sign detected (no speed limit
detected)
䊊
D
“Do not pass” sign detected
CAUTION
• The TSR system is intended as an aid
to careful driving. It is the driver’s re-
sponsibility to stay alert, drive safely,
and observe all road regulations that
currently apply, including looking out
for road signs.
• The TSR system may not function
properly under the following
conditions:
– When the road sign is not clearly
visible, for example, due to dam-
age or weather conditions.
– When rain, snow or dirt adheres to
the windshield in front of the
multi-sensing camera unit.
– When the headlights are not
bright, for example, due to dirt on
the lens or if the aiming is not ad-
justed properly.
– When strong light enters the cam-
era unit. (For example, the light di-
rectly shines on the front of the
vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
– When a sudden change in bright-
ness occurs. (For example, when
the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel
or under a bridge.)
– In areas not covered by the navi-
gation system.
– If there are deviations in relation
to the navigation, for example due
to changes in the road routing.
– When overtaking buses or trucks
with speed stickers.
LSD3377 LSD3378
Starting and driving 5-25
TURNING THE TRAFFIC SIGN
RECOGNITION (TSR) SYSTEM ON
AND OFF
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the TSR system.
1. Press the
button until “Settings” dis-
plays in the vehicle information display
and then press the OK button. Use the
button to select “Driver Assistance.”
Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Speed Limit Sign” and press the
OK button to turn the system on or off.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
under high temperature conditions (over
approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then
started, the TSR system may be deacti-
vated automatically. The “Unavailable: High
Cabin Temperature” warning message will
appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
When the interior temperature is reduced,
the TSR system will resume operating
automatically.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the TSR system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically and the LDW indi-
cator (orange) will illuminate in the vehicle
information display.
Action to take:
If the LDW indicator (orange) illuminates in
the display, pull off the road at a safe loca-
tion and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine
off and restart the engine. If the LDW indi-
cator (orange) continues to illuminate,
have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The TSR system uses the same multi-
sensing front camera unit that is used by
the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system,
located in front of the interior rearview mir-
ror. For additional information, see ”System
maintenance” (P. 5-31).
LSD3346
5-26 Starting and driving
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the LDW
system could result in serious injury or
death.
• This system is only a warning device
to inform the driver of a potential un-
intended lane depar ture. It will not
steer the vehicle or prevent loss of
control. It is the driver’s responsibility
to stay alert, drive safely, keep the
vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in
control of the vehicle at all times.
The LDW system will operate when the ve-
hicle is driven at speeds of approximately
37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only
when the lane markings are clearly visible
on the road.
The LDW system monitors the lane mark-
ers on the traveling lane using the camera
unit
O
A
located above the inside mirror.
The LDW system warns the driver that the
vehicle is beginning to leave the driving
lane with an indicator and a steering wheel
vibration. For additional information, see
“LDW system operation” (P. 5-28).
LSD3360
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)
Starting and driving 5-27
LDW SYSTEM OPERATION
䊊
1
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/ Intelli-
gent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indicator
The LDW system provides a lane departure
warning function when the vehicle is driven
at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60
km/h) and above and the lane markings
are clear. When the vehicle approaches ei-
ther the left or the right side of the traveling
lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the
LDW indicator
O
1
on the instrument panel
will blink to alert the driver.
The warning function will stop when the
vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.
LSD3428
5-28 Starting and driving
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
LDW SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the LDW system.
Using “Settings” in the vehicle informa-
tion display:
1. Press the
button until “Settings” dis-
plays in the vehicle information display
and then press the OK button. Use the
button to select “Driver Assistance.”
Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Lane” and press the OK button.
3. Select “Lane Departure Warning” and
press the OK button to turn the system
on or off.
Using the “Driving Aids” screen in the ve-
hicle information display:
1. Use the
buttons on the steering
wheel to scroll to the Driving Aids screen.
2. Press the OK button to access the Driv-
ing Aids menu.
3. Select “Lane” and press the OK button
until “Lane Warning” is displayed.
4. Press the
buttons to return to the
Driving Aids screen.
LSD3429
Starting and driving 5-29
LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the LDW system. Failure to follow
the warnings and instructions for
proper use of the LDW system could re-
sult in serious injury or death.
• The system will not operate at
speeds below approximately 37 mph
(60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane
markers.
• Do not use the LDW system under the
following conditions as it may not
function properly:
– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.).
– When driving on slippery roads,
such as on ice or snow.
– When driving on winding or un-
even roads.
– When there is a lane closure due to
road repairs.
– When driving in a makeshift or
temporary lane.
– When driving on roads where the
lane width is too narrow.
– When driving without normal tire
conditions (for example, tire wear,
low tire pressure, installation of
spare tire, tire chains, nonstan-
dard wheels).
– When the vehicle is equipped with
non-original brake parts or sus-
pension parts.
– When you are towing a trailer or
other vehicle.
• The system may not function prop-
erly under the following conditions:
– On roads where there are multiple
parallel lane markers; lane mark-
ers that are faded or not painted
clearly; yellow painted lane mark-
ers; non-standard lane markers;
or lane markers covered with wa-
ter, dirt, snow, etc.
– On roads where the discontinued
lane markers are still detectable.
– On roads where there are sharp
curves.
– On roads where there are sharply
contrasting objects, such as shad-
ows, snow, water, wheel ruts,
seams or lines remaining after
road repairs. (The LDW system
could detect these items as lane
markers.)
– On roads where the traveling lane
merges or separates.
– When the vehicle’s traveling direc-
tion does not align with the lane
marker.
– When traveling close to the ve-
hicle in front of you, which ob-
structs the lane camera unit de-
tection range.
– When rain, snow, dirt or an object
adheres to the windshield in front
of the lane camera unit.
– When the headlights are not
bright due to dirt on the lens or if
the aiming is not adjusted
properly.
– When strong light enters the lane
camera unit. (For example, the
light directly shines on the front of
the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
5-30 Starting and driving
– When a sudden change in bright-
ness occurs. (For example, when
the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel
or under a bridge.)
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
under high temperature conditions (over
approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then
started, the LDW system may be deacti-
vated automatically and the following
message will appear in the vehicle infor-
mation display: “Unavailable: High Cabin
Temperature.”
When the interior temperature is reduced,
the LDW system will resume operating
automatically.
The LDW system is not designed to warn
under the following conditions:
• When you operate the lane change signal
and change traveling lanes in the direc-
tion of the signal. (The LDW system will
become operable again approximately 2
seconds after the lane change signal is
turned off.)
• When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
After the above conditions have finished
and the necessary operating conditions
are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the LDW system malfunctions, it will can-
cel automatically. The LDW/I—LI indicator
(orange) will illuminate in the display. If the
LDW/I—LI indicator (orange) illuminates in
the display, pull off the road to a safe loca-
tion and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine/
motor off and restart the engine/motor. If
the LDW/I—LI indicator (orange) continues
to illuminate, have the LDW system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit
O
1
for the LDW sys-
tem is located above the inside mirror. To
keep the proper operation of the LDW sys-
tem and prevent a system malfunction, be
sure to observe the following:
• Always keep the windshield clean.
• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-
parent material) or install an accessory
near the camera unit.
LSD3375
Starting and driving 5-31
• Do not place reflective materials, such as
white paper or a mirror, on the instru-
ment panel. The reflection of sunlight
may adversely affect the camera unit’s
capability of detecting the lane markers.
• Do not strike or damage the areas
around the camera unit. Do not touch the
camera lens or remove the screw located
on the camera unit. If the camera unit is
damaged due to an accident, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the I-LI sys-
tem could result in serious injury or
death.
• The I-LI system will not steer the ve-
hicle or prevent loss of control. It is
the driver’s responsibility to stay
alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in
the traveling lane, and be in control of
the vehicle at all times.
• The I-LI system is primarily intended
for use on well-developed freeways
or highways. It may not detect the
lane markers in certain road,
weather, or driving conditions.
The I-LI system can be turned on with the
dynamic driver assistance switch on the
instrument panel, every time the ignition is
placed in the ON position.
The I-LI system will operate when the ve-
hicle is driven at speeds of approximately
37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only
when the lane markings are clearly visible
on the road.
The I-LI system warns the driver when the
vehicle has left the center of the traveling
lane with an indicator and a steering wheel
vibration. The system helps assist the
driver to return the vehicle to the center of
the traveling lane by applying the brakes to
the left or right wheels individually (for a
short period of time).
The I-LI system monitors the lane markers
on the traveling lane using the camera unit
O
A
located above the inside mirror.
LSD3360
INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION
(I-LI)
5-32 Starting and driving
I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION
䊊
1
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/ Intelli-
gent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indicator
䊊
2
Dynamic driver assistance switch
The I-LI system operates above approxi-
mately 37 mph (60 km/h). When the vehicle
approaches either the left or the right side
of the traveling lane, the steering wheel
will vibrate and the LDW/I—LI indicator
O
1
(orange) on the instrument panel will blink
to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI system will
automatically apply the brakes for a short
period of time to help assist the driver to
return the vehicle to the center of the trav-
eling lane.
To turn on the I-LI system, push the dy-
namic driver assistance switch
O
2
after
starting the engine/motor. The LDW/I—LI
indicator (green) on the instrument panel
will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver as-
sistance switch again to turn off the I-LI
system. The LDW/I—LI indicator (green) will
turn off.
LSD3430
Starting and driving 5-33
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
I-LI SYSTEM
The I-LI system can be turned on or off
using the dynamic driver assistance switch
O
1
on the instrument panel or “Settings” in
the vehicle information display.
When the system is off, the indicator light
on the dynamic driver assistance switch
O
1
turns off and the LDW indicator (green)
turns off.
Using dynamic driver assistance switch:
To turn on the I-LI system, push the dy-
namic driver assistance switch on the in-
strument panel after starting the engine.
The LDW/I—LI indicator (green) on the ve-
hicle information display will appear.
Push the dynamic driver assistance switch
again to turn off the I-LI system.
The LDW/I—LI indicator (green) on the ve-
hicle information display will turn off.
The I-LI system will be automatically turned
off when the engine is turned off.
Using “Settings” in the vehicle informa-
tion display:
1. After starting the engine, press the
button until “Settings” displays in the ve-
hicle information display and then press
the OK button. Use the
button to
select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the
OK button.
2. Select “Lane” and press the OK button.
3. Select “Lane Departure Prevention” and
press the OK button to turn the system
on or off.
LSD3431
5-34 Starting and driving
I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the I-LI system. Failure to follow the
warnings and instructions for proper
use of the I-LI system could result in
serious injury or death.
• The I-LI system may activate if you
change lanes without first activating
your turn signal or, for example, if a
construction zone directs traffic to
cross an existing lane marker. If this
occurs you may need to apply correc-
tive steering to complete your lane
change.
• Because the I-LI may not activate un-
der the road, weather, and lane
marker conditions described in this
section, it may not activate every
time your vehicle begins to leave its
lane and you will need to apply cor-
rective steering.
• When the I-LI system is operating,
avoid excessive or sudden steering
maneuvers. Otherwise, you could
lose control of the vehicle.
• The I-LI system will not operate at
speeds below approximately 37 mph
(60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane
markers.
• Do not use the I-LI system under the
following conditions as it may not
function properly:
– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.).
– When driving on slippery roads,
such as on ice or snow.
– When driving on winding or un-
even roads.
– When there is a lane closure due to
road repairs.
– When driving in a makeshift or
temporary lane.
– When driving on roads where the
lane width is too narrow.
– When driving without normal tire
conditions (for example, tire wear,
low tire pressure, installation of
spare tire, tire chains, non-
standard wheels).
– When the vehicle is equipped with
nonoriginal brake parts or sus-
pension parts.
– When you are towing a trailer or
other vehicle.
– On roads where there are multiple
parallel lane markers; lane mark-
ers that are faded or not painted
clearly; yellow painted lane mark-
ers; non-standard lane markers;
or lane markers covered with wa-
ter, dirt, snow, etc.
– On roads where discontinued lane
markers are still detectable.
– On roads where there are sharp
curves.
–
On roads where there are sharply
contrasting objects, such as shad-
ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams
or lines remaining after road re-
pairs. (The I-LI system could detect
these items as lane markers.)
– On roads where the traveling lane
merges or separates.
– When the vehicle’s traveling direc-
tion does not align with the lane
marker.
– When traveling close to the ve-
hicle in front of you, which ob-
structs the lane camera unit de-
tection range.
Starting and driving 5-35
– When rain, snow or dirt adheres to
the windshield in front of the lane
camera unit.
– When the headlights are not
bright due to dirt on the lens or
if the aiming is not adjusted
properly.
– When strong light enters the lane
camera unit. (For example, the
light directly shines on the front of
the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
– When a sudden change in bright-
ness occurs. (For example, when
the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel
or under a bridge.)
While the I-LI system is operating, you may
hear a sound of brake operation. This is
normal and indicates that the I-LI system is
operating properly.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A:
The warning and assist functions of the I-LI
system are not designed to work under the
following conditions:
• When you operate the lane change signal
and change the traveling lanes in the di-
rection of the signal. (The I-LI system will
be deactivated for approximately 2 sec-
onds after the lane change signal is
turned off.)
• When the vehicle speed lowers to less
than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
After the above conditions have finished
and the necessary operating conditions
are satisfied, the warning and assist func-
tions will resume.
Condition B:
The assist function of the I-LI system is not
designed to work under the following con-
ditions (warning is still functional):
• When the brake pedal is depressed.
• When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary for the vehicle to change
lanes.
• When the vehicle is accelerated during
I-LI system operation.
• When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
approach warning occurs.
• When the hazard warning flashers are
operated.
• When driving on a curve at high speed.
After the above conditions have finished
and the necessary operating conditions
are satisfied, the I-LI system application of
the brakes will resume.
Condition C:
If the following messages appear in the
vehicle information display, the I-LI system
will be turned off automatically.
• “Unavailable Road is Slippery”:
When the VDC system (except Traction
Control System [TCS] function) or ABS
operates.
• “Currently Unavailable”:
When the VDC system is turned off.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
turn off the I-LI system. Push the dynamic
driver assistance switch again to turn the
I-LI system back on.
5-36 Starting and driving
Temporary disabled status at high
temperature:
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight
under high temperature conditions (over
approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then the
I-LI system is turned on, the I-LI system
may be deactivated automatically and the
following message will appear on the ve-
hicle information display: “Unavailable: High
Cabin Temperature.” When the interior
temperature is reduced, the system will re-
sume operating automatically.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-LI system malfunctions, it will cancel
automatically. The LDW indicator (orange)
will illuminate in the display. If the LDW indi-
cator (orange) illuminates in the display,
pull off the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle. Turn the engine/motor off and
restart the engine/motor. If the LDW indica-
tor (orange) continues to illuminate, have
the I-LI system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The lane camera unit
O
1
for the I-LI system
is located above the inside mirror. To keep
the proper operation of the I-LI system and
prevent a system malfunction, be sure to
observe the following:
• Always keep the windshield clean.
• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-
parent material) or install an accessory
near the camera unit.
• Do not place reflective materials, such as
white paper or a mirror, on the instru-
ment panel. The reflection of sunlight
may adversely affect the camera unit’s
capability of detecting the lane markers.
• Do not strike or damage the areas
around the camera unit. Do not touch the
camera lens or remove the screw located
on the camera unit. If the camera unit is
damaged due to an accident, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
LSD3375
Starting and driving 5-37
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the BSW
system could result in serious injury or
death.
• The BSW system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objec ts. When changing
lanes, always use the side and rear
mirrors and turn and look in the di-
rection your vehicle will move to en-
sure it is safe to change lanes. Never
rely solely on the BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when
changing lanes.
The BSW system uses radar sensors
O
1
installed near the rear bumper to detect
other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on
either side of your vehicle within the detec-
tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-
tion zone starts from the outside mirror of
your vehicle and extends approximately
10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and
approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.
LSD2223 SSD1030
Detection zone
BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)
5-38 Starting and driving
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
The BSW system operates above approxi-
mately 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the
detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica-
tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is
then activated, the system chimes (twice)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes and the BSW/RCTA indicator illumi-
nates (yellow) in the vehicle information
display. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light
continues to flash until the detected ve-
hicle leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi-
nates for a few seconds when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi-
cator light is adjusted automatically de-
pending on the brightness of the ambient
light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone
after the driver activates the turn signal,
then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes and no chime sounds. For addi-
tional information, see “BSW driving situa-
tions” (P. 5-42).
LSD2749
Starting and driving 5-39
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSW SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the BSW system.
Using “Settings” in the vehicle informa-
tion display:
1. Press the
button until “Settings” dis-
plays in the vehicle information display
and then press the OK button. Use the
button to select “Driver Assistance.”
Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK but-
ton to turn the system on or off.
Using the “Driving Aids” screen in the
vehicle information display:
1. Use the
buttons on the steering
wheel to scroll to the Driving Aids screen.
2. Press the OK button to access the Driv-
ing Aids menu.
3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK but-
ton to change the Driving Aids setting.
LSD3432
5-40 Starting and driving
NOTE:
• When enabling/disabling the system,
the system will retain current settings
even if the engine is restarted.
• The RCTA system (if so equipped) is in-
tegrated into the BSW system. There is
not a separate selection in the vehicle
information display for the RCTA sys-
tem. When the BSW is disabled, the
RCTA system is also disabled.
• When the BSW system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the ve-
hicle information display illuminates.
BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the BSW system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
• The BSW system cannot detect all ve-
hicles under all conditions.
• The radar sensors may not be able to
detect and activate BSW when cer-
tain objects are present such as:
– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground
clearance vehicles.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Vehicles remaining in the detec-
tion zone when you accelerate
from a stop.
– A vehicle merging into an adjacent
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle.
– A vehicle approaching rapidly
from behind.
– A vehicle which your vehicle over-
takes rapidly.
– A vehicle that passes through the
detection zone quickly.
– When overtaking several vehicles
in a row, the vehicles after the first
vehicle may not be detected if
they are traveling close together.
• The radar sensor’s detec tion zone is
designed based on a standard lane
width. When driving in a wider lane,
the radar sensors may not detect ve-
hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-
ing in a narrow lane, the radar sen-
sors may detect vehicles driving two
lanes away.
• The radar sensors are designed to ig-
nore most stationary objects; how-
ever, objects such as guardrails,
walls, foliage and parked vehicles
may occasionally be detected. This is
a normal operation condition.
• The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on
the vehicle
• Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install acces-
sories or apply additional paint near
the radar sensors. These conditions
may reduce the ability of the radar to
detect other vehicles.
• Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume, open vehicle win-
dow) will interfere with the chime
sound, and it may not be heard.
Starting and driving 5-41
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on
Indicator off
Indicator flashing
Another vehicle approaching
from behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator
light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de-
tection zone from behind in an adjacent
lane.
NOTE:
• The radar sensors may not detect ve-
hicles which are approaching rapidly
from behind.
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the
turn signal when another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator
light flashes.
NOTE:
• The radar sensors may not detect ve-
hicles which are approaching rapidly
from behind.
• If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator
light will flash but no chime will sound
when the other vehicle is detected.
LSD2299
Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind
LSD2300
Illustration2–Approaching from behind
5-42 Starting and driving
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side BSW/RCTA indica-
tor light illuminates if you overtake a ve-
hicle and that vehicle stays in the detection
zone for approximately 2 seconds.
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator
light flashes.
NOTE:
• When overtaking several vehicles in a
row, the vehicles after the first vehicle
may not be detected if they are travel-
ing close together.
• The radar sensors may not detect
slower moving vehicles if they are
passed quickly.
• If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator
light will flash but no chime will sound
when the other vehicle is detected.
LSD2302
Illustration3–Overtaking another
vehicle
LSD2303
Illustration4–Overtaking another
vehicle
Starting and driving 5-43
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side BSW/RCTA indicator
light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de-
tection zone from either side.
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator
light flashes.
NOTE:
• If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator
light will flash but no chime will sound
when the other vehicle is detected.
• The radar sensors may not detect a ve-
hicle which is traveling at about the
same speed as your vehicle when it en-
ters the detection zone.
LSD2305
Illustration 5 – Entering from the side
LSD2308
Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
5-44 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the sys-
tem will be deactivated automatically.
The “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction”
warning message will appear and the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink
O
A
in
the vehicle information display.
The system is not available until the condi-
tions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi-
tion may also be caused by objects such
as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar
sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
LSD3433
Starting and driving 5-45
Malfunction
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn
off automatically. The BSW/RCTA indicator
(orange) will appear in the vehicle informa-
tion display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-
gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-
sage continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors
O
1
for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-
dar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
structing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transpar-
ent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
LSD2223
5-46 Starting and driving
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device contains licence-exempt
transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with
innovation, Science and Economic Devel-
opment Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2.
This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
Radio frequency radiation exposure
information:
This equipment complies with radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment. This equipment
should be installed and operated with
minimum distance of 20 cm between the
radiator and your body.
L’émetteur/récepteur exempt de licence
contenu dans le présent appareil est con-
forme aux CNR d’Innovation, Sciences et
Développement économique Canada ap-
plicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage;
2. L’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouil-
lage est susceptible d’en compromettre
le fonctionnement. Informations sur
I’exposition aux rayonnements
radiofréquences:
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements définies
pour un enviornnement non contrôlé. Cet
équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec
un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la
source de rayonnement et votre corps.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the RCTA
system could result in serious injury or
death.
• The RCTA system is not a replace-
ment for proper driving procedures
and is not designed to prevent con-
tact with vehicles or objec ts. When
backing out of a parking space, al-
ways use the side and rear mirrors
and turn and look in the direction
your vehicle will move. Never rely
solely on the RCTA system.
The RCTA system will assist you when
backing out from a parking space. When
the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de-
signed to detect other vehicles approach-
ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the
system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)
Starting and driving 5-47
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW/RCTA Indicator
The RCTA system can help alert the driver
of an approaching vehicle when the driver
is backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and
the vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is
operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from either side, the system chimes (once)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes on the side the vehicle is approach-
ing from.
LSD2749
5-48 Starting and driving
The RCTA system uses radar sensors
O
1
installed on both sides near the rear bum-
per to detect an approaching vehicle.
The radar sensors
O
1
can detect an ap-
proaching vehicle from up to approxi-
mately 66 ft. (20 m) away.
LSD2216 LSD2223
Starting and driving 5-49
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the RCTA system.
Using “Settings” in the vehicle informa-
tion display:
1. Press the
button until “Settings” dis-
plays in the vehicle information display
and then press the OK button. Use the
button to select “Driver Assistance.”
Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK but-
ton to turn the system on or off.
When the RCTA system is turned on, the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle
information display illuminates.
Using the “Driving Aids” screen in the ve-
hicle information display:
1. Use the
buttons on the steering
wheel to scroll to the Driving Aids screen.
2. Press the OK button to access the Driv-
ing Aids menu.
3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK but-
ton to change the Driving Aids setting.
NOTE:
•
The RCTA system is integrated into the
BSW system. There is not a separate se-
lection in the vehicle information display
for the RCTA system. When the BSW is dis-
abled, the RCTA system is also disabled.
• When enabling/disabling the system,
the system setting will be retained
even if the engine is restarted.
LSD3432
5-50 Starting and driving
RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the RCTA system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
• Always check surroundings and turn
to check what is behind you before
backing up. The radar sensors detect
approaching (moving) vehicles. The
radar sensors cannot detect every
object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motor-
cycles, animals or child-operated
toy vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater than approximately 19
mph (30 km/h)
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
lower than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h)
• The radar sensors may not detect
approaching vehicles in certain situ-
ations:
– Illustration
O
A
: When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs the
beam of the radar sensor.
– Illustration
O
B
: When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking
space.
– Illustration
O
C
: When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
– Illustration
O
D
: When an ap-
proaching vehicle turns into your
vehicle's parking lot aisle.
LSD3195
Starting and driving 5-51
– Illustration
O
E
: When the angle
formed by your vehicle and ap-
proaching vehicle is small.
• The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on
the vehicle
• Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install acces-
sories or apply additional paint near
the radar sensors. These conditions
may reduce the ability of the radar to
detect other vehicles.
• Excessive noise (e.g., audio system
volume, open vehicle window) will in-
terfere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.
NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles approach-
ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo-
site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may
not be sounded by the RCTA system af-
ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.
LSD2043
Illustration 1
LSD2044
Illustration 2
5-52 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the sys-
tem will be deactivated automatically.
The “Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction”
warning message will appear and the
BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink
O
A
in
the vehicle information display.
The systems are not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, snow, frost or dirt
obstructing the radar sensors.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will
turn off automatically. The BSW/RCTA indi-
cator (orange) will appear in the vehicle in-
formation display.
NOTE:
If the BSW system stops working, the
RCTA system will also stop working.
LSD3433
Starting and driving 5-53
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-
gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-
sage continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors
O
1
for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-
dar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
structing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transpar-
ent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
LSD2223
5-54 Starting and driving
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device contains licence-exempt
transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with
innovation, Science and Economic Devel-
opment Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2.
This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
Radio frequency radiation exposure
information:
This equipment complies with radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment. This equipment
should be installed and operated with
minimum distance of 20 cm between the
radiator and your body.
L’émetteur/récepteur exempt de licence
contenu dans le présent appareil est con-
forme aux CNR d’Innovation, Sciences et
Développement économique Canada ap-
plicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux
deux conditions suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage;
2. L’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouil-
lage est susceptible d’en compromettre
le fonctionnement. Informations sur
I’exposition aux rayonnements
radiofréquences:
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements définies
pour un enviornnement non contrôlé. Cet
équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec
un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la
source de rayonnement et votre corps.
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
1. CANCEL switch
2. RES/+ switch
3. SET/- switch
4. ON/OFF switch
• If the cruise control system malfunctions,
it cancels automatically. The
indica-
tor in the vehicle information display then
blinks to warn the driver.
LSD2516
CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)
Starting and driving 5-55
• If the indicator blinks, turn the cruise
control off and have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
• The
indicator may blink when the
ON/OFF switch is turned on while push-
ing the RES/+ switch, SET/- switch, or
CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise
control system, use the following
procedures.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driv-
ing under the following conditions:
• When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
• In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed.
• On winding or hilly roads.
• On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.).
• In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-
out keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON/OFF switch on. The
indicator in
the vehicle information display will illumi-
nate. If the Cruise Control Alerts are en-
abled in the Driving Aids menu, then the
“Cruise ON: Press SET to engage speed
control” message will appear in the vehicle
information display.
This message will disappear after about 6
seconds, or can be dismissed by pushing
the OK button. Cruise control status will
continue to display in the upper right cor-
ner of the vehicle information display while
the system is on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-
hicle to the desired speed, push the SET/–
switch and release it. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains
the set speed.
If the Cruise Control Alerts are enabled in
the Driving Aids menu, then the “Target
Speed SET. Press + or – to adjust” message
will appear in the vehicle information dis-
play when the SET/– switch is pushed. This
message will disappear after about 6 sec-
onds, or can be dismissed by pushing the
OK button. Cruise control status will con-
tinue to display in the upper right corner of
the vehicle information display while the
system is on.
• To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
celerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-
ously set speed.
• The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep hills.
If this happens, drive without the cruise
control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:
• Push the CANCEL switch.
• Tap the brake pedal.
• Push the ON/OFF switch off. The
indicator in the vehicle information dis-
play goes out.
5-56 Starting and driving
The cruise control is automatically can-
celed if:
• You depress the brake pedal while push-
ing the RES/+ or SET/– switch. The preset
speed is deleted from memory.
• The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
• You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).
If the Cruise Control Alerts are enabled in
the Driving Aids menu, the “Cruise ON: Press
SET to engage speed control” message will
reappear in the vehicle information display
to let you know the cruise control system is
still on if you set the target speed again.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
and release the SET/– switch.
• Push and hold the RES/+ switch. When
the vehicle attains the speed you desire,
release the switch.
• Push and release the RES/+ switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed increases
by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
SET/– switch and release it.
• Push and hold the SET/– switch. Release
the switch when the vehicle slows to the
desired speed.
• Push and release the SET/– switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed decreases
by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the RES/+ switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
To turn off the cruise control, use one of
the following three methods:
• Push the CANCEL switch.
• Tap the brake pedal.
• Push the ON/OFF switch off. The
indicator in the vehicle information dis-
play goes out.
Starting and driving 5-57
O
A
CRUISE ON/OFF switch
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the ICC sys-
tem could result in serious injury or
death.
• The ICC system is only an aid to assist
the driver and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely, and be in control of the
vehicle at all times.
• Always observe posted speed limits
and do not set the speed over them.
• Always drive carefully and atten-
tively when using the ICC system.
Read and understand the Owner’s
Manual thoroughly before using the
ICC system. To avoid serious injury or
death, do not rely on the system to
prevent accidents or to control the
vehicle’s speed in emergency situa-
tions. Do not use the ICC system ex-
cept in appropriate road and traffic
conditions.
LSD3443
INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)
(if so equipped)
5-58 Starting and driving
• In the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, a warning
chime will not sound to warn you if
you are too close to the vehicle
ahead. Pay special attention to the
distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead of you or a collision
could occur.
The ICC system maintains a selected dis-
tance from the vehicle in front of you within
the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144
km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed
can be selected by the driver between 20 to
90 mph (32 to 144 km/h).
The vehicle travels at a set speed when the
road ahead is clear.
The ICC system can be set to one of two
cruise control modes:
• Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode: For maintaining a selected dis-
tance between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle in front of you up to the preset speed
• Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-
trol mode: For cruising at a preset speed
Always confirm the setting in the ICC sys-
tem display.
Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch
O
A
to
choose the cruise control mode between
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode and the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode.
Once a control mode is activated, it cannot
be changed to the other cruise control
mode. To change the mode, push the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch
O
A
once to turn the
system off. Then push the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch
O
A
again to turn the system back on
and select the desired cruise control mode.
For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, see “Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode” (P. 5-60).
For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode, see “Conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode” (P. 5-78).
Starting and driving 5-59
HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE
CONTROL MODE
Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode: To choose the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
O
1
, quickly push and release the CRUISE
ON/OFF switch
O
A
.
Selecting the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode: To choose the con-
ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
O
2
, push and hold the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch
O
A
for longer than approximately 1.5
seconds. For additional information, refer
to “Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-
trol mode” in this section.
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode, the ICC system automatically main-
tains a selected distance from the vehicle
traveling in front of you according to that
vehicle’s speed (up to the set speed), or at
the set speed when the road ahead is clear.
The ICC system is intended to enhance the
operation of the vehicle when following a
vehicle traveling in the same lane and
direction.
LSD3444 LSD3441
5-60 Starting and driving
If the radar sensor
O
1
detects a slower
moving vehicle ahead, the system will re-
duce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle
follows the vehicle in front at the selected
distance.
The system automatically controls the
throttle and applies the brakes (up to ap-
proximately 40% of vehicle braking power)
if necessary.
The detection range of the sensor is ap-
proximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE OPERATION
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode is designed to maintain a selected
distance from the vehicle in front of you
and can reduce the speed to match a
LSD3631
Starting and driving 5-61
slower vehicle ahead. The system will de-
celerate the vehicle as necessary and if the
vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle
decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC
system can only apply up to 40% of the
vehicle’s total braking power.
This system should only be used when
traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to
remain fairly constant or when vehicle
speeds change gradually. If a vehicle
moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a
vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates,
the distance between vehicles may be-
come closer because the ICC system can-
not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.
If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a
warning chime and blink the system dis-
play to notify the driver to take necessary
action.
The system will cancel and a warning
chime will sound if the speed is below ap-
proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle
is not detected ahead. The system will also
disengage when the vehicle goes above
the maximum set speed.
For additional information, see “Approach
warning” (P. 5-69).
The following items are controlled in the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
• When there are no vehicles traveling
ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode maintains the speed set by
the driver. The set speed range is be-
tween approximately 20 and 90 mph
(32 and 144 km/h).
• When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
mode adjusts the speed to maintain the
distance, selected by the driver, from the
vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes
to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a
standstill within the limitations of the sys-
tem. The system will cancel once it judges
a standstill with a warning chime.
• When the vehicle traveling ahead has
moved out from its lane of travel, the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
accelerates and maintains vehicle speed
up to the set speed.
The ICC system does not control vehicle
speed or warn you when you approach
stationary and slow moving vehicles. You
must pay attention to vehicle operation to
maintain proper distance from vehicles
ahead when approaching toll gates or traf-
fic congestion.
When driving on the freeway at a set speed
and approaching a slower traveling vehicle
ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed
to maintain the distance, selected by the
driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,
the ICC system will accelerate and main-
tain the speed up to the set speed. Pay
attention to the driving operation to main-
tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates
to the set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc-
curs, you will have to manually control the
vehicle speed.
SSD0254
5-62 Starting and driving
Normally when controlling the distance to
a vehicle ahead, this system automatically
accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-
cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Depress the accelerator to properly accel-
erate your vehicle when acceleration is re-
quired for a lane change. Depress the brake
pedal when deceleration is required to
maintain a safe distance to the vehicle
ahead due to its sudden braking or if a
vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us-
ing the ICC system.
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE SWITCHES
The system is operated by the CRUISE ON/
OFF switch and four control switches, all
mounted on the steering wheel.
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing
the set speed.
2. RES/+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed
incrementally.
3. SET/- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally.
4. DISTANCE
switch:
Changes the vehicle’s following distance:
• Long
• Middle
• Short
5. CRUISE ON/OFF Switch:
Master switch to activate the system.
LSD2518
Starting and driving 5-63
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
control mode display and
indicators
The display is located between the speed-
ometer and tachometer.
1. This indicator indicates the ICC system
status depending on a color:
• ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indi-
cates that the CRUISE ON/OFF is on.
• ICC system SET indicator (green): In-
dicates that the cruising speed is set.
• ICC system warning (yellow): Indi-
cates that there is a malfunction in the
ICC system.
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
Indicates the set vehicle speed.
For Canadian models, the speed is dis-
played in km/h.
3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:
Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in
front of you.
4. Set distance indicator:
Displays the selected distance between
vehicles set with the distance switch.
Operating vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode
To turn on the cruise control, quickly push
and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch
O
A
.
The ICC system ON indicator (gray), set dis-
tance indicator and set vehicle speed indi-
cator
O
B
come on in a standby state for
setting. If the Cruise Control Alerts are en-
abled in the Driving Aids menu, then the
“Cruise ON: Press SET to engage speed and
distance control” message will appear in
the vehicle information display.
LSD3392 LSD3446
5-64 Starting and driving
This message will disappear after about 6
seconds, or can be dismissed by pushing
the OK button. Cruise control status will
continue to display in the upper right cor-
ner of the vehicle information display while
the system is on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-
hicle to the desired speed, push the SET/–
switch
O
C
and release it. The ICC system
set indicator (green), vehicle ahead detec-
tion indicator, set distance indicator and
set vehicle speed indicator
O
B
will come on.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.
If the Cruise Control Alerts are enabled in
the Driving Aids menu, then the “Target
Speed SET with Intelligent Distance Con-
trol” message will appear in the vehicle in-
formation display when the SET/– switch is
pushed. This message will disappear after
about 6 seconds, or can be dismissed by
pushing the OK button. Cruise control sta-
tus will continue to display in the upper
right corner of the vehicle information dis-
play while the system is on.
LSD3447
Starting and driving 5-65
When the SET/– switch is pushed under the
following conditions, the system cannot be
set and the ICC indicators will blink for ap-
proximately 2 seconds:
• When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)
and a vehicle ahead is not detected
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or Manual mode
• When the parking brake is applied
• When the brakes are operated by the
driver
When the SET/– switch is pushed under the
following conditions, the system cannot be
set.
A warning chime will sound and a message
will pop up:
• When the VDC system is off (To use the
ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push
the CRUISE ON/OFF switch to turn off the
ICC system and reset the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch by pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF
switch again.)
For additional information about the
VDC system, see “Vehicle Dynamic Con-
trol (VDC) system” (P. 5-122).
• When VDC is operating
• When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC
system, make sure the wheels are no lon-
ger slipping.)
䊊
1
System set display with vehicle ahead
䊊
2
System set display without vehicle
ahead
The driver sets the desired vehicle speed
based on the road conditions. The ICC sys-
tem maintains the set vehicle speed, simi-
lar to standard cruise control, as long as no
vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The
ICC system displays the set speed.
LSD3395 LSD2288
5-66 Starting and driving
Vehicle detected ahead
When a vehicle is detected in the lane
ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve-
hicle by controlling the throttle and apply-
ing the brakes to match the speed of a
slower vehicle ahead. The system then
controls the vehicle speed based on the
speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the
driver selected distance.
NOTE:
• The stop lights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the ICC
system.
• When the brake operates, a noise may
be heard. This is not a malfunction.
When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve-
hicle ahead detection indicator comes on.
The ICC system will also display the set
speed and selected distance.
Vehicle ahead not detected
When a vehicle is no longer detected
ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-
ates your vehicle to resume the previously
set vehicle speed. The ICC system then
maintains the set speed.
When a vehicle is no longer detected, the
vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.
If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera-
tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the
ICC system is in operation, the system con-
trols the distance to that vehicle.
When a vehicle is no longer detected under
approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys-
tem will be canceled.
When passing another vehicle, the set
speed indicator
O
A
will flash when the
vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The
vehicle detect indicator will turn off when
the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return
to the previously set speed.
Even though your vehicle speed is set in the
ICC system, you can depress the accelera-
tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerate
your vehicle rapidly.
LSD3442
Starting and driving 5-67
How to change the set vehicle
speed
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following methods:
• Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
• Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle
speed indicator will go out.
• If the Cruise Control Alerts are enabled in
the Driving Aids menu, the “Cruise ON:
Press SET to engage speed control” mes-
sage will reappear in the vehicle informa-
tion display to let you know the cruise
control system is still on if you set the
target speed again.
• Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The
ICC indicators will go out, and the Cruise
Control Alert messages will not appear.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
• Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
and release the SET/– switch.
• Push and hold the RES/+ switch. The set
vehicle speed will increase by approxi-
mately 5 mph (5 km/h for Canada).
• Push, then quickly release the RES/+
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed will increase by approximately
1 mph (1 km/h for Canada).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following methods:
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
SET/– switch and release it.
• Push and hold the SET/– switch. The set
vehicle speed will decrease by approxi-
mately 5 mph (5 km/h for Canada).
• Push, then quickly release the SET/–
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed will decrease by approximately
1 mph (1 km/h for Canada).
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the RES/+ switch. The vehicle will
resume the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).
How to change the set distance
to the vehicle ahead
The distance to the vehicle ahead can be
selected at any time depending on the traf-
fic conditions.
Each time the distance
switch
O
A
is
pushed, the set distance will change to
long, middle, short and back to long again,
in that sequence.
LSD3448
5-68 Starting and driving
Distance Approximate distance at
60 mph (100 km/h)
[ft (m)]
1. Long 200 (60)
2. Middle 150 (45)
3. Short 90 (30)
• The distance to the vehicle ahead will
change according to the vehicle speed.
The higher the vehicle speed, the longer
the distance.
• The distance setting will remain at the
current setting even if the engine is
restarted.
Approach warning
If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle
ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-
hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys-
tem warns the driver with the chime and
ICC system display. Decelerate by depress-
ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve-
hicle distance if:
• The chime sounds.
• The vehicle ahead detection indicator
blinks.
The warning chime may not sound in
some cases when there is a short distance
between vehicles. Some examples are:
• When the vehicles are traveling at the
same speed and the distance between
vehicles is not changing.
• When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster
and the distance between vehicles is
increasing.
• When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.
The warning chime will not sound when:
• The vehicle approaches other vehicles
that are parked or moving slowly.
• The accelerator pedal is depressed, over-
riding the system.
NOTE:
The approach warning chime may sound
and the system display may blink when
the ICC sensor detects objects on the
side of the vehicle or on the side of the
road. This may cause the ICC system to
decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The
ICC sensor may detect these objects
when the vehicle is driven on winding
roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when
entering or exiting a curve. In these
cases you will have to manually control
the proper distance ahead of your
vehicle.
Also, the radar sensor sensitivity can be
affected by vehicle operation (steering ma-
neuver or driving position in the lane) or
traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a
vehicle is being driven with some damage).
Automatic cancellation
A chime sounds under the following condi-
tions and the control is automatically can-
celed:
• When the vehicle ahead is not detected
and your vehicle is traveling below the
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
• When the system judges the vehicle is at
a standstill
LSD2752
Starting and driving 5-69
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
position, Manual mode.
• When the parking brake system is applied
• When the VDC system is turned off
• When VDC operates
• When distance measurement becomes
impaired due to adhesion of dirt or ob-
struction to the sensor
• When a wheel slips
• When the radar signal is temporarily
interrupted
VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE
CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the ICC system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
• The ICC system is primarily intended
for use on straight, dry, open roads
with light traffic. It is not advisable to
use the ICC system in city traffic or
congested areas.
• The ICC system will not adapt auto-
matically to road conditions. This
system should be used in evenly
flowing traffic. Do not use the system
on roads with sharp curves, or on icy
roads, in heavy rain or in fog.
• As there is a performance limit to the
distance control function, never rely
solely on the ICC system. This system
does not correct careless, inattentive
or absentminded driving, or over-
come poor visibility in rain, fog, or
other bad weather. Decelerate the
vehicle speed by depressing the
brake pedal, depending on the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead and the
surrounding circumstances in order
to maintain a safe distance between
vehicles.
• If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,
the vehicle decelerates to a standstill
within the limitations of the system.
The system will cancel once it judges
that the vehicle has come to a stand-
still and sound a warning chime. To
prevent the vehicle from moving, the
driver must depress the brake pedal.
• Always pay attention to the opera-
tion of the vehicle and be ready to
manually control the proper follow-
ing distance. The ICC system may not
be able to maintain the selected dis-
tance between vehicles (following
distance) or selected vehicle speed
under some circumstances.
• The system may not detect the ve-
hicle in front of you in certain road or
weather conditions. To avoid acci-
dents, never use the ICC system un-
der the following conditions:
– On roads where the traffic is heavy
or there are sharp curves
– On slippery road surfaces such as
on ice or snow, etc.
– During bad weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.)
– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to
the bumper around the distance
sensor
– On steep downhill roads (the ve-
hicle may go beyond the set ve-
hicle speed and frequent braking
may result in overheating the
brakes)
5-70 Starting and driving
– On repeated uphill and downhill
roads
–
When traffic conditions make it dif-
ficult to keep a proper distance be-
tween vehicles because of frequent
acceleration or deceleration
–
Inter ference by other radar sources
• Do not use the ICC system if you are
towing a trailer. The system may not
detect a vehicle ahead.
• In some road or traffic conditions, a
vehicle or objec t can unexpectedly
come into the sensor detec tion zone
and cause automatic braking. Al-
ways stay alert and avoid using the
ICC system where not recommended
in this warning section.
The radar sensor will not detect the follow-
ing objects:
• Stationary and slow moving vehicles
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
• Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel
lane
The sensor generally detects the signals
returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore,
if the sensor cannot detect the reflection
from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system
may not maintain the selected distance.
The following are some conditions in which
the sensor cannot properly detect a ve-
hicle ahead and the system may not oper-
ate properly:
• When snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.
• When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.
• When excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of
your vehicle.
The ICC system is designed to automati-
cally check the sensor’s operation within
the limitations of the system.
When the sensor is covered with dirt or is
obstructed, the system will automatically
be canceled. If the sensor is covered with
ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,
etc., the ICC system may not detect them.
In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode may not cancel and
may not be able to maintain the selected
following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Be sure to check and clean the sensor
regularly.
The detection zone of the radar sensor is
limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de-
tection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance detection mode to maintain the se-
lected distance from the vehicle ahead.
A vehicle ahead may move outside of the
detection zone due to its position within
the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may
not be detected in the same lane ahead if
they are traveling offset from the centerline
of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the
lane ahead may not be detected until the
vehicle has completely moved into the
lane.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime. The driver may
have to manually control the proper dis-
tance away from vehicle traveling ahead.
Starting and driving 5-71
SSD0252
5-72 Starting and driving
When driving on some roads, such as wind-
ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads
which are under construction, the radar
sensor may detect vehicles in a different
lane, or may temporarily not detect a ve-
hicle traveling ahead. This may cause the
radar system to decelerate or accelerate
the vehicle.
The detection of vehicles may also be af-
fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-
neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)
or vehicle condition.
If this occurs, the ICC system may warn
you by blinking the system indicator and
sounding the chime unexpectedly. You
will have to manually control the proper
distance away from the vehicle traveling
ahead.
SSD0253
Starting and driving 5-73
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
The following are conditions in which the
ICC system may be temporarily unavail-
able. In these instances, the ICC system
may not cancel and may not be able to
maintain the selected following distance
from the vehicle ahead.
Condition A
Under the following conditions, the ICC sys-
tem is automatically canceled. A chime will
sound and the system will not be able to be
set:
• When the VDC system is turned off
• When the VDC operates
• When a vehicle ahead is not detected and
your vehicle is traveling below the speed
of 15 mph (24 km/h)
• When the system judges the vehicle is at
a standstill
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or Manual mode.
• When the parking brake is applied
• When a wheel slips
• When the radar signal is temporarily
interrupted
LSD3449
5-74 Starting and driving
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, turn the system off using
the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on
to use the system.
Condition B
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor,
the ICC system will automatically be can-
celed, the chime will sound and the “For-
ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
warning message will appear in the vehicle
information display.
Action to take
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, the warning message will
no longer be available in the vehicle infor-
mation display and the system will operate
normally. If the “Forward Driving Aids Tem-
porarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See
Owner’s Manual” warning message contin-
ues to be displayed, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C
When the radar sensor area of the front
bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,
etc., or is obstructed, the ICC system will
automatically be canceled.
The chime will sound and the “Forward
Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
warning message will appear in the vehicle
information display.
Action to take
If the warning message appears, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever
in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine
off. When the radar signal is temporarily
interrupted, clean the sensor area of the
front bumper and restart the engine. If the
“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
warning message continues to be dis-
played, have the system checked. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
Condition D
When driving on roads with limited road
structures (for example, long bridges, des-
erts, snow fields, driving next to long walls),
the system may illuminate the system
warning light and display the “Forward
Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
message.
Action to take
When the above driving conditions no lon-
ger exist, turn the system back on.
Condition E
When the ICC system is not operating
properly, a chime sounds and the ICC sys-
tem warning light (orange) will come on.
Starting and driving 5-75
Action to take
If the warning light comes on, park the ve-
hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,
restart the engine, resume driving and set
the ICC system again.
If it is not possible to set the system or
the indicator stays on, it may indicate
that the system is malfunctioning. Al-
though the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the vehicle
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
If the ICC system is temporarily unavail-
able, the conventional cruise control
mode may still be used. For additional
information, please see “Conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode”
(P. 5-78).
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor for the ICC system
O
1
is located
on the front of the vehicle.
To keep the ICC system operating properly,
be sure to observe the following:
• Always keep the sensor area of the front
bumper/emblem clean.
• Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor.
• Do not attach a sticker (including trans-
parent material) or install an accessory
near the sensor. This could cause failure
or malfunction.
LSD3916 LSD3441
5-76 Starting and driving
• Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could
cause failure or malfunction.
• Do not alter, remove, or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring
the front bumper, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
For Canada
Model: ARS4–B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-
antes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radia-
tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 30 cm
between the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other an-
tenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies
pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet
équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec
un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la
source de rayonnement et votre corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Starting and driving 5-77
CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)
CRUISE CONTROL MODE
This mode allows driving at a speed be-
tween 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) with-
out keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING
• In the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, a warning
chime does not sound to warn you if
you are too close to the vehicle
ahead, as neither the presence of the
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-
vehicle distance is detected.
• Pay special attention to the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you or a collision could
occur.
• Always confirm the setting in the ICC
system display.
• Do not use the conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode when
driving under the following condi-
tions:
– When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed
– In heavy traffic or in traffic that
varies in speed
– On winding or hilly roads
– On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
etc.)
– In very windy areas
• Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control switches
1. CANCEL switch:
Deactivates the system without erasing
the set speed
2. RES/+ switch:
Resumes set speed or increases speed
incrementally
3. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:
Master switch to activate the system
4. SET/- switch:
Sets desired cruise speed or reduces
speed incrementally
LSD3450
5-78 Starting and driving
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise
control mode display and
indicators
The display is located in the vehicle infor-
mation display.
1. Cruise indicator:
This indicator indicates the condition of
the ICC system depending on a color.
• Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indi-
cates that the CRUISE ON/OFF switch
is on
• Cruise control SET indicator (green): In-
dicates that the cruising speed is set
• Cruise control warning (yellow): Indi-
cates that there is a malfunction in the
ICC system
2. Set vehicle speed indicator:
This indicator indicates the set vehicle
speed. For Canadian models, the speed
is displayed in km/h.
Operating conventional (fixed
speed) cruise control mode
To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, push and hold the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch
O
A
for longer than
about 1.5 seconds.
When pushing CRUISE ON/OFF switch on,
the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-
trol mode display and indicators
O
B
are
displayed in the vehicle information dis-
play. After you hold CRUISE ON/OFF switch
on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the
LSD3397 LSD3454
Starting and driving 5-79
ICC system display turns off. The cruise in-
dicator appears. You can now set your de-
sired cruising speed. Pushing the CRUISE
ON/OFF switch again will turn the system
completely off. When the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, the system is
also automatically turned off.
To use the ICC system again, quickly push
and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch
(vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode)
or push and hold it (conventional cruise
control mode) again to turn it on.
CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise
control, make sure to turn the ICC
switch off when not using the ICC
system.
To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-
hicle to the desired speed, push the SET/–
O
C
switch and release it. (The color of the
cruise indicator changes to green and set
vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take
your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your
vehicle will maintain the set speed.
• To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
celerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previ-
ously set speed.
• The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep hills.
If this happens, manually maintain ve-
hicle speed.
To cancel the preset speed, use any of the
following methods:
1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle
speed indicator will turn off.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed
indicator will turn off.
3. Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. Both
the cruise indicator and vehicle speed
indicator will turn off.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:
1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
and release the SET/– switch.
2. Push and hold the RES/+ switch. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
release the switch.
3. Push, then quickly release the RES/+
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed will increase by about 1 mph (1.6
km/h).
LSD3452
5-80 Starting and driving
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods:
1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the SET/– switch and release it.
2. Push and hold the SET/– switch. Release
the switch when the vehicle slows down
to the desired speed.
3. Push, then quickly release the SET/–
switch. Each time you do this, the set
speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6
km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and re-
lease the RES/+ switch. The vehicle will re-
sume the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
System temporarily unavailable
A chime sounds under the following condi-
tions and the control is automatically can-
celed:
LSD3453
Starting and driving 5-81
• When the vehicle slows down more than
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)
or manual shift mode
• When the parking brake is applied
• When the VDC operates (including the
traction control system)
• When a wheel slips
When the system is not operating properly,
the chime sounds and the color of the
cruise indicator will change to orange.
Action to take
If the color of the cruise indicator changes
to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place
and place the shift lever in the P (Park) po-
sition. Turn the engine off, restart the en-
gine, resume driving, and then perform the
setting again.
If it is not possible to set or the indicator
stays on, it may indicate that the system
is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle
is still drivable under normal conditions,
have the vehicle checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the RAB
system could result in serious injury or
death.
• The RAB system is a supplemental
aid to the driver. It is not a replace-
ment for proper driving procedures.
Always use the side and rear mirrors
and turn and look in the direction you
will move before and while backing
up. Never rely solely on the RAB sys-
tem. It is the driver’s responsibility to
stay alert, drive safely, and be in con-
trol of the vehicle at all times.
• There is a limitation to the RAB sys-
tem capability. The RAB system is not
effective in all situations.
• Inclement weather or ultrasonic
sources such as an automatic car
wash, a truck’s compressed-air
brakes or a pneumatic drill may af-
fect the function of the system, this
may include reduced performance or
a false activation.
The RAB system can assist the driver when
the vehicle is backing up and approaching
objects directly behind the vehicle.
The RAB system detects obstacles behind
the vehicle using the parking sensors
O
1
located on the rear bumper.
NOTE:
You can temporarily cancel the sonar
function in the vehicle, but the RAB sys-
tem will continue to operate. For addi-
tional information, please see “Front and
rear sonar system” (P. 5-125).
LSD3364
REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB)
5-82 Starting and driving
RAB SYSTEM OPERATION
䊊
1
RAB system warning light and RAB sys-
tem warning indicator
䊊
2
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)
䊊
3
Center display
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed is less than
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB
system operates.
If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is
detected when your vehicle is backing up,
the RAB system warning indicator will flash
in the vehicle information display, a red
frame will appear in the center display (for
vehicles with the Intelligent Around View
Monitor system), and the system will chime
three times. The system will then auto-
matically apply the brakes. After the auto-
matic brake application, the driver must
depress the brake pedal to maintain brake
pressure.
NOTE:
• The brake lights of the vehicle come on
when braking is performed by the RAB
system.
• When the brakes operate, a noise may
be heard. This is not a malfunction.
LSD3365
Starting and driving 5-83
TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the RAB
system on or off.
1. Press the
button until “Settings” dis-
plays in the vehicle information display
and then press the OK button. Use the
button to select “Driver Assistance.”
Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the
OK button.
3. Select “Rear” and press the OK button to
turn the system on or off.
When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB
system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
The RAB system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is restarted.
LSD3434
5-84 Starting and driving
RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the RAB system. Failure to follow the
warnings and instructions for proper
use of the RAB system could result in
serious injury or death.
• When the vehicle approaches an ob-
stacle while the accelerator or brake
pedal is depressed, the function may
not operate or the start of operation
may be delayed. The RAB system
may not operate or may not perform
sufficiently due to vehicle conditions,
driving conditions, the traffic envi-
ronment, the weather, road surface
conditions, etc. Do not wait for the
system to operate. Operate the brake
pedal by yourself as soon as
necessary.
• If it is necessary to override RAB op-
eration, strongly press the accelera-
tor pedal.
• Always check your surroundings and
turn to check what is behind you be-
fore and while backing up. The RAB
system detects stationary objects
behind the vehicle. The RAB system
does not detect the following ob-
jects:
– Moving objects
– Low objects
– Narrow objects
– Wedge-shaped objects
– Objects close to the bumper (less
than approximately 1 ft [30 cm])
– Objects that suddenly appear
– Thin objects such as rope, wire,
chain, etc.
• The RAB system may not operate for
the following obstacles:
– Obstacles located high off the
ground
– Obstacles in a position offset from
your vehicle
– Obstacles, such as spongy materi-
als or snow, that have soft outer
sur faces and can easily absorb a
sound wave
• The RAB system may not operate in
the following conditions:
– There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc.,
attached to the sonar sensors.
– A loud sound is heard in the area
around the vehicle.
– The surface of the obstacle is di-
agonal to the rear of the vehicle.
• The RAB system may unintentionally
operate in the following conditions:
– There is overgrown grass in the
area around the vehicle.
– There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll
gate equipment, a narrow tunnel,
a parking lot gate) near the side of
the vehicle.
– There are bumps, protrusions, or
manhole covers on the road
sur face.
– The vehicle drives through a
draped flag or a curtain.
– There is an accumulation of snow
or ice behind the vehicle.
– An ultrasonic wave source, such as
another vehicle’s sonar, is near
the vehicle.
Starting and driving 5-85
• Once the automatic brake control
operates, it does not operate again if
the vehicle approaches the same
obstacle.
• The automatic brake control can only
operate for a short period of time.
Therefore, the driver must depress
the brake pedal.
• In the following situations, the RAB
system may not operate properly or
may not function sufficiently:
– The vehicle is driven in bad
weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
– The vehicle is driven on a steep
hill.
– The vehicle’s posture is changed
(e.g., when driving over a bump).
– The vehicle is driven on a slippery
road.
– The vehicle is turned sharply by
turning the steering wheel fully.
– Snow chains are used.
– Wheels or tires other than NISSAN
recommended are used.
– The brakes are cold at low ambi-
ent temperatures or immediately
after driving has star ted.
– The braking force becomes poor
due to wet brakes after driving
through a puddle or washing the
vehicle.
• Turn the RAB system off in the follow-
ing conditions to prevent the occur-
rence of an unexpected accident re-
sulting from sudden system
operation:
– The vehicle is towed.
– The vehicle is carried on a flatbed
truck.
– The vehicle is on the chassis
dynamometer.
– The vehicle drives on an uneven
road surface.
– The vehicle is towing an object (if
so equipped).
– Suspension parts other than
those designated as Genuine
NISSAN parts are used. (If the ve-
hicle height or the vehicle body in-
clination is changed, the system
may not detect an obstacle
correctly.)
– If the vehicle is using an accessory
like a bike rack, or cargo carrier
that blocks the sensors.
• Excessive noise (e.g., audio system
volume, an open vehicle window) will
inter fere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, and the RAB sys-
tem warning light will illuminate in the ve-
hicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light illuminates, park the ve-
hicle in a safe location, turn the engine off,
and restart the engine. If the warning light
continues to illuminate, have the RAB sys-
tem checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
If the RAB system cannot be operated
temporarily, the RAB system warning
light blinks.
5-86 Starting and driving
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Observe the following items to ensure
proper operation of the system:
• Always keep the parking sensors
O
1
clean.
• If the parking sensors are dir ty, wipe them
off with a soft cloth while being careful to
not damage them.
• Do not subject the area around the park-
ing sensors
O
1
to strong impact. Also, do
not remove or disassemble the parking
sensors. If the parking sensors and pe-
ripheral areas are deformed in an acci-
dent, etc., have the sensors checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
• Do not install any stickers (including
transparent stickers) or accessories on
the parking sensors
O
1
and their sur-
rounding areas. This may cause a mal-
function or improper operation.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the AEB
with Pedestrian Detection system
could result in serious injury or death.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is a supplemental aid to the
driver. It is not a replacement for the
driver’s attention to traffic condi-
tions or responsibility to drive safely.
It cannot prevent accidents due to
carelessness or dangerous driving
techniques.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system does not function in all driv-
ing, traffic, weather and road
conditions.
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
can assist the driver when there is a risk of
a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in
the traveling lane or with a pedestrian
ahead in the traveling lane.
LSD3364
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING
(AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION
Starting and driving 5-87
The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
uses a radar sensor located on the front of
the vehicle
O
B
to measure the distance to
the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For
pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian De-
tection system uses a camera installed be-
hind the windshield
O
A
in addition to the
radar sensor.
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emer-
gency warning indicator
LSD3368
LSD3436
5-88 Starting and driving
3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light
The AEB system operates at speeds above
approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pe-
destrian detection function, the system
operates at speeds between6–37mph
(10 – 60 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected,
the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
will firstly provide the warning to the driver
by flashing the vehicle ahead detection in-
dicator (yellow) in the vehicle information
display and providing an audible alert. If the
driver applies the brakes quickly and force-
fully after the warning, and the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system detects that
there is still the possibility of a forward col-
lision, the system will automatically in-
crease the braking force.
If the driver does not take action, the AEB
with Pedestrian Detection system issues
the second visual (flashing) (red and white)
and audible warning. If the driver releases
the accelerator pedal, then the system ap-
plies partial braking. If the risk of a collision
becomes imminent, the AEB with Pedes-
trian Detection system applies harder
braking automatically.
While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is operating, you may hear the
sound of brake operation. This is normal
and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system is operating properly.
NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when
any braking is performed by the AEB
with Pedestrian Detection system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance
to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well
as driving and roadway conditions, the sys-
tem may help the driver avoid a forward
collision or may help mitigate the conse-
quences if a collision should be unavoid-
able. If the driver is handling the steering
wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system will function
later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the
following conditions:
• When the steering wheel is turned to
avoid a collision.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
• When there is no longer a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected ahead.
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-
tem has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle
will remain at a standstill for approximately
2 seconds before the brakes are released.
Starting and driving 5-89
TURNING THE AEB WITH
PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system.
1. Press the
button until “Settings” dis-
plays in the vehicle information display
and then press the OK button. Use the
button to select “Driver Assistance.”
Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the
OK button.
3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to
turn the system on or off.
When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system is turned off, the AEB with Pedes-
trian Detection system warning light
illuminates.
NOTE:
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-
tem will be automatically turned on
when the engine is restarted.
• The I-FCW system is integrated into the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
There is not a separate selection in the
vehicle information display for the
I-FCW system. When the AEB with Pe-
destrian Detection system is turned off,
the I-FCW system is also turned off.
LSD3434
5-90 Starting and driving
AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN
DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system. Failure to operate the vehicle in
accordance with these system limita-
tions could result in serious injury or
death.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system cannot detect all vehicles or
pedestrians under all conditions.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system does not detect the following
objects:
– Pedestrians that are small (for ex-
ample, children), in a sitting posi-
tion, operating toys/skateboards,
on scooters or in wheelchairs, or
not in an upright standing or
walking position.
– Animals of any size.
–
Obstacles (for example, cargo or
debris) on the roadway or roadside.
– Oncoming or crossing vehicles.
–
Vehicles where the tires are difficult
to see or the shape of the rear of the
vehicle is unclear or obstructed.
– Parked vehicles.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system has some performance limi-
tations.
–
If a stationary vehicle is in the vehi-
cle’s path, the system will not func-
tion when the vehicle approaches
the stationary vehicle at speeds
over approximately 50 mph (80
km/h).
–
Pedestrian detection will not func-
tion when the vehicle is driven at
speeds over approximately 37 mph
(60 km/h) or below approximately
6 mph (10km/h).
• For pedestrians, the AEB with Pedes-
trian Detection system will not issue
the first warning.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system may not function properly or
detect a vehicle or pedestrians
ahead in the following conditions:
– In poor visibility conditions (such
as rain, snow, fog, dust storms,
sand storms, smoke, and road
spray from other vehicles).
–
If dirt, ice, snow, fog or other mate-
rial is covering the radar sensor
area or camera area of windshield.
– If strong light (for example, sun-
light or high beams) enters the
front camera or a sudden change
in brightness occurs (for example,
entering a tunnel or driving in
lightning).
– In dark or dimly lit conditions,
such as at night or in tunnels, in-
cluding cases where your vehi-
cle’s headlights are off or dim, or
the tail lights of the vehicle ahead
are off.
– When the direction of the camera
is misaligned.
– When driving on a steep downhill
slope, on roads with sharp curves,
and/or bumpy or dirt roads.
– If there is interference by other ra-
dar sources.
– When your vehicle’s position or
movement is changed quickly or
significantly (for example, lane
change, turning vehicle, abrupt
steering, sudden acceleration or
deceleration).
Starting and driving 5-91
– When your vehicle or the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead moves
quickly or significantly such that
the system cannot detect and re-
act in time (for example, pedes-
trian moving quickly toward the
vehicle at close range, vehicle cut-
ting in, changing lanes, making a
turn, steering abruptly, sudden
acceleration or deceleration).
– When the vehicle or pedestrian is
offset from the vehicle’s forward
path.
– If the speed difference between
the two vehicles is small.
– The pedestrian’s profile is par-
tially obscured or unidentifiable;
for example, due to transporting
luggage, pushing a stroller, wear-
ing bulky or very loose-fitting
clothing or accessories, or being
in a unique posture (such as rais-
ing hands).
– There is poor contrast of a person
to the background, such as having
clothing color or pattern which is
similar to the background.
– For approximately 15 seconds af-
ter starting the engine.
– If the vehicle ahead has a unique
or unusual shape, extremely low
or high clearance heights, or un-
usual cargo loading or is narrow
(for example, a motorcycle).
– When the vehicle or pedestrian is
located near a traffic sign, a reflec-
tive area (for example, water on
road), or is in a shadow.
– When multiple pedestrians are
grouped together.
– When the view of the pedestrian is
obscured by a vehicle or other
object.
– While towing a trailer or other
vehicle.
• The system performance may de-
graded in the following conditions:
– The vehicle is driven on a slippery
road.
– The vehicle is driven on a slope.
– Excessively heavy baggage is
loaded in the rear seat or the
cargo area of your vehicle.
• The system is designed to automati-
cally check the sensor’s (radar and
camera) functionality, within certain
limitations. The system may not de-
tect some forms of obstruction of the
sensor area such as ice, snow or
stickers, for example. In these cases,
the system may not be able to warn
the driver properly. Be sure that you
check, clean and clear sensor areas
regularly.
• In some road and traffic conditions,
the AEB with Pedestrian Detec tion
system may unexpectedly apply par-
tial braking. When acceleration is
necessary, depress the accelerator
pedal to override the system.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system may operate when a pattern,
object, shadow or lights are detected
that are similar to the outline of ve-
hicles or pedestrians, or if they are
the same size and position as a ve-
hicle or motorcycle’s tail lights.
• The system may keep operating
when the vehicle ahead is turning
right or left.
5-92 Starting and driving
• The system may operate when your
vehicle is approaching and passing a
vehicle ahead.
• Depending on the road shape
(curved road, entrance and exit of the
curve, winding road, lane regulation,
under construction, etc.), the system
may operate temporarily for the on-
coming vehicle in front of your
vehicle.
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system. Failure to operate the vehicle in
accordance with these system limita-
tions could result in serious injury or
death.
• The AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system may react to:
– objects on the roadside (traffic
sign, guardrail, pedestrian, motor-
cycle, vehicle, etc.)
– pedestrians when driving on the
narrow alleys, etc.
– pedestrians who temporarily pro-
trude into or approaching the
driving lane to avoid the obstacles
on the road shoulder
– objects above road (low bridge,
traffic sign, etc.)
– objects on the road surface (rail-
road track, grate, steel plate, etc.)
– objects in the parking garage
(beam, pillar, etc.)
– pedestrians or motorcycles ap-
proaching the travelling lane
– vehicles, pedestrians, motor-
cycles or objects in adjacent lanes
or close to the vehicle
LSD4248
Starting and driving 5-93
– oncoming pedestrians
– objects on the road (such as trees)
• Braking distances increase on slip-
pery surfaces.
• Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
LSD2526
5-94 Starting and driving
Condition A:
In the following conditions, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light
blinks and the system will be turned off
automatically:
• The radar sensor picks up interference
from another radar source.
• The camera area of the windshield is
misted or frozen.
• Strong light is shining from the front.
• The cabin temperature is over approxi-
mately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight.
• The camera area of the windshield glass
is continuously covered with dirt, etc.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
will resume automatically.
NOTE:
When the inside of the windshield on the
camera area is misted or frozen, it will
take a period of time to remove it after
the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this
area, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
Condition B:
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor,
the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
will automatically be canceled, the chime
will sound and the “Forward Driving Aids
Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked
See Owner’s Manual” warning message will
appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, the warning message will
no longer be available in the vehicle infor-
mation display. If the “Forward Driving Aids
Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked
See Owner’s Manual” warning message
continues to be displayed, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C:
When the radar sensor of the front bumper
is covered with mud, dirt, snow ice, etc., or is
obstructed, the AEB with Pedestrian Detec-
tion system will automatically be canceled.
The chime will sound and the “Forward
Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front
Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
warning message will appear in the vehicle
information display.
Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever
in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine
off. When the radar signal is temporarily
interrupted, clean the sensor area of the
front bumper and restart the engine. If the
“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
warning message continues to be dis-
played, have the system checked. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
Condition D:
When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, long
bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to
long walls), the system may illuminate the
system warning light and display the “For-
ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
message.
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no lon-
ger exist, turn the system back on.
Starting and driving 5-95
NOTE:
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system stops working, the I-FCW sys-
tem will also stop working.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-
tem malfunctions, it will be turned off auto-
matically, a chime will sound, the AEB with
Pedestrian Detection system warning light
(orange) will illuminate and the warning
message [Malfunction] will appear in the
vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en-
gine off and restart the engine. If the
warning light continues to illuminate, have
the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
LSD3916
5-96 Starting and driving
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The radar sensor is located on the front of
the vehicle
O
B
. The camera is located on
the upper side of the windshield
O
A
.
To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
system operating properly, be sure to ob-
serve the following:
• Always keep the sensor areas of the front
bumper/emblem and windshield clean.
•
Do not strike or damage the areas around
the sensors (e.g., bumper, windshield).
• Do not cover or attach stickers, or install
any accessory near the sensors. This
could block sensor signals and/or cause
failure or malfunction.
• Do not attach metallic objects near the
radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction.
• Do not place reflective materials, such as
white paper or a mirror, on the instru-
ment panel. The reflection of sunlight
may adversely affect the camera unit's
detection capability.
• Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring
the front bumper, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
For Canada
Model: ARS4–B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licence-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
LSD3368
Starting and driving 5-97
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radio frequency radiation exposure
information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 30 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other an-
tenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d'exposition aux rayonnements IC établies
pour un environnement non contrôlé.
Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé
avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance
entre la source de rayonnement et votre
corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the I-FCW
system could result in serious injury or
death.
• The I-FCW system can help warn the
driver before a collision occurs but
will not avoid a collision. It is the driv-
er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
The I-FCW system can help alert the driver
when there is a sudden braking of a second
vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle
ahead in the same lane.
The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor
O
A
located on the front of the vehicle to mea-
sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in
the same lane.
LSD3435
INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION
WARNING (I-FCW)
5-98 Starting and driving
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light
LSD3438
Starting and driving 5-99
I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION
The I-FCW system operates at speeds
above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If there is a potential risk of a forward colli-
sion, the I-FCW system will warn the driver
by blinking the vehicle ahead detection in-
dicator, and sounding an audible alert.
LSD2263
5-100 Starting and driving
TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the
I-FCW system on or off.
1. Press the
button until “Settings” dis-
plays in the vehicle information display
and then press the OK button. Use the
button to select “Driver Assistance.”
Then press the OK button.
2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press the
OK button.
3. Select “Front” and press the OK button to
turn the system on or off.
When the I-FCW system is turned off, the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system
warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
• The I-FCW system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is
restarted.
• The I-FCW system is integrated into the
AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.
There is not a separate selection in the
vehicle information display for the
I-FCW system. When the AEB with Pe-
destrian Detection is turned off, the
I-FCW system is also turned off.
LSD3434
Starting and driving 5-101
I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
LSD2312
Illustration A
5-102 Starting and driving
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
• The I-FCW system cannot detect all
vehicles under all conditions.
• The radar sensor does not detect the
following objects:
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles
in the roadway
– Oncoming vehicles
– Crossing vehicles
• (Illustration A) The I-FCW system
does not function when a vehicle
ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a
motorcycle.
• The radar sensor may not detect a
vehicle ahead in the following
conditions:
– Snow or heavy rain
– Dirt, ice, snow or other material
covering the radar sensor.
– Inter ference by other radar
sources.
– Snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles.
– Driving in a tunnel
LSD2265
Illustration B
Starting and driving 5-103
– (Illustration B) When the vehicle
ahead is being towed.
– (Illustration C) When the distance
to the vehicle ahead is too close,
the beam of the radar sensor is
obstructed.
– (Illustration D) When driving on a
steep downhill slope or roads with
sharp curves.
• The system is designed to automati-
cally check the sensor’s functionality,
within certain limitations. The sys-
tem may not detect some forms of
obstruction of the sensor area such
as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these
cases, the system may not be able to
warn the driver properly. Be sure that
you check, clean and clear the sensor
area regularly.
• Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.
5-104 Starting and driving
LSD2266
Illustration C
Starting and driving 5-105
LSD2313
Illustration D
5-106 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interfer-
ence from another radar source, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
I-FCW system is automatically turned off.
The I-FCW system warning light (orange)
will illuminate.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the I-FCW system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When there is inclement weather (rain, fog,
snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor,
the I-FCW system will automatically be
canceled. The chime will sound and the
“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
warning message will appear in the vehicle
information display.
LSD2526
Starting and driving 5-107
Action to take:
When the conditions listed above are no
longer present, the warning message will
no longer be available in the vehicle infor-
mation display. If the “Forward Driving Aids
Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked
See Owner’s Manual” warning message
continues to be displayed, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
Condition C
When the radar sensor of the front bumper
is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is
obstructed, the I-FCW system will auto-
matically be canceled, the chime will sound
and the “Forward Driving Aids Temporarily
Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Own-
er’s Manual” warning message will appear
in the vehicle information display.
Action to take:
If the warning message appears, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever
in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine
off. When the radar signal is temporarily
interrupted, clean the sensor area of the
front bumper and restart the engine. If the
“Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
warning message continues to be dis-
played, have the system checked. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
Condition D
When driving on roads with limited road
structures or buildings (for example, long
bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to
long walls), the system may illuminate the
system warning light and display the “For-
ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled
Front Sensor Blocked See Owner’s Manual”
message.
Action to take:
When the above driving conditions no lon-
ger exist, turn the system back on.
NOTE:
If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys-
tem stops working, the I-FCW system will
also stop working.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will
sound, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection
warning light (orange) will illuminate and
the warning message [Malfunction] will ap-
pear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine
off and restart the engine. If the warning light
continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW sys-
tem checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LSD3916
5-108 Starting and driving
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor
O
A
is located on the front of the
vehicle.
To keep the system operating properly, be
sure to observe the following:
• Always keep the sensor area of the front
bumper/emblem clean.
• Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor.
• Do not cover or attach stickers or similar
objects on the front bumper near the
sensor area. This could cause failure or
malfunction.
• Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could
cause failure or malfunction.
• Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restoring
the front bumper, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Radio Frequency Statement
For USA
FCC ID OAYARS4B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class A digi-
tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful in-
terference when the equipment is oper-
ated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radi-
ate radio frequency energy and, if not in-
stalled and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful in-
terference to radio communications. Op-
eration of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference
in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own
expense.
Radio frequency radiation exposure
information:
This equipment complies with FCC radia-
tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other an-
tenna or transmitter.
LSD3435
Starting and driving 5-109
For Canada
Model: ARS4-B
IC: 4135A-ARS4B
FCC ID: OAYARS4B
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Radio frequency radiation exposure
information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and
operated with minimum distance of 30 cm
between the radiator and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other an-
tenna or transmitter.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements IC établies
pour un environnement non contrôlé.
Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé
avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance
entre la source de rayonnement et votre
corps.
FCC Notice
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the I-DA
system could result in serious injury or
death.
• The I–DA system is only a warning to
inform the driver of a potential lack
of driver attention or drowsiness. It
will not steer the vehicle or prevent
loss of control.
• The I–DA system does not detect and
provide an alert of the driver’s lack
of attention or fatigue in every
situation.
• It is the driver’s responsibility to:
• Stay alert.
• Drive safely.
• Keep the vehicle in the traveling
lane.
• Be in control of the vehicle at all
times.
• Avoid driving when tired.
• Avoid distractions (texting, etc.).
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS
(I-DA)
5-110 Starting and driving
The I–DA system helps alert the driver if the
system detects a lack of attention or driv-
ing fatigue.
The system monitors driving style and
steering behavior over a period of time,
and it detects changes from the normal
pattern. If the system detects that driver
attention is decreasing over a period of
time, the system uses audible and visual
warnings to suggest that the driver take a
break.
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS
SYSTEM OPERATION
If the system detects driver fatigue or that
driver attention is decreasing, the mes-
sage “Take a break?” appears in the vehicle
information display and a chime sounds
when the vehicle is driven at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h).
The system continuously monitors driver
attention and can provide multiple warn-
ings per trip.
The system resets and starts reassessing
driving style and steering behavior when
the ignition switch is cycled from the ON to
the OFF position and back to the ON
position.
LSD2974
Starting and driving 5-111
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS
(I-DA) SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the I–DA system.
1. Press the
button until “Settings” dis-
plays in the vehicle information display
and press the OK button. Use the
button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then
press the OK button.
2. Select “Driver Attention Alert” and press
the OK button to turn the system on or
off.
NOTE:
The setting will be retained even if the
engine is restarted.
LSD3432
5-112 Starting and driving
INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS
(I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the I–DA system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
• The I-DA system may not operate
properly and may not provide an
alert in the following conditions:
– Poor road conditions such as an
uneven road surface or pot holes.
– Strong side wind.
–
If you have adopted a sporty driving
style with higher cornering speeds
or higher rates of acceleration.
–
Frequent lane changes or changes
to vehicle speed.
• The I–DA system will not provide an
alert in the following conditions:
– Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph
(60 km/h).
– Short lapses of attention.
– Instantaneous distractions such
as dropping an object.
System malfunction
If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system
malfunctions, the system warning mes-
sage will appear in the vehicle information
display and the function will be stopped
automatically.
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine
off and restart the engine. If the system
warning message continues to appear,
have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
LIC3125
Starting and driving 5-113
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to ob-
tain maximum engine performance
and ensure the future reliability and
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may
result in shortened engine life and re-
duced engine performance.
• Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run
the engine over 4,000 rpm.
• Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
• Avoid quick starts.
• Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
• Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or
other parts could be damaged.
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most
fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
• Avoid rapid starts and stops.
• Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
• Maintain constant speed while com-
muting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
• Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops.
• Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your num-
ber of stops.
• Maintaining a steady speed can mini-
mize red light stops and improve fuel
efficiency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
• Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.
• Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag.
•
Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling
load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and
Distances
• Observing the speed limit and not ex-
ceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where le-
gally allowed) can improve fuel effi-
ciency due to reduced aerodynamic
drag.
• Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces unnec-
essary braking.
• Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced
braking and smooth acceleration
changes.
• Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.
5. Use Cruise Control
• Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady speed.
• Cruise control is particularly effective
in providing fuel savings when driving
on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
• Utilize a map or navigation system to
determine the best route to save time.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
5-114 Starting and driving
7. Avoid Idling
• Shutting off your engine when safe for
stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves
fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
• Automated passes permit drivers to
use special lanes to maintain cruising
speed through the toll and avoid stop-
ping and starting.
9. Winter Warm Up
• Limit idling time to minimize impact to
fuel economy.
• Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to ef-
fectively circulate the engine oil before
driving.
• Your vehicle will reach its ideal operat-
ing temperature more quickly while
driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
• Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever
possible.
• When entering a hot vehicle, opening
the windows will help to reduce the
inside temperature faster, resulting in
reduced demand on your A/C system.
• Keep your engine tuned up.
• Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.
• Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire
wear and lowers fuel economy.
• Keep all the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine
oil. For additional information, see “Engine
oil and oil filter recommendations”
(P. 10-7).
If any malfunction occurs in the AWD sys-
tem while the engine is running, messages
are displayed in the meter.
If the AWD error warning message is dis-
played, there may be a malfunction in the
AWD system. Reduce vehicle speed and
have your vehicle checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as
soon as possible.
LSD2528
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so
equipped)
Starting and driving 5-115
The AWD high temperature message may
be displayed while trying to free a stuck
vehicle due to increased oil temperature.
The driving mode may change to 2-Wheel
Drive (2WD). If this message is displayed,
stop the vehicle with the engine idling, as
soon as it is safe to do so. Then if the mes-
sage turns off, you can continue driving.
The tire size message may be displayed if
there is a large difference between the di-
ameters of front and rear wheels. Pull off
the road in a safe area, with the engine
idling. Check that all tire sizes are the same,
that the tire pressure is correct and that
the tires are not excessively worn.
If any warning messages continue to be
displayed, have your vehicle checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
• Do not drive beyond the perfor-
mance capability of the tires.Acceler-
ating quickly, sharp steering maneu-
vers or sudden braking may cause
loss of control, even with AWD
engaged.
• For AWD equipped vehicles, do not
attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with the
engine running. Doing so may result
in drivetrain damage or unexpected
vehicle movement which could result
in serious personal injury or vehicle
damage.
LSD2529 LSD2530
5-116 Starting and driving
• Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-
mometer (such as the dynamom-
eters used by some states for emis-
sions testing) or similar equipment
even if the other two wheels are
raised off the ground. Make sure that
you inform the test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with
AWD before it is placed on a dyna-
mometer. Using the wrong test
equipment may result in drivetrain
damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in seri-
ous personal injury or vehicle
damage.
CAUTION
• Do not operate the engine on a free
roller when any of the wheels are
raised.
• If you use the free roller, rotate four
wheels with the same speed without
raising any wheels.
• If an AWD warning message is dis-
played while driving there may be a
malfunction in the AWD system. Re-
duce the vehicle speed immediately
and have your vehicle checked. It is
recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
• The powertrain may be damaged if
you continue driving when the AWD
temperature or tire size incorrect
messages are displayed
• If the AWD high temperature mes-
sage is displayed while you are driv-
ing, pull off the road in a safe area,
and idle the engine. The driving
mode will change to 2WD to prevent
the AWD system from malfunction-
ing. If the warning message turns off,
you can drive again.
• If the tire size incorrect message is
displayed while you are driving, pull
off the road in a safe area with the
engine idling. Check that all tire sizes
are the same, that the tire pressure is
correct and that the tires are not ex-
cessively worn.
• If a warning message continues to be
displayed after the above opera-
tions, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Starting and driving 5-117
WARNING
• Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.
• Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park).
Failure to do so could cause the ve-
hicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in an accident. Make
sure the shift lever has been pushed
as far forward as it can go and cannot
be moved without depressing the
foot brake pedal.
• Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
• Do not leave children unattended in-
side the vehicle. They could unknow-
ingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in
serious accidents.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require
the assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
WSD0050
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
5-118 Starting and driving
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into traffic when parked on an incline, it
is a good practice to turn the wheels as
illustrated.
• HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB
O
A
:
Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
• HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB
O
B
:
Turn the wheels away from the curb
and move the vehicle back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
• HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB
O
C
:
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away
from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
WARNING
• If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
• When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine run-
ning, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle, but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
The power steering system is designed to
provide power assist while driving to oper-
ate the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated re-
peatedly or continuously while parking or
driving at a very low speed, the power as-
sist for the steering wheel will be reduced.
This is to prevent overheating of the power
steering system and protect it from getting
damaged. While the power assist is re-
duced, steering wheel operation will be-
come heavy. When the temperature of the
power steering system goes down, the
power assist level will return to normal.
Avoid repeating such steering wheel op-
erations that could cause the power steer-
ing system to overheat.
You may hear a sound when the steering
wheel is operated quickly. However, this is
not a malfunction.
If the power steering warning light illumi-
nates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering system is not
functioning properly and may need servic-
ing. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illu-
minates with the engine running, there will
be no power assist for the steering, but you
will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, see “Power
steering warning light” (P. 2-14).
POWER STEERING
Starting and driving 5-119
The brake system has two separate hy-
draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
you will still have braking at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
can stop the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-
sure on the brake pedal will be required to
stop the vehicle and stopping distance will
be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce
gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent
the brakes from overheating, reduce speed
and downshift to a lower gear before going
down a slope or long grade. Overheated
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
• While driving on a slippery surface,
be careful when braking, accelerat-
ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking
or accelerating could cause the
wheels to skid and result in an
accident.
• If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
Braking will be harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet. As
a result, your braking distance will be lon-
ger and the vehicle may pull to one side
during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving
the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,
in order to assure the best braking
performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
• The ABS is a sophisticated device, but
it cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain ve-
hicle control during braking on slip-
pery surfaces. Remember that stop-
ping distances on slippery surfaces
will be longer than on normal sur-
faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
tances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if
you are using tire chains. Always
maintain a safe distance from the ve-
hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the
driver is responsible for safety.
BRAKE SYSTEM
5-120 Starting and driving
• Tire type and condition may also af-
fect braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
–
When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and
type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For ad-
ditional information, see “Tire and
Loading Information label” (P. 8-29).
– For additional information, see
“Wheels and tires” (P. 8-27).
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels
do not lock during hard braking or when
braking on slippery surfaces. The system
detects the rotation speed at each wheel
and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
vent each wheel from locking and sliding.
By preventing each wheel from locking, the
system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving
and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to
prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-
cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,
hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start
the engine and move the vehicle at a low
speed in forward or reverse. When the self-
test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the computer senses a mal-
function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-
nates the ABS warning light on the instru-
ment panel. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock
assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the ve-
hicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-
ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-10
km/h). The speed varies according to road
conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-
sure. This action is similar to pumping the
brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-
tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise
from under the hood or feel a vibration
from the actuator when it is operating. This
is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-
erating properly. However, the pulsation
may indicate that road conditions are haz-
ardous and extra care is required while
driving.
Starting and driving 5-121
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is
activated generating greater braking force
than a conventional brake booster even
with light pedal force.
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the ve-
hicle at all times.
The VDC system uses various sensors to
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.
Under certain driving conditions, the VDC
system helps to perform the following
functions:
• Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power
is transferred to a non-slipping drive
wheel on the same axle.
• Controls brake pressure and engine out-
put to reduce drive wheel slip based on
vehicle speed (traction control function).
• Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
the following conditions:
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased
steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle, but it can-
not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-
ing situations.
When the VDC system operates, the
indicator light in the instrument panel
flashes so note the following:
• The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required
to help keep the vehicle on the steered
path.
• You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indi-
cates that the VDC system is working
properly.
• Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
For additional information, see “Slip indica-
tor light” (P. 2-15) and “Vehicle Dynamic Con-
trol (VDC) OFF indicator light” (P. 2-15).
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
and indicator lights come on in
the instrument panel. The VDC system au-
tomatically turns off when these indicator
lights are on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
VDC system. The
indicator light, RAB
warning light, and the AEB with Pedestrian
Detection system warning light will illumi-
nate to indicate the VDC, RAB and AEB with
Pedestrian Detection systems are off.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
5-122 Starting and driving
When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off
the system, the VDC system still operates
to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
transferring power to a non-slipping drive
wheel. The
indicator light flashes if this
occurs. All other VDC functions are off and
the
indicator light will not flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to
on when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-
ture that tests the system each time you
start the engine and move the vehicle for-
ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When
the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-
tion of a malfunction.
WARNING
• The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed
and be especially careful when driv-
ing and cornering on slippery sur-
faces and always drive carefully.
• Do not modify the vehicle's suspen-
sion. If suspension par ts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-
bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deterio-
rated, the VDC system may not oper-
ate properly. This could adversely af-
fect vehicle handling performance,
and the
indicator light may flash
or both the
and indicator
lights may illuminate.
• If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-
tem may not operate properly and
both the
and the indicator
lights may illuminate.
• If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, both the
and indicator lights may
illuminate.
• When driving on extremely inclined
sur faces such as higher banked cor-
ners, the VDC system may not oper-
ate properly and the
indicator
light may flash or both the
and
indicator lights may illuminate.
Do not drive on these types of roads.
• When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator light may
flash or both the
and indi-
cator lights may illuminate. This is
not a malfunction. Restart the engine
after driving onto a stable surface.
• If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are
used, the VDC system may not oper-
ate properly and the
indicator
light may flash or both the
and
indicator lights may illuminate.
• The VDC system is not a substitute
for winter tires or tire chains on a
snow covered road.
Starting and driving 5-123
RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP
The system gradually adjusts braking
power during normal braking to help pro-
vide an enhanced brake feel.
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of
force to each of the four wheels depending
on the radius of the turn.
WARNING
• The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed
and be especially careful when driv-
ing and cornering on slippery sur-
faces and always drive carefully.
• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
sion. If suspension par ts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-
bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deterio-
rated, the VDC system may not oper-
ate properly. This could adversely af-
fect vehicle handling performance,
and the
indicator light may flash
or both the
and indicator
lights may illuminate.
• If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the VDC sys-
tem may not operate properly and
both the
and the indicator
lights may illuminate.
• If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, both the
and indicator lights may
illuminate.
• When driving on extremely inclined
sur faces such as higher banked cor-
ners, the VDC system may not oper-
ate properly and the
indicator
light may flash or both the
and
indicator lights may illuminate.
Do not drive on these types of roads.
• When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator light may
flash or both the
and indi-
cator lights may illuminate. This is
not a malfunction. Restart the engine
after driving onto a stable surface.
• If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are
used, the VDC system may not oper-
ate properly and the
indicator
light may flash or both the
and
indicator lights may illuminate.
• The VDC system is not a substitute
for winter tires or tire chains on a
snow covered road.
5-124 Starting and driving
WARNING
• Never rely solely on the hill start as-
sist system to prevent the vehicle
from moving backward on a hill. Al-
ways drive carefully and attentively.
Depress the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be
especially careful when stopped on a
hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure
to prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards may result in a loss of
control of the vehicle and possible
serious injury or death.
• The hill start assist system is not de-
signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-
still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal
when the vehicle is stopped on a
steep hill. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to roll backwards and
may result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
• The hill start assist may not prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards
on a hill under all load or road condi-
tions. Always be prepared to depress
the brake pedal to prevent the ve-
hicle from rolling backwards. Failure
to do so may result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill
start assist system automatically keeps
the brakes applied. This helps prevent the
vehicle from rolling backward in the time it
takes the driver to release the brake pedal
and apply the accelerator.
Hill start assist will operate automatically
under the following conditions:
• The shift lever is moved to a forward or
reverse gear.
• The vehicle is stopped completely on a
hill by applying the brake.
• The hill grade is above 10%.
The maximum holding time is two sec-
onds. After two seconds the vehicle will be-
gin to roll back and hill start assist will stop
operating completely.
Hill start assist will not operate when the
shift lever is moved to N (Neutral) or P (Park)
or on a flat and level road.
The sonar (parking sensor) system sounds
a tone to inform the driver of obstacles
near the bumper.
When the “DISPLAY” key is ON, the sonar
view will automatically appear in the center
display.
LSD2427
HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
Starting and driving 5-125
WARNING
• The sonar (parking sensor) system is
a convenience but it is not a substi-
tute for proper parking.
• The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other ma-
neuvers. Always look around and
check that it is safe to do so before
parking.
• Read and understand the limitations
of the sonar (parking sensor) system
as contained in this section. The col-
ors of the corner sonar indicator and
the distance guide lines in the front/
rear view indicate different distances
to the object.
• Inclement weather or ultrasonic
sources such as an automatic car
wash, a truck's compressed-air
brakes or a pneumatic drill may af-
fect the function of the system; this
may include reduced performance or
a false activation.
• This function is designed as an aid to
the driver in detecting large station-
ary objects to help avoid damaging
the vehicle.
• The system is not designed to pre-
vent contact with small or moving
objects. Always move slowly. The
system will not detect small objects
below the bumper, and may not de-
tect objects close to the bumper or
on the ground.
• The system may not detect the fol-
lowing objects: fluffy objects such as
snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.,
and thin objects such as rope, wire
and chain, etc., or wedge-shaped
objects.
• The sonar sensors may cause mal-
function when a horn, etc. sounds or
there is an ultrasonic source (such as
parking sensors of other vehicles)
around the vehicle because the so-
nar sensors detect the distance be-
tween the vehicle and the obstacle
by detecting the sound wave re-
flected from the surface of an
obstacle.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of ob-
stacles or false alarms.
CAUTION
• Excessive noise (such as audio sys-
tem volume or an open vehicle win-
dow) will interfere with the tone and
it may not be heard.
• Keep the sonar sensors (located on
the bumper fascia) free from snow,
ice and large accumulations of dirt.
Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects. If the sensors are covered,
the accuracy of the sonar function
will be diminished.
5-126 Starting and driving
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM
The system is automatically activated
when the ignition is in the ON position and
the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the sonar system:
1. Press the
button until “Settings” ap-
pears in the vehicle information display
and then press OK. Use the
button
to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press
the OK button.
2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK
button.
3. Select “Sensor” and press the OK button.
Select “ON,” “OFF,” or “Front Only” and
press the OK button.
• Select “Range” to change the sonar
distance to “Near,” “Mid,” or “Far.”
• Select “Volume” to change the volume
to “High,” “Medium,” or “Low.”
NOTE:
The system automatically turns on every
time the engine is started, as long as it is
activated using the settings menu on
the vehicle information display.
LSD3439
Starting and driving 5-127
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock
becomes frozen, heat the key before in-
serting it into the key hole, or use the
NISSAN Intelligent Key®.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),
check the antifreeze to assure proper win-
ter protection. For additional information,
see “Engine cooling system” (P. 8-4).
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the
battery fluid may freeze and damage the
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
the battery should be checked regularly.
For additional information, see “Battery”
(P. 8-13).
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
antifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ-
ing the engine block. Refill before operating
the vehicle. For additional information, see
“Changing engine coolant” (P. 8-5).
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance of
these tires will be substantially reduced
in snowy and icy conditions. If you oper-
ate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads,
NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &
SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four
wheels. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size,
speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some U.S. states and Canadian prov-
inces prohibit their use. Check local,
state and provincial laws before install-
ing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry sur faces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For additional
information, see “Tire chains” (P. 8-34).
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items
be carried in the vehicle during winter:
• A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-
move ice and snow from the windows
and wiper blades.
• A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
• A shovel to dig the vehicle out of
snowdrifts.
• Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
• Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” un-
der these conditions. Try to avoid
driving on wet ice until the road is
salted or sanded.
• Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or down-
shifting too fast, the drive wheels will
lose even more traction.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
5-128 Starting and driving
• Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry
pavement.
• Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
• Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
of ice is seen ahead, brake before
reaching it. Try not to brake while on
the ice, and avoid any sudden steer-
ing maneuvers.
• Do not use the cruise control on slip-
pery roads.
• Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
Starting and driving 5-129
MEMO
5-130 Starting and driving
6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch ..................6-2
Emergency engine shut off ......................6-2
Flat tire ..........................................6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) .......................................6-3
Changing a flat tire ...........................6-3
Jump starting ..................................6-10
Push starting ...................................6-12
If your vehicle overheats........................6-12
Towing your vehicle ............................6-13
Towing recommended by NISSAN ...........6-13
Vehicle recovery
(freeing a stuck vehicle) .....................6-15
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emer-
gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
• If stopping for an emergency, be sure
to move the vehicle well off the road.
• Do not use the hazard warning flash-
ers while moving on the highway un-
less unusual circumstances force
you to drive so slowly that your ve-
hicle might become a hazard to other
traffic.
• Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition
switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use
of the hazard warning flasher switch
while driving.
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the follow-
ing procedure:
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.
LIC0394
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
6-2 In case of emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors
tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
When the low tire pressure warning light is lit,
and the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning
appears in the vehicle information display,
one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. If equipped, the system also
displays pressure of all tires (except the
spare tire) on the display screen by sending a
signal from a sensor that is installed in each
wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low
tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn
you of it by the low tire pressure warning
light. This system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25
km/h). For additional information, see
“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders” (P. 2-8) and “Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS)” (P. 5-5).
WARNING
• Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
• If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and
increase the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and
could result in serious personal in-
jury. Check the tire pressure for all
four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pres-
sure shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low tire
pressure warning light OFF. If the
light still illuminates while driving af-
ter adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may be flat or the TPMS may be mal-
functioning. If you have a flat tire, re-
place it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. If no tire is flat and all tires
are properly inflated, have the ve-
hicle checked. it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
• When using a wheel without TPMS
such as the spare tire, the TPMS will
not function and the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash for ap-
proximately one minute. The light
will remain on after one minute. Have
your tires replaced and/or TPMS sys-
tem reset as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for these services.
• Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could af-
fect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
• Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pres-
sure sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
FLAT TIRE
In case of emergency 6-3
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Move the shift lever to P
(Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and
to signal professional road assistance
personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-
hicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
• Make sure the parking brake is se-
curely applied and the shift lever is
shifted into P (Park).
• Never change tires when the vehicle
is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.
This is hazardous.
• Never change tires if oncoming traf-
fic is close to your vehicle. Wait for
professional road assistance.
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving
when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the ve-
hicle may move and result in personal
injury.
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the rear liftgate.
2. Pull up on the handle to lift the carpeted
floorboard and attach the hook as
shown.
LCE2142
A. Blocks
B. Flat tire
LCE2397
6-4 In case of emergency
3. Open the storage compartment
O
A
by
pulling on the strap to locate the jack
and tools
O
B
.
4. Remove the jack and tools from the
storage area.
5. To remove the spare tire, loosen the bolt
by turning counterclockwise.
6. Once free, remove the bolt.
7. Remove the spare tire.
8. Once the flat tire is exchanged with the
spare tire, store the flat tire where the
spare tire was located.
9. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten and
place the carpeted floorboard back over
the tire.
Changing the spare tire with
BOSE® subwoofer (if so equipped)
1. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclock-
wise.
2. Once free, remove the bolt.
LCE2386
WCE0188 LCE2109
In case of emergency 6-5
3. Place the sub-woofer in the lower left
corner of the cargo area, leaning against
the driver side wall.
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Once the flat tire is exchanged with the
spare tire, store the flat tire where the
spare was located.
NOTE:
You may need to remove the wheel cap
in order to secure the damaged tire us-
ing the spare tire clamp.
6. Place the sub-woofer inside the flat tire.
7. Turn the bolt clockwise to tighten and
place the carpeted floorboard back over
the tire.
LCE2398
6-6 In case of emergency
Jacking up vehicle and removing
the damaged tire
WARNING
• Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
• Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle
on other vehicles. The jack is de-
signed for lifting only your vehicle
during a tire change.
• Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for
jack support.
• Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
• Never use blocks on or under the
jack.
• Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause
the vehicle to move. This is especially
true for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
• Do not allow passengers to stay in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
• Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
off the ground. It may cause the ve-
hicle to move.
LCE2184
In case of emergency 6-7
Always refer to the illustrations for the cor-
rect placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following in-
structions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel
nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel
nuts until the tire is off the ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the 2
notches in the front or the rear as
shown. Also fit the groove of the jack
head between the notches as shown.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack
lever and rod with both hands. Carefully
raise the vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
then remove the tire.
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. For additional information, see
“Wheels and tires” (P. 8-27).
1. Clean any mud or dir t from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
sequence illustrated (
O
A
,
O
B
,
O
C
,
O
D
,
O
E
)
until they are tight.
SCE0002 WCE0056
6-8 In case of emergency
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence illustrated
(
O
A
,
O
B
,
O
C
,
O
D
,
O
E
). Lower the vehicle
completely.
WARNING
• Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
• Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the
nuts to become loose.
• Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 621 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened
to specifications at each lubrication
interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD
pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire
and loading information label affixed to
the driver side center pillar.
After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD
tire pressure, the display (if so equipped)
of the tire pressure information may
show higher pressure than the COLD tire
pressure after the vehicle has been
driven more than 1 mi. (1.6 km). This is
because the tire pressure increases as
the tire temperature rises. This does not
indicate a system malfunction.
5. Securely store the flat tire in the tire well
and jacking equipment in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Remove the center wheel cap before
storing the flat tire.
6. Place the spare tire cover and the floor
carpeting over the damaged tire.
7. Close the rear liftgate.
WARNING
• Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can be-
come dangerous projectiles in an ac-
cident or sudden stop.
In case of emergency 6-9
To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below
must be followed.
WARNING
• If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting
in severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
• Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away
from the battery.
• Do not allow batter y fluid to come
into contac t with eyes, skin, clothing
or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a
corrosive sulfuric acid solution which
can cause severe burns. If the fluid
should come into contact with any-
thing, immediately flush the con-
tacted area with water.
• Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
• The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
• Whenever working on or near a bat-
tery, always wear suitable eye pro-
tectors (for example, goggles or in-
dustrial safety spectacles) and
remove rings, metal bands, or any
other jewelry. Do not lean over the
battery when jump starting.
• Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause
serious injury.
• Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
JUMP STARTING
6-10 In case of emergency
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause per-
sonal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another ve-
hicle, position the two vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-
sary electrical systems (lights, heater, air
conditioner, etc.).
3. Connect the jumper cables in the se-
quence illustrated (
O
A
,
O
B
,
O
C
,
O
D
).
CAUTION
• Always connect positive (+) to posi-
tive (+) and negative (−) to body
ground (for example, strut mounting
bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to
the battery.
• Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.
4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
5. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the
engine of the vehicle being jump
started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, place the ig-
nition switch in the OFF position and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
6. After starting the engine, carefully dis-
connect the negative cable and then the
positive cable.
LCE2223
In case of emergency 6-11
CAUTION
•
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be push-started
or tow-started. Attempting to do so
may cause transmission damage.
•
Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
WARNING
• Do not continue to drive if your ve-
hicle overheats. Doing so could cause
engine damage or a vehicle fire.
• To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap while the engine is still
hot. When the radiator or coolant res-
ervoir cap is removed, pressurized
hot water will spurt out, possibly
causing serious injury.
• Do not open the hood if steam is
coming out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by
an extremely high temperature gauge
reading), or if you feel a lack of engine
power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the
following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-
ply the parking brake and move the shift
lever to P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air condi-
tioner temperature control to maximum
hot and fan control to high speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the ra-
diator before opening the hood. If steam
or coolant is escaping, turn off the en-
gine. Do not open the hood further until
no steam or coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan
is running. The radiator hoses and radia-
tor should not leak water. If coolant is
leaking, the water pump belt is missing
or loose, or the cooling fan does not run,
stop the engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into con-
tact with, or get caught in, engine belts
or the engine cooling fan. The engine
cooling fan can start at any time.
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
6-12 In case of emergency
6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the engine coolant res-
ervoir tank with the engine running. Add
coolant to the engine coolant reservoir
tank if necessary. Have your vehicle re-
paired. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional
and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment
could damage your vehicle. Towing in-
structions are available from a NISSAN
dealer. Local service operators are gener-
ally familiar with the applicable laws and
procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage
to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends hav-
ing a ser vice operator tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the service operator
carefully read the following precautions:
WARNING
• Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
• Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
• When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working condi-
tion. If any of these conditions apply,
dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be
used.
• Always attach safety chains before
towing.
For additional information about towing
your vehicle behind a Recreational Vehicle
(RV), see “Flat towing for all-wheel drive ve-
hicle” (P. 10-27).
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle
based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-
tional information, refer to the diagrams in
this section to ensure that your vehicle is
properly towed.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
In case of emergency 6-13
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models with
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies
be used when towing your vehicle or place
the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
Never tow All-Wheel Drive (AWD) mod-
els equipped with a Continuously Vari-
able Transmission (CVT) with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may
cause serious and expensive damage
to the transfer case and transmission.
LCE2220
6-14 In case of emergency
Two-Wheel Drive models with
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed
truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
• Never tow Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with the
front wheels on the ground or four
wheels on the ground (forward or
backward), as this may cause serious
and expensive damage to the trans-
mission. If it is necessary to tow the
vehicle with the rear wheels raised
always use towing dollies under the
front wheels.
• When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with the
rear wheels on the ground or on tow-
ing dollies:
– Place the ignition switch in the
OFF position, and secure the
steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a rope or similar de-
vice. Never secure the steering
wheel by placing the ignition
switch in the LOCK position. This
may damage the steering lock
mechanism (for models with a
steering lock mechanism).
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a
stuck vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-
sonal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
• Contact a professional towing ser-
vice to recover the vehicle if you have
any questions regarding the recov-
ery procedure.
• Tow chains or cables must be at-
tached only to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle.
LCE2221
In case of emergency 6-15
• Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to
tow or free a stuck vehicle.
• Only use devices specifically de-
signed for vehicle recovery and fol-
low the manufacturer's instructions.
• Always pull the recovery device
straight out from the front of the ve-
hicle. Never pull at an angle.
• Route recovery devices so they do
not touch any part of the vehicle ex-
cept the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use a tow strap or other device de-
signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-
ways follow the manufacturer's instruc-
tions for the recovery device.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
• Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
• Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode
and result in serious injur y. Parts of
your vehicle could also overheat and
be damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
( VDC) system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
• Shift back and forth between R (Re-
verse) and D (Drive).
• Apply the accelerator as little as pos-
sible to maintain the rocking motion.
• Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive).
• Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing ser-
vice to remove the vehicle.
6-16 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ................................7-2
Washing .....................................7-2
Waxing .......................................7-3
Removing spots ..............................7-3
Underbody ...................................7-3
Glass .........................................7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels .......................7-3
Chromeparts................................7-3
Tire dressings ................................7-4
Cleaning interior ................................7-4
Air fresheners ................................7-5
Power moonroof (if so equipped) .............7-5
Floor mats (if so equipped) ...................7-5
Seatbelts ....................................7-6
Cleaning the seat tracks ..................... 7-7
Corrosion protection ............................ 7-7
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion ............................. 7-7
Environmental factors influence the
rate of corrosion ............................. 7-7
Protect your vehicle from corrosion .......... 7-7
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
• After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-
age from acid rain.
• After driving on coastal roads.
• When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface.
• When dust or mud builds up on the
surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your ve-
hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in
a shady area or protect the vehicle with a
body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-
face when putting on or removing the
body cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-
ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed
with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
CAUTION
• Do not concentrate water spray di-
rectly on the sonar sensors (if so
equipped) on the bumper as this will
result in damage to the sensors. Do
not use pressure washers capable of
spraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274
kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use of
high-pressure washers over 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage to or
removal of paint or graphics. Avoid
using a high-pressure washer closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle.
Always use a wide-angle nozzle only,
keep the nozzle moving and do not
concentrate the water spray on any
one area.
• Do not use car washes that use acid
in the detergent. Some car washes,
especially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle compo-
nents, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to func-
tion properly. Always check with your
car wash to confirm that acid is not
used.
• Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical de-
tergents, gasoline or solvents.
• Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot,
as the surface may become
water-spotted.
• Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-
fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
Take care that the drain holes in the lower
edge of the door are open. Spray water
under the body and in the wheel wells to
loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the
vehicle to avoid water spots.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
7-2 Appearance and care
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove
built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-
ered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing
the proper product.
• Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied
with the wax.
• Do not use a wax containing any abra-
sives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive pol-
ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-
ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the surface of the paint to avoid last-
ing damage or staining. Special cleaning
products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory store. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it
is necessary to clean the underbody regu-
larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from
building up and causing the acceleration of
corrosion on the underbody and suspen-
sion. Before the winter period and again in
the spring, the underseal must be checked
and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-
mal for glass to become coated with a film
after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.
Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily
remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the win-
dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could dam-
age the electrical conductors, radio an-
tenna elements or rear window de-
froster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-
cially during winter months in areas where
road salt is used. If not removed, road salt
can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
• Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
• Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as
ambient temperature.
• Rinse the wheel to completely re-
move the cleaner within 15 minutes
after the cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
the finish.
Appearance and care 7-3
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-
ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-
plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-
ing and form a compound. This compound
may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
• Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
• Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire tread/
grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
• Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
pletely removed from the tire tread/
grooves.
•
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe
the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-
faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in
mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in
order to maintain the appearance of the
leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer's recommendations. Some
fabric protectors contain chemicals that
may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifi-
cation sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and re-
sult in serious personal injury.
CAUTION
• Never use benzine, thinner or any
similar material.
• Small dirt particles can be abrasive
and damaging to leather surfaces
and should be removed promptly. Do
not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-
ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents or ammonia-based
cleaners as they may damage the
leather's natural finish.
• Never use fabric protectors unless
recommended by the manufacturer.
• Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens cover.
• Never use chloride solutions for
cleaning aluminum decoratives (if so
equipped), damage may occur.
CLEANING INTERIOR
7-4 Appearance and care
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use
an air freshener, take the following
precautions:
• Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they con-
tact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air
freshener in a location that allows it to
hang free and not contact an interior
surface.
• Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause im-
mediate damage and discoloration
when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufactur-
er's instructions before using the air
fresheners.
POWER MOONROOF (if so
equipped)
The sunshade is made from a tricot
material.
CAUTION
To help prevent damaging the moon-
roof while cleaning:
• Do not rub the material with a cloth.
Doing so can damage the surface of
the material or cause a stain to
spread.
• Never use benzine, thinner or any
similar chemical to clean the sun-
shade. This may discolor the moon-
roof and damage the surface.
• Clean water based stains by patting
the surface with a clean soft cloth
dampened in warm water. Press a
clean dry cloth onto the surface to
remove as much dampness as pos-
sible and then let air dry.
• Clean oil based stains by patting the
sur face with a clean soft cloth damp-
ened in warm water. Press a clean dry
cloth onto the surface to remove as
much dampness as possible and
then let air dry.
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury or
death:
• NEVER place a floor mat on top of
another floor mat in the driver front
position or install them upside down
or backwards.
• Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
or equivalent floor mats, that are
specifically designed for use in your
vehicle model and model year.
LAI2096
Appearance and care 7-5
• Properly position the mats in the
floorwell using the floor mat posi-
tioning hook. For additional informa-
tion, see "Floor mat installation"
(P. 7-6).
• Make sure the floor mat does not in-
ter fere with pedal operation.
• Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly
installed.
• After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure
they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular clean-
ing and replaced if they become exces-
sively worn.
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-
sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of
the floor mat positioning hooks for each
seating position varies depending on the
vehicle.
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided
with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition switch in the OFF posi-
tion, the shift lever in P (Park) position
and with the parking brake fully applied,
position the floor mat in the floorwell so
that the floor mat grommet holes are
aligned with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the
hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is
properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-
fere with pedal operation. With the igni-
tion switch still in the OFF position, the
shift lever in the P (Park) position and
with the parking brake applied, fully ap-
ply and release all pedals. The floor mat
must not interfere with pedal operation
or prevent the pedal from returning to
its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.
The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat positioning hooks.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-
pletely in the shade before using them. For
additional information, see “Seat belt main-
tenance” (P. 1-24).
LAI2030
Positioning hooks
7-6 Appearance and care
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may se-
verely weaken the seat belt webbing.
CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS
CAUTION
Periodically clean the seat tracks to
prevent reduction of ability to move the
seats.
Clean periodically with a high-powered
vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may re-
duce the ability to adjust the seat. A wet
cleansing agent may be used if necessary.
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
• The accumulation of moisture-retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
• Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic collisions.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
completely inside the vehicle and should
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those ar-
eas where the temperatures stay above
freezing and where atmospheric pollution
exists and road salt is used.
Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt
use accelerates the corrosion process.
Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-
tion of paint surfaces.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
• Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep
the vehicle clean.
• Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.
• Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumulation.
• Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
water as soon as possible.
CORROSION PROTECTION
Appearance and care 7-7
CAUTION
• NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compart-
ment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner
or broom.
• Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic com-
ponents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be
cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
7-8 Appearance and care
8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions .......................8-2
Engine compartment check locations...........8-3
Engine cooling system ..........................8-4
Checking engine coolant level ................8-5
Changing engine coolant ....................8-5
Engine oil .......................................8-6
Checking engine oil level .....................8-6
Changing engine oil and oil filter ..............8-6
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid ............................................8-10
Power Steering Fluid (PSF) .......................8-11
Brake fluid .......................................8-11
Windshield-washer fluid ........................8-12
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir ...........8-12
Battery.........................................8-13
Jump starting ...............................8-14
Drive belt .......................................8-15
Spark plugs ....................................8-15
Replacing spark plugs .......................8-15
Air cleaner .....................................8-16
In-cabin microfilter ..........................8-17
Windshield wiper blades ........................8-17
Cleaning ....................................8-17
Replacing ...................................8-17
Brakes .........................................8-19
Fuses ..........................................8-19
Engine compartment .......................8-20
Passenger compartment ...................8-21
Battery replacement ...........................8-23
NISSAN Intelligent Key® ......................8-23
Lights ..........................................8-25
Headlights ..................................8-25
Fog lights (if so equipped) ...................8-25
Ex terior and interior lights ...................8-25
Wheels and tires ...............................8-27
Tire pressure ................................8-27
Tire labeling .................................8-30
Types of tires ................................
8-33
Tir
e chains ..................................8-34
Changing wheels and tires ..................8-35
When performing any inspection or main-
tenance work on your vehicle, always take
care to prevent serious accidental injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-
lowing are general precautions which
should be closely observed.
WARNING
• Park the vehicle on a level surface,
apply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the ve-
hicle from moving. Move the shift le-
ver to P (Park).
• Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when perform-
ing any parts replacement or repairs.
• If you must work with the engine run-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans,
belts and any other moving parts.
• It is advisable to secure or remove
any loose clothing and remove any
jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.
before working on your vehicle.
• Always wear eye protection when-
ever you work on your vehicle.
• Your vehicle is equipped with an au-
tomatic engine cooling fan. It may
come on at any time without
warning, even if the ignition switch is
in the OFF position and the engine is
not running. To avoid injury, always
disconnect the negative battery
cable before working near the fan.
• If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be
sure there is proper ventilation for
exhaust gases to escape.
• Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
• Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
• Because the fuel lines on gasoline
engine models are under high pres-
sure even when the engine is off, it is
recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel
filter or fuel lines.
CAUTION
• Do not work under the hood while
the engine is hot. Turn the engine off
and wait until it cools down.
• Avoid contact with used engine oil
and coolant. Improperly disposed
engine oil, engine coolant and/or
other vehicle fluids can damage the
environment. Always conform to lo-
cal regulations for disposal of vehicle
fluid.
• Never leave the engine or Continu-
ously Variable Transmission (CVT) re-
lated component harnesses discon-
nected while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
• Never connect or disconnect the bat-
tery or any transistorized compo-
nent while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-
tions regarding only those items which are
relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also
available. For additional information, see
“Owner's Manual/Service Manual order in-
formation” (P. 10-32).
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and
could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, it is recommended
that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
8-2 Do-it-yourself
3.5L 6 cylinder (VQ35DE engine model)
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Drive belt location
3. Engine oil dipstick
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Air cleaner
7. Fuse box
8. Fuse/Fusible link box
9. Battery
10 Radiator cap
11. Power steering fluid reservoir
12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with
an engine cover.
LDI3345
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
Do-it-yourself 8-3
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide
year-round antifreeze and coolant protec-
tion. The antifreeze solution contains rust
and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine
cooling system additives are not
necessary.
WARNING
• Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator
cool down. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escap-
ing from the radiator. For additional
information, see “If your vehicle over-
heats” (P. 6-12).
• The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
gine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
• Never use any cooling system addi-
tives such as radiator sealer. Addi-
tives may clog the cooling system
and cause damage to the engine,
transmission and/or cooling system.
• When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-
diluted to provide antifreeze protec-
tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional
freeze protection is needed due to
weather where you operate your ve-
hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-
trate following the directions on the
container. If an equivalent coolant
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-
low the coolant manufacturer’s in-
structions to maintain minimum an-
tifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C).
The use of other types of coolant so-
lutions other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent may damage the en-
gine cooling system.
• The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
(or equivalent coolant), including
Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the
use of non-distilled water may re-
duce the life expectancy of the
factory-fill coolant. For additional in-
formation, see the "Maintenance and
schedules" section of this manual.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
8-4 Do-it-yourself
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below the MIN level
O
B
, add coolant
to the MAX level
O
A
. If the reservoir is empty,
check the coolant level in the radiator
when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-
cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX
level
O
A
.
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-
pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing
any other type of coolant or the use of
non-distilled water will reduce the life ex-
pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-
ditional information, see "Maintenance and
schedules" section of this manual.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
For additional information on the location
of the engine coolant reservoir, see “Engine
compartment check locations” (P. 8-3).
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be
found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine
overheating.
WARNING
• To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the
engine is hot.
• Never remove the radiator or engine
coolant reservoir cap when the en-
gine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escap-
ing from the radiator.
• Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
• Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-
erly. Check your local regulations.
LDI2900
Do-it-yourself 8-5
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check
the oil level. It should be between the H
(High) and L (Low) marks
O
B
. This is the
normal operating oil level range. If the oil
level is below the L (Low) mark
O
A
,re-
move the oil filler cap and pour recom-
mended oil through the opening. Do not
overfill
O
C
.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the sever-
ity of operating conditions.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the en-
gine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL
FILTER
For additional information on engine oil
and oil filter change, refer to the instruc-
tions outlined in this section.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating
temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15
minutes.
4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
suitable floor jack and safety jack
stands.
• Place the safety jack stands under the
vehicle jack-up points.
• A suitable adapter should be attached to
the jack stand saddle.
LDI2556 WDI0214
ENGINE OIL
8-6 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Make sure the correct lifting and sup-
port points are used to avoid vehicle
damage.
LDI3348
O
1
Oil filler cap
LDI3349
O
2
Oil drain plug
Do-it-yourself 8-7
LDI3350
O
3
Oil filter
LDI3386
O
4
Under engine protector
LDI3388
O
5
Right engine protector
8-8 Do-it-yourself
Removal of engine protectors
1. Remove clips
O
A
and under engine
protector.
2. Remove clips
O
B
and right engine
protector.
Engine oil and filter
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain
plug and oil filter.
2. Remove the oil filler cap.
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by
turning it counterclockwise and com-
pletely drain the oil.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the
engine oil is hot.
WARNING
• Prolonged and repeated contact
with used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
• Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
• Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench by turning it counterclockwise.
Remove the oil filter by turning it by
hand.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur-
face with a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket ma-
terial remaining on the sealing surface
of the engine. Failure to do so could
lead to an oil leak and engine damage.
• The dipstick must be inserted in
place to prevent oil spillage from the
dipstick hole when filling the engine
with oil.
LDI3352
Under-engine protector
LDI3387
Right engine protector
Do-it-yourself 8-9
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil.
7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a
slight resistance is felt, then tighten addi-
tionally more than 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 N·m)
8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain
plug with a wrench. Do not use exces-
sive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 N·m)
9. Refill the engine with the recommended
oil through the oil filler opening, and in-
stall the oil filler cap securely.
For additional information about drain and
refill capacity, see “Recommended fluids/
lubricants and capacities” (P. 10-2). The
drain and refill capacity depends on the oil
temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always
use the dipstick to determine the proper
amount of oil in the engine.
10. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the drain plug and the oil filter.
Correct as required. Turn the engine off
and wait more than 15 minutes. Check
the oil level with the dipstick. Add en-
gine oil if necessary.
After the operation
1. Reinstall engine protectors in reverse or-
der of removal.
2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the
ground.
3. Reset oil and oil filter maintenance re-
minder. For additional information, see
“Vehicle information display” (P. 2-17).
• Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
• Check your local regulations.
CAUTION
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equiva-
lent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix
with other fluids.
• Do not use Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission
fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam-
age the CVT. Damage caused by the
use of fluids other than as recom-
mended is not covered under
NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty outlined in your Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
• Using fluids that are not equivalent
to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
may also damage the CVT. Damage
caused by the use of fluids other than
as recommended is not covered un-
der NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited
Warranty outlined in your Warranty
Information Booklet.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid
is required, we recommend a NISSAN
dealer for servicing.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
8-10 Do-it-yourself
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
The fluid level should be checked when the
fluid is cold at fluid temperatures of 32 to
86ºF (0 to 30ºC). The fluid level can be
checked with the level gauge which is at-
tached to the cap. To check the fluid level,
remove the cap. The fluid level should be
between the MAX
O
A
and MIN
O
B
lines.
If the fluid is below the MIN
O
B
line, add
Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent. Re-
move the cap and fill through the opening.
WARNING
Power steering fluid is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked
containers out of the reach of children.
CAUTION
• DO NOT OVERFILL.
• Use of a power steering fluid other
than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or
equivalent will prevent the power
steering system from operating
properly.
WARNING
• Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can dam-
age the brake system and affect the
vehicle's stopping ability.
• Clean the filler cap before removing.
• Brake fluid is poisonous and should
be stored carefully in marked con-
tainers out of reach of children.
LDI2767 LDI2769
POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF) BRAKE FLUID
Do-it-yourself 8-11
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces.This will damage the paint. If fluid
is spilled, immediately wash the sur-
face with water.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
brake fluid is below the MIN line
O
B
, the
brake warning light will illuminate. Add
brake fluid up to the MAX line
O
A
. For addi-
tional information on brake fluid type, see
“Recommended fluids/lubricants and ca-
pacities” (P. 10-2).
If the brake fluid must be added frequently,
the brake system should be thoroughly
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir
periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid
when the “Low Washer Fluid” warning mes-
sage shows on the vehicle information
display.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,
lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir
opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a
windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions for the mix-
ture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Anti-freeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
• Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the
paint.
• Do not fill the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir with washer fluid con-
centrates at full strength. Some
methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
the grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
•
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer's rec-
ommended levels before pouring the
fluid into the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir. Do not use the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir to mix the
washer fluid concentrate and water.
LDI2573
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
8-12 Do-it-yourself
Caution symbols for battery WARNING
O
1
No smoking, No exposed flames, No
Sparks
Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the
battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
O
2
Shield eyes
Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or
battery acid.
O
3
Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
O
4
Battery acid
Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-
tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.
O
5
Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.
O
6
Explosive gas Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
BATTERY
Do-it-yourself 8-13
• If the battery is labeled “do not open” it is
maintenance free and battery fluid
should not be checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or
a qualified specialist workshop to con-
firm the battery’s performance.
• Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of bak-
ing soda and water.
• Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
• If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days
or longer, disconnect the negative (-) bat-
tery terminal cable to prevent discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
WARNING
• Do not expose the battery to flames,
an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-
drogen gas generated by the battery
is explosive. Explosive gases can
cause blindness or injury. Do not al-
low batter y fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-
furic acid can cause blindness or in-
jury. After touching a battery or bat-
tery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If
the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
clothing, immediately flush with wa-
ter for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
• When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.
• Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
• Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
• Do not tip the battery.
NOTE:
Do not try to open the top of the battery.
This battery is not equipped with remov-
able vent caps.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump
starting” (P. 6-10). If the engine does not
start by jump starting, the battery may
have to be replaced. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
LDI3302
8-14 Do-it-yourself
1. Crankshaft pulley
2. Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley
3. Generator pulley
4. Air conditioner compressor pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF or LOCK position before servic-
ing drive belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-
usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If
the belt is in poor condition or is loose,
have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for con-
dition and tension in accordance with
the maintenance schedule found in the
"Maintenance and schedules" section of
this manual.
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridium-
tipped
O
A
spark plugs as frequently as con-
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the “Maintenance and sched-
ules” section of this manual. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
• Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
LDI2131
3.5L 6 cylinder (VQ35DE engine model)
SDI1895
DRIVE BELT SPARK PLUGS
Do-it-yourself 8-15
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned
and reused. Replace it according to the
maintenance log shown in the "Mainte-
nance and schedules" section of this
manual.
To remove the air cleaner filter:
1. Unlatch the retaining clips
O
A
.
2. Move the air cleaner cover upwards.
3. Remove the air cleaner filter. Wipe the
inside of the air cleaner filter housing
and the cover with a damp cloth, then
replace air cleaner filter.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner filter,
make sure the air cleaner cover is seated
in the housing and latch the clips.
WARNING
• Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops the
flame if the engine backfires. If it isn't
there, and the engine backfires, you
could be burned. Do not drive with
the air cleaner removed, and be care-
ful when working on the engine with
the air cleaner removed.
• Never pour fuel into the throttle body
or attempt to start the engine with
the air cleaner removed. Doing so
could result in serious injury.
LDI2553
AIR CLEANER
8-16 Do-it-yourself
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry
of airborne dust and pollen particles and
reduces some objectionable outside
odors. The filter is located behind the glove
box. For additional information, see the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual for change intervals.
If replacement is required, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other mate-
rial may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form
when rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild de-
tergent. Then rinse the blades with clear
water. If your windshield is still not clear
after cleaning the blades and using the
wiper, replace the blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol-
low the procedure below:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the
windshield.
2. Lift the release tab
O
A
.
3. Move the wiper blade
O
B
down and
remove.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm.
5. Push the release tab down until it clicks.
LDI2584
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Do-it-yourself 8-17
6. Push wiper on to windshield.
CAUTION
• After wiper blade replacement, re-
turn the wiper arm to its original po-
sition; otherwise it may be damaged
when the hood is opened.
• Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arms may be
damaged from wind pressure.
If you wax the surface of the hood, be care-
ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
O
D
. This may cause clogging or improper
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets
into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
small pin
O
C
.
Rear window wiper blade
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer if checking or replacement is
required.
LDI2731
8-18 Do-it-yourself
If the brakes do not operate properly, have
the brakes checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-
adjust every time the brake pedal is
applied.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, a high pitched
scraping or screeching sound will be heard
when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will
be heard whether or not the brake pedal is
depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is nor-
mal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information re-
garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-
propriate maintenance schedule informa-
tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, check for an open fuse.
Fuses are used in the passenger and en-
gine compartment. Spare fuses are pro-
vided and can be found in the passenger
compartment fuse box.
When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is
installed in the fuse box securely.
LDI2385
BRAKES FUSES
Do-it-yourself 8-19
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-
perage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or electronic con-
trol units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come
on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head-
light switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing
the tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
The fuse puller is located in the center of
the fuse block in the passenger
compartment.
5. If the fuse is open
O
A
, replace it with a
new fuse
O
B
.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-
trical system checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
LDI2636 LDI0456
8-20 Do-it-yourself
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate and the fuses are in good condition,
check the fusible links in the holder. If any of
the fusible links are melted, replace only
with Genuine NISSAN parts.
For checking and replacing the fusible links,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
WARNING
Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-
perage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or electronic con-
trol units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the driver's
side of the instrument panel.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head-
light switch are OFF.
2. Pull down on fuse box cover
O
A
to
remove.
3. Locate the fuse that needs to be
replaced.
LDI2901
Do-it-yourself 8-21
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
O
B
. 5. If the fuse is open
O
C
, replace it with an
equivalent good fuse
O
D
.
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
LDI2902 LDI2713
8-22 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swal-
low the battery or removed parts.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver
O
A
into the slit
O
B
of the corner and twist it
to separate the upper part from the
lower part. Place a cloth over the screw-
driver to protect the casing.
LDI2001
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Do-it-yourself 8-23
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or
equivalent.
• Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
• Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points
will seriously deplete the storage
capacity.
• Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
O
C
and
O
D
.
5. Operate the buttons to check the
operation.
If you need assistance with replacement, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device contains licence-exempt
transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply
with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada’s licence-exempt
RSS(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause interference. (2) This de-
vice must accept any interference, in-
cluding interference that may cause un-
desired operation of the device.
LDI2637
8-24 Do-it-yourself
HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight
bulb replacement, refer to the instructions
outlined in this section.
Replacing the LED headlight bulb
If LED headlight bulb replacement is re-
quired, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions out-
lined in this section.
Replacing the LED fog light bulb
If LED fog light bulb replacement is re-
quired, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage ( W) Bulb No.
Headlight assembly*
High — —
Low — —
Turn — —
Side marker — —
Park/Daytime running — —
Front fog lights (if so equipped)* — —
Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —
Map light* — —
Courtesy light* — —
Personal light* — —
Vanity mirror light* 1.8 SAE 37
Glove box light (if so equipped)* 1.4 —
Cargo light* 5 —
High-mounted stop light* — —
Rear combination light*
Tail/Stop — —
Turn — —
Rear side marker — —
Backup (reversing) light assembly*
Backup — —
Tail/Stop — —
License plate light* 5 W5W
* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance.
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts
information.
LIGHTS
Do-it-yourself 8-25
1. Map light
2 Headlight assembly
3 Personal light
4. Door mirror turn signal light (if so
equipped)
5. Fog light (if so equipped)
6. High-mounted stop light
7. License plate light
8. Backup (reversing) light assembly
9. Rear combination light
10. Cargo light
11. Daytime running light
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens, lamp and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
LDI3332
WDI0263
8-26 Do-it-yourself
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire”
(P. 6-3).
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely af-
fect electric medical equipment.
Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric medi-
cal equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before
use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
It monitors tire pressure of all tires ex-
cept the spare. When the low tire pres-
sure warning light is lit and the “Tire
Pressure Low - Add Air” warning ap-
pears in the vehicle information dis-
play, one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. If equipped, the
system also displays pressure of all
tires (except the spare tire) on the dis-
play screen by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system
may not detect a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
For additional information, see “Low
tire pressure warning light” (P. 2-12),
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” (P. 5-5) and ““Flat tire” (P. 6-3).
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including
the spare) often and always prior to
long distance trips. The recom-
mended tire pressure specifications
are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label or the Tire and
Loading Information label under the
“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
and Loading Information label is af-
fixed to the driver side center pillar.
Tire pressures should be checked
regularly because:
• Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
• Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other ob-
jects or if the vehicle strikes a curb
while parking.
The tire pressures should be
checked when the tires are cold. The
tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert pro-
vides visual and audible signals out-
side the vehicle for inflating tires to
the recommended COLD tire pres-
sure. For additional information, see
“TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert” (P. 5-8).
WHEELS AND TIRES
Do-it-yourself 8-27
Incorrect tire pressure, including
under inflation, may adversely af-
fect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
•
Improperly inflated tires can
fail suddenly and cause an
accident.
•
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The vehicle weight capac-
ity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do
not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating condi-
tions due to premature tire fail-
ure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Load-
ing beyond the specified capac-
ity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
• Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.
• For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
tant Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
8-28
Do-it-yourself
Tire and Loading Information
label
䊊
1
Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can
be seated in the vehicle.
䊊
2
Tire size - see “Tire labeling”
(P. 8-30).
䊊
3
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires
to this pressure when the tires
are cold. Tires are considered
COLD after the vehicle has been
parked for 3 or more hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at
moderate speeds. The recom-
mended cold tire inflation is set
by the manufacturer to provide
the best balance of tire wear, ve-
hicle handling, driveability, tire
noise, etc., up to the vehicle's
GVWR.
䊊
4
Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the ve-
hicle at the factory.
䊊
5
Spare tire size.
䊊
6
Vehicle load limit: see “Vehicle
loading information” (P. 10-15).
LDI2737
Do-it-yourself 8-29
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire.
2.
Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press
too hard or force the valve stem
sideways, or air will escape. If the
hissing sound of air escaping from
the tire is heard while checking the
pressure, reposition the gauge to
eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare to the
specification shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core
of the valve stem briefly with the
tip of the gauge stem to release
pressure. Recheck the pressure
and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other
tires, including the spare.
Size Cold Tire Infla-
tion Pressure
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
235/65R18
33 psi, 230 kPa
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
235/55R20
35 psi, 240 kPa
Spare Tire:
T165/90D18
60 psi, 420 kPa
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufac-
turers to place standardized infor-
mation on the sidewall of all tires.
This information identifies and de-
scribes the fundamental character-
istics of the tire and also provides the
Tire Identification Number (TIN) for
safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
LDI0393 WDI0394
Example
8-30 Do-it-yourself
O
1
Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles (not
all tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in milli-
meters of the tire from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This num-
ber, known as the aspect ratio,
gives the tire's ratio of height to
width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This num-
ber is the wheel or rim diameter in
inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire's load in-
dex. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can
support.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
WDI0395
Example
Do-it-yourself 8-31
O
2
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX
XXX XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-
ment Of Transportation”. The
symbol can be placed above, be-
low or to the left or right of the Tire
Identification Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's
identification mark.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103
means the 31st week of 2003. If
these numbers are missing then
look on the other sidewall of the
tire.
O
3
Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which in-
clude steel, nylon, polyester and
others.
O
4
Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire.Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
O
5
Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maxi-
mum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle, al-
ways use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
LDI2786
Example
8-32 Do-it-yourself
O
6
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
O
7
The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown if the tire
has radial structure.
O
8
Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that
are defined throughout this section,
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model
name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on
the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)
the outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particu-
lar side that must always face out-
ward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
• When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow)
and construction. A NISSAN dealer
may be able to help you with infor-
mation about tire type, size, speed
rating and availability.
• Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
• Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could af-
fect the proper operation of the low
tire pressure warning system.
• Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels. Failure to
do so may result in a circumference
difference between tires on the front
and rear axles which can cause the
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-
tem to malfunction resulting in per-
sonal injury or death, excessive tire
wear and may damage the transmis-
sion, transfer case and differential
gears.
• For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-
formation” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
CAUTION
• ONLY use spare tires specified for the
AWD model.
Do-it-yourself 8-33
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-
mended that all four tires be replaced with
tires of the same size, brand, construction
and tread pattern. The tire pressure and
wheel alignment should also be checked
and corrected as necessary. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some
models to provide good performance all
year, including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL
SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires have better snow traction than
All Season tires and may be more appropri-
ate in some areas.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the
use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all
four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load rat-
ing to the original equipment tires. If you do
not, it can adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-
ings than factory equipped tires and may
not match the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum speed
rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the
same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, stud-
ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit
their use. Check local, state and provincial
laws before installing studded tires. Skid
and traction capabilities of studded snow
tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Tire chains/cables should not be in-
stalled on 235/55R20 size tires. Instal-
lation of the tire chains/cables on 235/
55R20 size tires will cause damage to
the vehicle. If you plan to use tire
chains/cables, you should install 235/
65R18 size tires on your vehicle.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-
cording to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing
tire chains, make sure they are the proper
size for the tires on your vehicle and are
installed according to the chain manufac-
turer's suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”
chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-
hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-
ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains
are designed to meet the minimum clear-
ances between the tire and the closest ve-
hicle suspension or body component re-
quired to accommodate the use of a
winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are de-
termined using the factory equipped tire
size. Other types may damage your vehicle.
Use chain tensioners when recommended
by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
8-34 Do-it-yourself
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be
damaged and/or vehicle handling and
performance may be adversely affected.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
For additional information on tire re-
placing procedures, see “Flat tire”
(P. 6-3).
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts
be tightened to specification at
each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
•
After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
• Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
• Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
• For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
tant Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
WDI0258
Do-it-yourself 8-35
Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
• Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking,
bulging or objects caught in
the tread. If excessive wear,
cracks, bulging or deep cuts
are found, the tire(s) should be
replaced.
• The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When
the wear indicators are visible,
the tire(s) should be replaced.
• Tires degrade with age and
use. Have tires, including the
spare, over 6 years old checked
by a qualified technician be-
cause some tire damage may
not be obvious. Replace the
tires as necessary to prevent
tire failure and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious per-
sonal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
• For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
tant Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load carry-
ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-
ditional information, see “Wheels and tires”
(P. 10-10).
WDI0259
8-36 Do-it-yourself
WARNING
• The use of tires other than those rec-
ommended or the mixed use of tires
of different brands, construction
(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread
patterns can adversely affect the
ride, braking, handling, VDC system,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, tire chain clearance, speedom-
eter calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height. Some of these ef-
fects may lead to accidents and
could result in serious personal
injury.
• For 2WD models, if your vehicle was
originally equipped with four tires
that were the same size and you are
only replacing two of the four tires,
install the new tires on the rear axle.
Placing new tires on the front axle
may cause loss of vehicle control in
some driving conditions and cause
an accident and personal injury.
• If the wheels are changed for any
reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimen-
sion. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear, de-
grade vehicle handling characteris-
tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-
ter ference with the brake discs. Such
inter ference can lead to decreased
braking efficiency and/or early brake
pad wear. For additional information
on wheel off-set dimensions, see
“Wheels and tires” (P. 10-10).
• When using a wheel without the
TPMS, such as the spare tire, the
TPMS will not function and the low
tire pressure warning light will flash
for approximately 1 minute. The light
will remain on after 1 minute. Have
your tires replaced and/or TPMS sys-
tem reset as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
• Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could af-
fect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
• The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
• When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. It is
recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for ID registration.
• Do not use a valve stem cap that is
not specified by NISSAN. The valve
stem cap may become stuck.
• Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fit ted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.
• Do not install a damaged or de-
formed wheel or tire even if it has
been repaired. Such wheels or tires
could have structural damage and
could fail without warning.
• The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
• For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-
formation” (Canada) in the Warranty
Information Booklet.
Do-it-yourself 8-37
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
• For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
Care of wheels
• Wash the wheels when washing the ve-
hicle to maintain their appearance.
• Clean the inner side of the wheels when
the wheel is changed or the underside of
the vehicle is washed.
• Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
• Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss
of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
• NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
When using a wheel without the TPMS such
as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function.
Observe the following precautions if the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be
used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be
damaged or involved in an accident:
WARNING
• The spare tire should be used for
emergency use only. It should be re-
placed with the standard tire at the
first opportunity to avoid possible
tire or differential damage.
• Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
• Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure
of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
• With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 mph (80
km/h).
• When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels).
• Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.
• Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
• Do not use more than one spare tire
at the same time.
• Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
8-38 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
• Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not
drive the vehicle through an auto-
matic car wash since it may get
caught.
Do-it-yourself 8-39
MEMO
8-40 Do-it-yourself
9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirements .....................9-2
General maintenance ........................9-2
Scheduled maintenance .....................9-2
Where to go for service .......................9-2
General maintenance ...........................9-2
Explanation of general maintenance
items ........................................9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5
Emission control system maintenance: ......9-6
Chassis and body maintenance: .............9-6
Maintenance schedules .........................9-7
Additional maintenance Items for
severe operating conditions ..................9-7
3.5L 6 cylinder (VQ35DE engine model) .......9-7
Some day-to-day and regular mainte-
nance is essential to maintain your vehicle
good mechanical condition, as well as its
emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner's responsibility to make sure
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as
general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in
the maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. They are essential
for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-
sponsibility to perform these procedures
regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks
requires minimal mechanical skill and only
a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you
prefer, a NISSAN dealer.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this sec-
tion are required to be serviced at regular
intervals. However under severe driving
conditions, additional or more frequent
maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and serviced. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-
cialists and are kept up-to-date with the
latest service information through techni-
cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-
grams. They are fully qualified to work on
NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is
recommended that you ask your NISSAN
dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified
Collision Center is located, or go to
http://collision.nissanusa.com.
You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-
er's service department can perform the
service needed to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle.
During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should
be performed regularly as prescribed in
this section. If you detect any unusual
sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to
check for the cause or have it checked
promptly. In addition, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think
that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or mainte-
nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-
nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
WARNING
Failure to follow the procedures listed
within this section may result in per-
sonal injury.
Additional information on the following
items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
9-2 Maintenance and schedules
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless
otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that the
doors and engine hood operate properly.
Also ensure that all latches lock securely.
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers
and links if necessary. Make sure that the
secondary latch keeps the hood from
opening when the primary latch is
released.
When driving in areas using road salt or
other corrosive materials, check lubrica-
tion frequently.
Check that the gas stays or struts properly
and securely hold the hood, trunk, or rear
hatch in a fully open position. If the hood,
trunk, or rear hatch is not held open, have
the gas stays or struts replaced.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other
lights are all operating properly and in-
stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-
ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are
missing, and check for any loose wheel
nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Rotate tires at the specified
interval shown in the maintenance
schedule.
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all
tires, including the spare, to the pressure
specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts
or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
tire pressure sensor: It is recommended
that you replace the TPMS tire pressure as-
sembly when the tires are replaced due to
wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-
hicle should pull to either side while driving
on a straight and level road, or if you detect
uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may
be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-
ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-
way speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at least
every six months for cracks or other dam-
age. Have a damaged windshield repaired
by a qualified repair facility. It is recom-
mended that you have a damaged wind-
shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a
NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate
a collision center in your area, refer to
http://collision.nissanusa.com.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing scheduled maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the
pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down fur ther than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer
to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-
diately. It is recommended that you visit a
Maintenance and schedules 9-3
NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the
floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a
fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held
securely with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position without applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only
the parking brake applied. If the parking
brake needs adjustment, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to
ensure they operate smoothly and all
latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints/headrests
move up and down smoothly and the locks
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched
positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,
adjusters and retractors) operate properly
and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,
wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive free
play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
and in sufficient quantity when operating
the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check
that the wipers and washer operate prop-
erly and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (for example, each
time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* (for maintenance free batter-
ies): This vehicle is equipped with a sealed
maintenance free battery. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
service.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake
fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines
on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive
belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level spot and
turning off the engine. Wait more than 15
minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil
pan.
9-4 Maintenance and schedules
Engine valve clearance*: Inspect if valve
noise increases.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose suppor ts, cracks or holes. If the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-
ately have the exhaust system inspected. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. For additional infor-
mation, see “Exhaust gas (carbon monox-
ide)” (P. 5-4).
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if
fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause
and have it corrected immediately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines:
Check the level when the fluid is cold, with
the engine off. Check the lines for proper
attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-
mation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control dust. It
is very important to remove these sub-
stances, otherwise rust may form on the
floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the
exhaust system. At the end of winter, the
underbody should be thoroughly flushed
with plain water, being careful to clean
those areas where mud and dirt may accu-
mulate. For additional information, see
“Cleaning exterior” (P. 7-2).
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that
there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.
The following descriptions are provided to
give you a better understanding of the
scheduled maintenance items that should
be regularly checked or replaced. The
maintenance schedule indicates at which
mileage/time intervals each item requires
service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance,
your vehicle requires that some items be
checked during normal day-to-day opera-
tion. For additional information, see “Gen-
eral maintenance” (P. 9-2).
Items marked with “*” are recommended
by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
You are not required to perform mainte-
nance on these items in order to maintain
the warranties which come with your
NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-
tervals are required.
When applicable, additional information
can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Maintenance and schedules 9-5
NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of
non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-
ing systems and strongly advises
against performing these services on a
NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-
ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-
proved chemicals or solvents, the use of
which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, see “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-
ties” (P. 10-2).
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for
wear, fraying or cracking and for proper
tension. Replace any damaged drive belt.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-
vals. When driving for prolonged periods in
dusty conditions, check/replace the filter
more frequently.
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the
specified interval. When adding or replac-
ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent with the proper mixture.
(For additional information on the proper
mix ture for your area, see “Engine cooling
system” (P. 8-4).
NOTE:
Mixing any other type of coolant or the
use of non-distilled water may reduce
the recommended service interval of the
coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For
recommended oil grade and viscosity see
“Recommended fluids/lubricants and ca-
pacities” (P. 10-2).
Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if
valve noise increase. Adjust valve clearance
if necessary.
Evaporative emissions control vapor
lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose-
ness. Tighten connections or replace parts
as necessary.
Fuel filter*: Periodic maintenance is not re-
quired. (in-tank type filter)
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping
and connections for leaks, looseness, or
deterioration. Tighten connections or re-
place parts as necessary.
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.
Install new plugs of the same type as origi-
nally equipped.
CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
proper installation. Check for chafing,
cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged
parts immediately.
Brake pads and rotors:
Check for wear, de-
terioration and fluid leaks. Replace any de-
teriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-
haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.
In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified
intervals. When driving for prolonged peri-
ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter
more frequently.
Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage,
looseness, and grease leakage. (AWD)
Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check
for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
or grease. Under severe driving conditions,
inspect more frequently.
9-6 Maintenance and schedules
Tire rotation: Rotate tires at the specified
interval shown in the maintenance
schedule.
Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil,
transfer case oil: Visually inspect for signs
of leakage at specified intervals. If towing a
trailer, using a camper or car-top carrier, or
driving on rough or muddy roads:
• Replace the fluid/oil every 20,000 miles
(32,000 km) or 24 months.
• Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or request the dealer to in-
spect the fluid deterioration data using a
CONSULT. If the deterioration data is
more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid.
Off-Road Maintenance Check the follow-
ing items frequently whenever you drive
off-road through deep sand, mud or water:
• Brake pads and rotors
• Brake lines and hoses
• Differential, transmission and transfer
case oil
• Steering linkage
• Propeller shaft(s) and front drive shafts
• Engine air filter
To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-
cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-
nance schedules that may be used, de-
pending upon the conditions in which you
usually drive. These schedules contain
both distance and time intervals, up to
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96 months. For
most people, the odometer reading will in-
dicate when service is needed. However, if
you drive very little, your vehicle should be
serviced at the regular time intervals
shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96
months, continue maintenance at the
same mileage/time intervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be per-
formed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Addi-
tional maintenance items should be per-
formed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:
• Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
• Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles
(16 km) with outside temperatures re-
maining below freezing.
• Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go
“rush hour” traffic.
• Extensive idling and/or low speed driving
for long distances, such as police, taxi or
door-to-door delivery use.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
• Towing a trailer, using a camper or using a
car-top carrier.
If your vehicle is mainly operated under the
severe conditions, follow the severe main-
tenance intervals shown in the mainte-
nance schedule.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance and schedules 9-7
3.5L 6 CYLINDER (VQ35DE engine
model)
The following shows the maintenance
schedule.
Choose the maintenance schedule
needed based on your vehicle driving
conditions.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/96
months, continue maintenance at the
same mileage/time interval.
5,000 miles/(8,000 km)/6 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Drive shaft boots
• Axle & suspension parts
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
9-8 Maintenance and schedules
7,500 miles/(12,000 km)/6 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
10,000 miles/(16,000 km)/
12 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace brake fluid
Maintenance and schedules 9-9
15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/
12 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines and cables
• Brake pads and rotors
• CVT transmission fluid
• Differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Transfer case oil (AWD models)
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
15,000 miles/(24,000 km)/
18 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
9-10 Maintenance and schedules
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
20,000 miles/(32,000 km)/
24 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Replace transfer case oil (AWD models)
Maintenance and schedules 9-11
22,500 miles/(36,000 km)/
18 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Intelligent key battery
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
25,000 miles/(40,000 km)/
30 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
9-12 Maintenance and schedules
30,000 miles/(48,000 km)/
24 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines and cables
• Brake pads and rotors
• CVT transmission fluid
• Differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Fuel tank vapor vent system *
• Fuel lines/connections *
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear and linkage
• Axle and suspension parts
• Transfer case oil (AWD models)
• Drive shaft
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace engine air filter (1)
• Replace brake fluid
• Tire rotation
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions,
more frequent maintenance may be
required.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”
are recommended by NISSAN for reliable
vehicle operation. The owner need not per-
form such maintenance in order to main-
tain the emission warranty or manufac-
turer recall liability. Other maintenance
items and intervals are required.
30,000 miles/(48,000 km)/
36 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Maintenance and schedules 9-13
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace brake fluid
35,000 miles/(56,000 km)/
42 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
9-14 Maintenance and schedules
37,500 miles/(60,000 km)/
30 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
40,000 miles/(64,000 km)/
48 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Replace transfer case oil (AWD models)
Maintenance and schedules 9-15
45,000 miles/(72,000 km)/
36 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines and cables
• Brake pads and rotors
• Differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• CVT transmission fluid
• Transfer case oil (AWD models)
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
• Replace intelligent key battery
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
45,000 miles/(72,000 km)/
54 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
9-16 Maintenance and schedules
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
50,000 miles/(80,000 km)/
60 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace brake fluid
Maintenance and schedules 9-17
52,500 miles/(84,000 km)/
42 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
55,000 miles/(88,000 km)/
66 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
9-18 Maintenance and schedules
60,000 miles/(96,000 km)/
48 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines and cables
• Brake pads and rotors
• CVT transmission fluid
• Differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Engine drive belts *
• Fuel tank vapor vent system *
• Fuel lines/connections *
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear and linkage
• Axle and suspension parts
• Transfer case oil (AWD models)
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Hose inspection
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine air filter (1)
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions,
more frequent maintenance may be
required.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”
are recommended by NISSAN for reliable
vehicle operation. The owner need not per-
form such maintenance in order to main-
tain the emission warranty or manufac-
turer recall liability. Other maintenance
items and intervals are required.
60,000 miles/(96,000 km)/
72 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Maintenance and schedules 9-19
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace CVT transmission fluid (1)
• Replace differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Replace transfer case oil (AWD models)
(1) Performed based on the number of
miles only.
65,000 miles/(104,000 km)/
78 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
9-20 Maintenance and schedules
67,500 miles/(108,000 km)/
54 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
• Replace Intelligent Key battery
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
70,000 miles/(112,000 km)/
84 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace brake fluid
Maintenance and schedules 9-21
75,000 miles/(120,000 km)/
60 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines and cables
• Brake pads and rotors
• CVT transmission fluid
• Differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Engine drive belt *
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Transfer case oil (AWD models)
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine air filter
• Hose inspections
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”
are recommended by NISSAN for reliable
vehicle operation. The owner need not per-
form such maintenance in order to main-
tain the emission warranty or manufac-
turer recall liability. Other maintenance
items and intervals are required.
75,000 miles/(120,000 km)/
90 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
9-22 Maintenance and schedules
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
80,000 miles/(128,000 km)/
96 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Replace transfer case oil (AWD models)
Maintenance and schedules 9-23
82,500 miles/(132,000 km)/
66 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
85,000 miles/(136,000 km)/
102 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
9-24 Maintenance and schedules
90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/
72 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines and cables
• Brake pads and rotors
• CVT transmission fluid
• Differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Transfer case oil (AWD models)
• Drive shaft boots
• Engine drive belt *
• Fuel tank vapor vent system *
• Fuel lines/connections *
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear and linkage
• Axle and suspension parts
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Hose inspections
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine air filter (1)
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
• Replace intelligent key battery
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions,
more frequent maintenance may be
required.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”
are recommended by NISSAN for reliable
vehicle operation. The owner need not per-
form such maintenance in order to main-
tain the emission warranty or manufac-
turer recall liability. Other maintenance
items and intervals are required.
90,000 miles/(144,000 km)/
108 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Maintenance and schedules 9-25
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace brake fluid
95,000 miles/(152,000 km)/
114 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
9-26 Maintenance and schedules
97,500 miles/(156,000 km)/
78 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
100,000 miles/(160,000 km)/
120 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Replace transfer case oil (AWD models)
Maintenance and schedules 9-27
105,000 miles/(168,000 km)/
84 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines and cables
• Brake pads and rotors
• CVT transmission fluid
• Engine drive belt *
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Transfer case oil (AWD models)
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace spark plugs (1)(2)
• Replace engine coolant * (3)
• Tire rotation
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
(1) Replace spark plug when the plug gap
exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within
specified replacement mileage.
(2) Performed based on the number of
miles only.
(3) First replacement interval is 105,000
miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first
replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”
are recommended by NISSAN for reliable
vehicle operation. The owner need not per-
form such maintenance in order to main-
tain the emission warranty or manufac-
turer recall liability. Other maintenance
items and intervals are required.
105,000 miles/(168,000 km)/
126 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
9-28 Maintenance and schedules
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
110,000 miles/(176,000 km)/
132 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Replace brake fluid
Maintenance and schedules 9-29
112,500 miles/(180,000 km)/
90 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
• Replace intelligent key battery
Severe maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
115,000 miles/(184,000 km)/
138 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Not Applicable. Proceed to next interval
Severe maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake pads & rotors
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear & linkage
• Axle & suspension parts
• Drive shaft boots
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Engine drive belt and hose inspections
• Engine air filter
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Differential gear oil
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine oil & filter
9-30 Maintenance and schedules
120,000 miles/(192,000 km)/
96 months
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
Standard maintenance:
Inspections:
• Brake lines and cables
• Brake pads and rotors
• CVT Transmission fluid
• Differential gear oil (AWD models)
• Transfer case oil (AWD models)
• Drive shaft boots
• Engine drive belt *
• Fuel tank vapor vent system *
• Fuel lines/connections *
• Exhaust system
• Propeller shaft (AWD models)
• Steering gear and linkage
• Axle and suspension parts
• Horn, lights, signals, wipers, rear hatch/
hood lift supports
• All fluids inspected (engine, wiper, brake,
power steering, coolant)
• Hose inspections
• Suspension components (shocks, sub-
frame, tie rods)
• Battery terminals and cables, battery test
• Tire pressure, treadwear and depth
Essential:
• Replace engine air filter (1)
• Replace brake fluid
• Replace engine oil & filter
• Tire rotation
• Replace in-cabin microfilter
Severe maintenance:
Essential:
• Replace CVT transmission fluid (2)
(1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions,
more frequent maintenance may be
required.
(2) Performed based on the number of
miles only.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*”
are recommended by NISSAN for reliable
vehicle operation. The owner need not per-
form such maintenance in order to main-
tain the emission warranty or manufac-
turer recall liability. Other maintenance
items and intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-31
MEMO
9-32 Maintenance and schedules
10 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities ......................................10-2
Fuel recommendation ......................10-4
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations ..........................10-7
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations .......................10-8
Specifications ..................................10-9
Engine ......................................10-9
Wheels and tires ...........................10-10
Dimensions and weights ...................10-10
When traveling or registering in another
country ........................................10-11
Vehicle identification ...........................10-11
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate ........................................10-11
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) ............................10-11
Engine serial number ...................... 10-12
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........10-12
Emission control information label .........10-12
Tire and Loading Information label ......... 10-13
Air conditioner specification label .......... 10-13
Installing front license plate ...................10-14
Vehicle loading information ...................10-15
Terms ......................................10-15
Vehicle load capacity .......................10-16
Securing the load .......................... 10-17
Loading tips ................................10-18
Measurement of weights ...................10-18
Towing a trailer ................................10-19
Maximum load limits .......................10-19
Towing load/specification ..................10-22
Towing safety ..............................10-23
Flat towing for all–wheel drive vehicle
(if so equipped) .............................10-27
Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle
(if so equipped) .............................10-28
Uniform tire quality grading ...................10-28
Emission control system warranty ............10-29
Reporting safety defects ......................10-30
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
test ...........................................10-31
E
vent Data Recorders (EDR) ...................10-32
Owner's Manual/Service Manual order
information ...................................10-32
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different.When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type
Capacity (approximate)
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
Fuel 71.9 L 19 gal 15-7/8 gal • For additional information, see “Fuel recommendation” (P. 10-4).
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
*1: For additional information, see
“Engine oil” (P. 8-6).
With oil filter
change
4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt
• Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” (or equivalent) is recom-
mended.
• If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic
0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage
caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as rec-
ommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations” (P. 10-7).
Without oil
filter change
4.5 L 4-3/4 qt 4 qt
Engine coolant
With reservoir
8.7 L 2-1/4 gal 1-7/8 gal
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — —
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3.
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.
Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids
other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty outlined in your Warranty Information
Booklet.
Differential gear oil — — —
• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or
equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil.
Transfer oil — — —
Power Steering Fluid (PSF) — — —
• Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent.
• Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF
may prevent the power steering system from operating prop-
erly.
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
10-2 Technical and consumer information
Fluid type
Capacity (approximate)
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
Brake fluid — — —
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent
DOT 3.
*2: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.
Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base).
Windshield-washer fluid 4.6 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —
• HFO1234yf (R1234yf).
• For additional information, see “Air conditioner system refriger-
ant and oil recommendations” (P. 10-8).
Air conditioning system oil — — —
• NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG or equivalent.
• For additional information, see “Air conditioner system refriger-
ant and oil recommendations” (P. 10-8).
Technical and consumer information 10-3
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).
CAUTION
• Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel sys-
tem or other damage can occur if
E-85 is used in vehicles that are not
designed to run on E-85.
• Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
• Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because
this will damage the three-way
catalyst.
• Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a
fuel containing more than 15% etha-
nol. Using a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not spe-
cifically designed for a fuel contain-
ing more than 15% ethanol can ad-
versely affect the emission control
devices and systems of the vehicle.
Damage caused by such fuel is not
covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
• Do not use fuel that contains the oc-
tane booster methylcyclopentadi-
enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
Using fuel containing MMT may ad-
versely affect vehicle performance
and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel
dispensers are labeled to indicate
MMT content, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for
more details. Note that Federal and
California laws prohibit the use of
MMT in reformulated gasoline.
• U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be
identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common ab-
breviation or the appropriate per-
centage for that region.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
specifications where it is available. Many of
the automobile manufacturers developed
this specification to improve emission con-
trol system and vehicle performance. Ask
your service station manager if the gaso-
line meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-
formulated gasolines. These gasolines are
specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-
sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards
cleaner air and suggests that you use re-
formulated gasoline when available.
10-4 Technical and consumer information
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-
ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with
or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
fuels of which the oxygenate content and
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-
not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask
your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
• The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
• If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should con-
tain no more than 15% oxygenate.
• If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-
able to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-
rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,
immediately change to a non-oxygenate
fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during re-
fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.
E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-
tions require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percent-
age for that region.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-
hicle. U.S. government regulations require
fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
tified by a small, square, orange and black
label with the common abbreviation or the
appropriate percentage for that region.
Technical and consumer information 10-5
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-
nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-
ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the
use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may
adversely affect vehicle performance, in-
cluding the emissions control system. Note
that while some fuel pumps label MMT
content, not all do, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for more
details.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-
ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane
booster, intake valve deposit removers,
etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of
these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients that can be
harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can
cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping
noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine
damage. If you detec t a persistent heavy
spark knock even when using gasoline
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear
steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, it is recom-
mended that you have a NISSAN dealer
correct the condition. Failure to correct
the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
which NISSAN is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
which may cause excessive fuel consump-
tion or engine damage. If any of the above
symptoms are encountered, have your ve-
hicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
a cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
10-6 Technical and consumer information
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance.
For additional information, see “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
(P. 10-2). NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy conserving oil in order to improve
fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-
cation or International Lubricant Standard-
ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which do
not have the specified quality label should
not be used as they could cause engine
damage.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important to select the engine oil
viscosity based on the temperatures at
which the vehicle will be operated before
the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-
ity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or
its equivalent for the reason described in
“Change intervals.”
LTI2051
Technical and consumer information 10-7
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Using en-
gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-
fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil
and filter change intervals could reduce
engine life. Damage to the engine caused
by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not have
to change the oil before the first recom-
mended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you
use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions
may require more frequent oil and filter
changes:
• repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
• driving in dusty conditions
• extensive idling
• towing a trailer
• stop and go commuting
For additional information, see “Mainte-
nance and schedules” (P. 9-2).
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and
NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG or the
exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air
conditioning system and will require
the replacement of all air conditioner
system components.
The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in
your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the
earth's ozone layer. Although this refriger-
ant does not affect the earth's atmo-
sphere, certain government regulations re-
quire the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air condi-
tioner system service. Air conditioner sys-
tem should only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians to ensure proper and
safe operation (SAE J2845). A NISSAN dealer
has the trained technicians and equip-
ment needed to recover and recycle your
air conditioner system refrigerant. Only
new and SAEJ2842 certified evaporator(s)
shall be used as replacement parts.
A damaged or leaking air conditioning
evaporator shall never be repaired or re-
placed with one removed from a used or
salvaged vehicle. To replace a damaged or
leaking evaporator, use only new and SAE
J2842 certified evaporator(s). It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
when servicing your air conditioner
system.
10-8 Technical and consumer information
ENGINE
Model 3.5L 6 cylinder (VQ35DE engine model)
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.780 x 3.189 (96 x 81)
Displacement cu in (cm
3
) 213.45 (3,498)
Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6
Idle speed
No adjustment is necessary.
CVT (in N (Neutral) position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO%atidle
Spark plug FXE22HR-11
Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
SPECIFICATIONS
Technical and consumer information 10-9
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheels Offset in (mm) Size
Alloy
1.97 (50) 18 x 7.5J
1.97 (50) 20 x 7.5J
Tires Size
All Season
235/65R18
235/55R20
Spare tire Wheel size Tire size
Temporary spare - steel
or alloy
18 x 4T T165/90D18
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length
without front license plate
bracket
in (mm) 192.4 (4,888)
with front license plate bracket in (mm) 192.8 (4,898)
Overall width in (mm) 75.4 (1,916)
Overall height in (mm) 67.5 (1,714)
Front and rear track width in (mm) 64.6 (1,640)
Wheelbase in (mm) 111.2 (2,825)
Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) Refer to the
“F.M.V.S.S./
C.M.V.S.S. certifi-
cation label” on
the center pillar
between the
driver's side front
and rear doors.
Gross axle weight rating
Front lbs. (kg)
Rear
lbs. (kg)
10-10 Technical and consumer information
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first
find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gaso-
line vehicles must be operated with un-
leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws
and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards
vary according to the country, state, prov-
ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-
tions may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, trans-
portation and registration are the re-
sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-
sponsible for any inconvenience that
may result.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate is attached as shown. This number is
the identification for your vehicle and is
used in the vehicle registration.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is lo-
cated as shown.
LTI2050 LTI2108
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Technical and consumer information 10-11
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-
cation label is affixed as shown. This label
contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is
attached to the underside of the hood as
shown.
LTI2133 WTI0172 WTI0188
10-12 Technical and consumer information
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. The label is
located as shown.
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is af-
fixed to the underside of the hood as
shown.
LTI2251 WTI0198
Technical and consumer information 10-13
Symbol Name Reference Graphic
Caution ISO 7000 0434
Air Conditioning System
(MAC)
ISO 2575 D01
MAC System Lubricant Type
(PAG–POE)
Requires Registered Technician to
Service MAC System
Flammable Refrigerant
Air Conditioner Specification Label Symbols
To mount the front license plate, attach the
license plate bracket to the plastic finisher
at the location marks (small dimples) using
the two provided screws
O
A
.
LTI2406
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
10-14 Technical and consumer information
WARNING
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your ve-
hicle is in a seat and using a
seat belt properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before
loading your vehicle:
• Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment,
fluids, emergency tools, and spare
tire assembly. This weight does
not include passengers and cargo.
• GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight
of passengers and cargo.
• GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, cargo, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other op-
tional equipment. This information
is located on the F.M.V.S.S./
C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
• GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit
specified for the front or rear axle.
This information is located on
the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
• GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - The maximum total
weight rating of the vehicle, pas-
sengers, cargo, and trailer.
• Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum to-
tal weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-
hicle. This is the maximum com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo that can be loaded into the
vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow
a trailer, the trailer tongue weight
must be included as part of the
cargo load. This information is lo-
cated on the Tire and Loading In-
formation label.
• Cargo capacity - permissible
weight of cargo, the subtracted
weight of occupants from the load
limit.
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
Technical and consumer information 10-15
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-
firm that you do not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
your vehicle. Both the GVWR and
GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S./
C.M.V.S.S. certification label. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Measure-
ment of weights” in this section.
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information la-
bel. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Ca-
pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label.
To get “the combined weight of oc-
cupants and cargo”, add the weight
of all occupants, then add the total
cargo weight. Examples are shown
in the following illustration.
Steps For Determining Correct
Load Limit
LTI2320
Example
10-16 Technical and consumer information
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg. or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For ex-
ample, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the avail-
able cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Con-
sult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-
firm that you do not exceed the
GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle.
For additional information, see “Mea-
surement of weights” (P. 10-18).
Also check tires for proper inflation
pressures. For additional informa-
tion, see “Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label” (P. 10-13).
SECURING THE LOAD
There are luggage hooks located in the
cargo area as shown. The hooks can be
used to secure cargo with ropes or other
types of straps.
When securing items using luggage
hooks located on the side finisher do not
apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N)
to a single hook.
The luggage hooks that are located on
the floor should have loads less than
110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.
LTI2113
Cargo area luggage hooks
Technical and consumer information 10-17
WARNING
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from slid-
ing or shifting. Do not place cargo
higher than the seatbacks. In a sud-
den stop or collision, unsecured
cargo could cause personal injury.
• The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
items in the cargo area. Secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in
a collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
• Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum front
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of
your vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could re-
sult in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury.
LOADING TIPS
• The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./
C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
• Do not load the front and rear axle
to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed
the GVWR.
WARNING
• Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do
not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo
could cause personal injury.
• Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change
the way your vehicle handles.
This could result in loss of con-
trol and cause personal injury.
• Overloading not only can
shorten the life of your vehicle
and the tire, but can also cause
unsafe vehicle handling and
longer braking distances. This
may cause a premature tire
failure which could result in a
serious accident and personal
injury. Failures caused by over-
loading are not covered by the
vehicle’s warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent
weight shifts that could affect the
balance of your vehicle. When the ve-
hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and
weigh the front and the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle
loads should not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These
10-18
Technical and consumer information
ratings are given on the vehicle cer-
tification label. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to
bring all weights below the ratings.
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely af-
fect vehicle handling, braking and per-
formance and may lead to accidents.
CAUTION
• Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy
load for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Your engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
• For the first 500 miles (805 km) that
you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50
mph (80 km/h) and do not make
starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of your ve-
hicle wear in at the heavier loads.
NOTE:
Tow hitches are available as an acces-
sory for this vehicle. If a tow hitch is in-
stalled, the liftgate electronic control
unit (ECU) needs to be replaced with an
ECU programmed with towing logic for
the Motion-Activated Liftgate to func-
tion properly.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used
primarily to carry passengers and cargo.
Remember that towing a trailer places ad-
ditional loads on your vehicle's engine,
drive train, steering, braking and other
systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing
capability and the special equipment re-
quired for proper towing.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed
the value specified in the “Towing Load/
Specification” chart found in this section.
The total trailer load equals trailer weight
plus its cargo weight.
The maximum Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value
specified in the following Towing Load/
Specification Chart.
TOWING A TRAILER
Technical and consumer information 10-19
The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
equals the combined weight of the towing
vehicle (including passengers and cargo)
plus the total trailer load. Towing loads
greater than these or using improper tow-
ing equipment could adversely affect ve-
hicle handling, braking and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is
not only related to the maximum trailer
loads, but also the places you plan to tow.
Tow weights appropriate for level highway
driving may have to be reduced for low
traction situations (for example, on slippery
boat ramps).
Temperature conditions can also affect
towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer
in high outside temperatures on graded
roads can affect engine performance and
cause overheating. The engine protection
mode, which helps reduce the chance of
engine damage, could activate and auto-
matically decrease engine power. Vehicle
speed may decrease under high load. Plan
your trip carefully to account for trailer and
vehicle load, weather and road conditions.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced en-
gine power and vehicle speed. The re-
duced speed may be lower than other
traffic, which could increase the chance
of a collision. Be especially careful
when driving. If the vehicle cannot
maintain a safe driving speed, pull to
the side of the road in a safe area. Allow
the engine to cool and return to normal
operation. For additional information,
see “If your vehicle overheats” (P. 6-12).
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from im-
proper towing procedures is not cov-
ered by NISSAN warranties.
Tongue load
When using a weight carrying or a weight
distributing hitch, keep the tongue load be-
tween 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use
the trailer tongue load specified by the
trailer manufacturer. The tongue load
must be within the maximum tongue load
limits shown in the following “Towing Load/
Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-
comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow
for proper tongue load.
LTI2105 WTI0160
10-20 Technical and consumer information
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle
Weight (GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label. The GVW equals the
combined weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue
load and any other optional equipment. In
addition, front or rear GAW must not ex-
ceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label.
Towing capacities are calculated assum-
ing a base vehicle with driver and any op-
tions required to achieve the rating. Addi-
tional passengers, cargo and/or optional
equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will
add weight to the vehicle and reduce your
vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and
trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed
to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,
Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined
Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-
sured using platform type scales com-
monly found at truck stops, highway weigh
stations, building supply centers or salvage
yards.
To determine the available payload capac-
ity for tongue/king pin load, use the follow-
ing procedure.
1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./
C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all
of the passengers and cargo that are
normally in the vehicle when towing a
trailer.
3.
Subtract the actual vehicle weight from
the GVWR. The remaining amount is the
available maximum tongue/king pin load.
To determine the available towing capacity,
use the following procedure.
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
"Towing Load/Specification" chart found
in this section.
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from
the GCWR. The remaining amount is the
available maximum towing capacity.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,
weigh your trailer on a scale with all equip-
ment and cargo, that are normally in the
trailer when it is towed. Make sure the
Gross trailer weight is not more than the
Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the
trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the
scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle
Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not
more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear
Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label. The cargo in the trailer and
vehicle may need to be moved or removed
to meet the specified ratings.
LTI2106
Technical and consumer information 10-21
Example:
• Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo
and hitch - 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg).
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -
7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg).
• Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
from “Towing Load/Specification" chart -
15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg).
• Maximum Trailer towing capacity from
“Towing Load/Specification" chart -
9,100 lbs. (4,128 kg).
7,250 lbs. (3,289 kg) GVWR
– 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg) GVW
= 900 lbs. (409 kg) Available for
tongue weight
15,100 lbs. (6,849 kg) GCWR
– 6,350 lbs. (2,880 kg) GVW
= 9,123 lbs. (4,138 kg) Capacity available
for towing
900 lbs. (409 kg) Available tongue
weight
/ 8,750 lbs. (3,969 kg) Available capacity
= 10 % tongue
weight
The available towing capacity may be less
than the maximum towing capacity due to
the passenger and cargo load in the
vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight
between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or
within the trailer tongue load specification
recommended by the trailer manufacturer.
If the tongue load becomes excessive, re-
arrange the cargo to obtain the proper
tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum
tongue weight specification shown in the
“Towing load/specification” chart even if
the calculated available tongue weight is
greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue
weight is less than 10%, reduce the total
trailer weight to match the available
tongue weight.
Always verify that available capacities are
within the required ratings.
Trailer frontal area
CAUTION
Exceeding the maximum trailer frontal
area specification may exceed the tow-
ing capacity of the vehicle. This may
affect the towing per formance and
lead to vehicle damage.
The trailer frontal area affects the towing
load of a trailer. The frontal area is the total
area of the vehicle and trailer that is af-
fected by air resistance while towing. Do
not exceed the maximum trailer frontal
area specification shown in the "Towing
Load/Specification” chart. The frontal area
can be determined by multiplying the
width of the trailer by the height of the
trailer. For example, a trailer that is 8 feet
wide by 6 feet tall has a trailer frontal area of
48 square feet.
Towing load/specification
WARNING
The towing capacities provided in this
manual are for general reference only.
The safe towing capacity of your ve-
hicle is affected by dealer and factory
installed options and passenger and
cargo loads. You must weigh the ve-
hicle and trailer as described in this
manual to determine the actual vehicle
towing capacity. Do not exceed the
published maximum towing capacity
or the GCWR or the GVWR shown on the
FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can re-
sult in an accident causing serious per-
sonal injury or property damage.
10-22 Technical and consumer information
Axle type FWD/AWD
Maximum Towing
Capacity *1
1,500 lbs. (680 kg)
Maximum Tongue load 150 lbs. (68 kg)
Maximum Gross Com-
bined Weight Rating
6,393 lbs. (2,900 kg)
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated as-
suming a base vehicle with driver and any op-
tions required to achieve the rating. Additional
passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment
will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your
vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.
Towing safety
Trailer hitch
Your vehicle may be equipped with an op-
tional trailer tow package. The trailer tow
package includes a receiver-type frame
mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the
maximum towing capacity of this vehicle
when the proper towing equipment is
used. Choose a proper ball mount and
hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be
towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and
hitch balls are available from a NISSAN
dealer.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the op-
tional trailer tow package, check the tow-
ing capacity of your bumper hitch or
receiver-type frame mounted hitch.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is
available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure
the trailer hitch is securely attached to the
vehicle to help avoid personal injury or
property damage due to sway caused by
crosswinds, rough road surfaces or pass-
ing trucks.
WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-
pable of towing a trailer heavier than
the weight rating of the hitch compo-
nents. Never exceed the weight rating
of the hitch components. Doing so can
cause serious personal injury or prop-
erty damage.
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and
weight rating for your trailer:
• The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls
also have the size printed on the top of
the ball.
• Choose the proper class hitch ball based
on the trailer weight.
• The diameter of the threaded shank of
the hitch ball must be matched to the ball
mount hole diameter. The hitch ball
shank should be no more than 1/16”
smaller than the hole in the ball mount.
• The threaded shank of the hitch ball must
be long enough to be properly secured to
the ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.
Ball mount
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount
and the ball mount is inserted into the
hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball
mount based on the trailer weight. Addi-
tionally, the ball mount should be chosen to
keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.
Weight carrying hitches
A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball
mount is one that is designed to carry the
whole amount of tongue weight and gross
weight directly on the ball mount and on
the receiver.
Technical and consumer information 10-23
Weight distribution hitch
This type of hitch is also called a “load-
leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars
attach to the ball mount and to the trailer
to distribute the tongue weight (hitch
weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can't
carry the full tongue weight of a given
trailer, and need some of the tongue
weight transferred through the frame and
pushing down on the front wheels. This
gives stability to the tow vehicle.
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class
IV ) is recommended if you plan to tow trail-
ers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.
(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing
equipment manufacturers to determine if
they recommend the use of a weight-
distributing hitch system.
NOTE:
A weight-distributing hitch system may
affect the operation of trailer surge
brakes. If you are considering use of a
weight-distributing hitch system with a
surge brake-equipped trailer, check with
the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufac-
turer to determine if and how this can be
done.
Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the
weight-distributing hitch system.
General set-up instructions are as follows:
1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.
With the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion and the doors closed, allow the ve-
hicle to stand for several minutes so that
it can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point
on the front and rear bumpers at the
center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and ad-
just the hitch equalizers so that the front
bumper height is within0-.5inches (0 –
13 mm) of the reference height mea-
sured in step 2. The rear bumper should
be no higher than the reference height
measured in step 2.
WARNING
Properly adjust the weight distributing
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no
higher than the measured reference
height when the trailer is attached. If
the rear bumper is higher than the
measured reference height when
loaded, the vehicle may handle unpre-
dictably which could cause a loss of ve-
hicle control and cause serious per-
sonal injury or property damage.
Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buf-
feting caused by other vehicles can affect
trailer handling. Sway control devices may
be used to help control these affects. If you
choose to use one, contact a reputable
trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway
control device will work with the vehicle,
hitch, trailer and the trailer's brake system.
Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the
sway control device.
10-24 Technical and consumer information
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow
trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.
(907 kg).
Tire pressures
• When towing a trailer, inflate the
vehicle tires to the recommended
cold tire pressure indicated on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
• Trailer tire condition, size, load rat-
ing and proper inflation pressure
should be in accordance with the
trailer and tire manufacturer's
specifications.
Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. The safety
chains should be crossed and should be
attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle
bumper or axle. The safety chains can be
attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is
mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turn-
ing corners.
Trailer lights
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available
power-type module/converter must
be used to provide power for all trailer
lighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat-
tery as a direct power source for all
trailer lights while using the vehicle tail
light, stop light and turn signal circuits
as a signal source. The module/
converter must draw no more than 15
milliamps from the stop and tail lamp
circuits. Using a module/converter that
exceeds these power requirements
may damage the vehicle's electrical
system. It is recommended that you
visit a reputable trailer retailer to ob-
tain the proper equipment and to have
it installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal
and/or local regulations. For assistance in
hooking up trailer lights, it is recommended
that you contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-
table trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with
the optional trailer tow package are
equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an
adapter will be needed to connect the
trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are
available at auto parts stores and hitch
retailers.
Pre-towing tips
• Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if
it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-
down condition; check for improper
tongue load, overload, worn suspension
or other possible causes of either
condition.
• Always secure items in the trailer to pre-
vent load shift while driving.
• Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of
gravity low.
• Load the trailer so approximately 60% of
the trailer load is in the front half and 40%
is in the back half. Also make sure the load
is balanced side to side.
Technical and consumer information 10-25
• Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-
hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation,
and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you
attach a trailer to the vehicle.
• Be certain your rearview mirrors conform
to all federal, state or local regulations. If
not, install any mirrors required for towing
before driving the vehicle.
• Determine the overall height of the ve-
hicle and trailer so the required clearance
is known.
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding
of the vehicle's behavior, you should prac-
tice turning, stopping and backing up in an
area which is free from traffic. Steering sta-
bility and braking performance will be
somewhat different than under normal
driving conditions.
• Always secure items in the trailer to pre-
vent load shift while driving.
• Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadver-
tently becoming unlatched.
• Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
• Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
• When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want
the trailer to go. Make small corrections
and back up slowly. If possible, have
someone guide you when you are back-
ing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle
and trailer when parking. Parking on a
slope is not recommended; however, if you
must do so:
CAUTION
If you move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position before blocking the
wheels and applying the parking brake,
transmission damage could occur.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the
downhill side of the vehicle and trailer
wheels.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place,
slowly release the brake pedal until the
blocks absorb the vehicle load.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
6. Turn off the engine.
To drive away:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer
are clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the
blocks.
• While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may
decrease overall stability. Therefore, to
maintain adequate control, reduce your
speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid
long or repeated use of the brakes when
descending a hill, as this reduces their
effectiveness and could cause overheat-
ing. Shifting to a lower gear instead pro-
vides “engine braking” and reduces the
need to brake as frequently.
• If the engine coolant temperature rises to
a high temperature, see “If your vehicle
overheats” (P. 6-12).
• Trailer towing requires more fuel than
normal circumstances.
10-26 Technical and consumer information
• Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle's
first 500 miles (805 km).
• For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
do tow, do not drive over 50 mph (80
km/h).
• Have your vehicle serviced more often
than at intervals specified in the recom-
mended Maintenance Schedule in the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual.
• When making a turn, your trailer wheels
will be closer to the inside of the turn than
your vehicle wheels. To compensate for
this, make a larger than normal turning
radius during the turn.
• Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-
versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,
possibly causing vehicle sway. When be-
ing passed by larger vehicles, be pre-
pared for possible changes in crosswinds
that could affect vehicle handling.
Do the following if the trailer begins to
sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions
allow. This combination will help stabilize
the vehicle
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering
or applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply
the brakes and pull to the side of the
road in a safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is
balanced as described in this section.
• Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires
considerably more distance than normal
passing. Remember, the length of the
trailer must also pass the other vehicle
before you can safely change lanes.
• Downshift the transmission to a lower
gear for engine braking when driving
down steep or long hills. This will help
slow the vehicle without applying the
brakes.
• Avoid holding the brake pedal down too
long or too frequently. This could cause
the brakes to overheat, resulting in re-
duced braking efficiency.
• Increase your following distance to allow
for greater stopping distances while tow-
ing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake
gradually.
• NISSAN recommends that the cruise
control not be used while towing a trailer.
• Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles
that are towing trailers. Obey the local
speed limits.
• Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness
connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts
after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at
every break.
• When launching a boat, don't allow the
water level to go over the exhaust tail
pipe or rear bumper.
• Make sure you disconnect the trailer
lights before backing the trailer into the
water or the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission oil/
fluid should be changed more fre-
quently. For additional information, see
“Do-it-yourself” (P. 8-2).
Flat towing for all–wheel drive vehicle (if
so equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when
towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-
hicle, such as a motor home.
Technical and consumer information 10-27
CAUTION
•
Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
• Never flat tow your All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) vehicle.
• DO NOT tow your All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) vehicle with any wheels on the
ground. Doing so may cause serious
and expensive damage to the
powertrain.
•
For emergency towing procedures see
“Towing recommended by NISSAN”
(P. 6-13).
Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle
(if so equipped)
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when
towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-
hicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
•
Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
• Whenever flat towing your vehicle,
always tow forward, never backward.
• Never tow your front wheel drive ve-
hicle with the front tires on the
ground. Doing so may cause serious
and expensive damage to the
powertrain.
•
DO NOT tow your front wheel drive con-
tinuously variable transmission vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground (flat
towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal
transmission parts due to lack of trans-
mission lubrication.
• For emergency towing procedures
see “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” (P. 6-13).
Continuously Variable Transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu-
ously variable transmission, an appropriate
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the
towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow
the dolly manufacturer's recommenda-
tions when using their product.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-
ity Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where appli-
cable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to low-
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
sent the tire's ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
10-28 Technical and consumer information
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include ac-
celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat, and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
perature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the mini-
mum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combi-
nation, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-
lowing emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty
Information Booklet which comes with
your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,
you may obtain a replacement by writing
to:
• Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty
Information Booklet which comes with
your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,
you may obtain a replacement by writing
to:
• Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
Technical and consumer information 10-29
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a re-
call and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other in-
formation about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contact-
ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-
ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Trans-
port Canada in addition to notifying
NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
request that NISSAN conduct a recall
campaign. However, Transport
Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
You may contact Transport Canada's
Defect Investigations and Recalls
Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510.
You may also report safety defects
online at: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm (Eng-
lish speakers) or http://www.tc.gc.ca/
fra/securiteautomobile/menu.htm
(French speakers)
Or contact Transport Canada by
mail at:
Transport Canada Motor Vehicle
Safety Investigations Laboratory
80 Noel Street Gatineau, QC J8Z0A1
Additional information concerning
motor vehicle safety may be obtained
from Transport Canada's Road Safety
Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371
or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety
(English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/
securiteroutiere (French speakers).
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
10-30 Technical and consumer information
To notify NISSAN of any safety con-
cerns please contact our Consumer
Information Centre toll free at
1-800-387-0122.
WARNING
A vehicle equipped with All -Wheel
Drive (AWD) should never be tested us-
ing a two wheel dynamometer (such as
the dynamometers used by some
states for emissions testing), or similar
equipment. Make sure you inform the
test facility personnel that your vehicle
is equipped with AWD before it is placed
on a dynamometer. Using the wrong
test equipment may result in drivetrain
damage or unexpec ted vehicle move-
ment which could result in serious ve-
hicle damage or personal injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states
and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
be required to be in what is called the
“ready condition” for an Inspection/
Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission
control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
be obtained by ordinary usage of the
vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is re-
paired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-
tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the
vehicle's inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Place the ignition
switch in the ON position without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-
tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-
dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
Technical and consumer information 10-31
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a ve-
hicle's systems performed. The EDR is de-
signed to record data related to vehicle dy-
namics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-
cord such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
• Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better un-
derstanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN
dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be
accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for
your vehicle. This manual is the same one
used by the factory-trained technicians
working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be
purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of
Genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
model year and prior, please visit the near-
est NISSAN dealer. For the phone number
and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-
resentative will assist you.
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
10-32 Technical and consumer information
11 Index
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system)
.....................1-50
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air
bag system)
................1-57
Air bag warning labels
............1-70
Air bag warning light
..........1-71,2-10
Air bag warning light,
supplemental
..............1-71,2-10
Air cleaner
...................8-16
Air cleaner housing filter
..........8-16
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation
........4-30
Air conditioner specification label
. .10-13
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations
............10-8
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations
............10-8
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped)
..............4-29
Heater and air conditioner controls
.4-30
Servicing air conditioner
........4-32
Alarm system (See vehicle security
system)
.....................2-31
All-Wheel Drive
................5-115
Anchor point locations
...........1-33
Antenna
....................4-33
Anti-lock brake warning light
.....2-9, 2-11
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
.....5-120
Antifreeze
...................5-128
Armrests
.....................1-6
Autolight switch
...............2-38
Automatic
Automatic power window switch
. . .2-63
Automatic anti-glare inside
mirror
..................3-34, 3-35
Automatic door locks
.............3-7
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
. . .2-11
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with
Pedestrian Detection
............5-87
AWD
......................5-115
B
Battery
.................5-128, 8-13
Charge warning light
...........2-9
Battery replacement
............8-23
Key fob
...................8-23
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
.........8-23
Before starting the engine
.........5-16
Belt (See drive belt)
..............8-15
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
.........5-38
Booster seats
.................1-46
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
. . . .5-120
Brake fluid
..................8-11
Brake light (See stop light)
.......8-25
Brake system
...............5-120
Brake warning light
............2-9
Brake wear indicators
.......2-16,8-19
Self-adjusting brakes
...........8-19
Brake Assist
.................5-122
Brake fluid
...................8-11
Brake system
................5-120
Brakes
.....................8-19
Break-in schedule
..............5-114
Brightness control
Instrument panel
.............2-42
Bulb check/instrument panel
........2-9
Bulb replacement
..............8-25
C
C.M.V.S.S. certification label
........10-12
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants
................10-2
Car phone or CB radio
...........4-33
Cargo (See vehicle loading
information)
.................10-15
Cargo area storage bin
...........2-58
Check tire pressure
.............2-27
Child restraint with top tether strap
. . .1-32
Child restraints
.......1-25,1-26,1-27,1-29
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System
.............1-29
Precautions on child
restraints
............1-35, 1-41, 1-46
Top tether strap anchor point
locations
..................1-33
Child safety rear door lock
..........3-7
Cleaning exterior and interior
......7-2,7-4
Cold weather driving
............5-128
Console box
..................2-56
Console light
..................2-67
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)
.......................5-18
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid
......................8-10
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
............5-18
Controls
Heater and air conditioner controls
. .4-30
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants
...............10-2
Changing engine coolant
.........8-5
Checking engine coolant level
......8-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge
. . .2-6
Corrosion protection
..............7-7
Cruise control
.................5-55
Cup holders
..................2-57
D
Day time running light system (Canada
only)
.......................2-41
Day time Running Lights (DRL) system
. .2-41
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch
....................2-36
Dimensions and weights
..........10-10
Dimmer switch for instrument panel
. . .2-42
Door locks
....................3-5
Drive belt
....................8-15
Driving
Cold weather driving
...........5-128
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
............5-18
Precautions when starting and
driving
..................5-4, 5-10
Driving the vehicle
...............5-18
Dynamic driver assistance switch
.....2-48
E
E-call (SOS) Button
..............2-49
Economy - fuel
................5-115
Emergency engine shutoff
.......5-15,6-2
Emission control information label
. . . .10-12
Emission control system warranty
. . . .10-29
Engine
Before starting the engine
........5-16
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants
...............10-2
Changing engine coolant
.........8-5
Changing engine oil
............8-6
Changing engine oil filter
.........8-6
Checking engine coolant level
......8-5
Checking engine oil level
.........8-6
Engine compartment check
locations
...................8-3
Engine coolant temperature gauge
. . .2-6
Engine cooling system
...........8-4
Engine oil
...................8-6
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation
.............10-7
Engine oil pressure warning light
. . . .2-10
Engine oil viscosity
.............10-7
Engine serial number
..........10-12
Engine specifications
...........10-9
Starting the engine
............5-16
Engine coolant temperature gauge
. . . .2-6
Event Data recorders
............10-32
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)
......5-4
Explanation of maintenance items
.....9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance
items
.......................9-5
Ex tended storage switch
..........2-52
Eyeglass case
.................2-56
F
F.M.V.S.S. certification label
.........10-12
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher
switch)
......................6-2
Flat tire
......................6-3
Floor mat positioning aid
...........7-6
Fluid
Brake fluid
..................8-11
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants
...............10-2
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid
......................8-10
Engine coolant
................8-4
Engine oil
...................8-6
Power steering fluid
............8-11
Windshield-washer fluid
.........8-12
11-2
Fog light switch
................2-43
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system)
. . .1-57
Front and rear sonar system
.......5-125
Front power seat adjustment
........1-4
Front seats
....................1-2
Front-door pocket
..............2-53
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants
...............10-2
Fuel economy
...............5-115
Fuel gauge
..................2-7
Fuel octane rating
.............10-6
Fuel recommendation
..........10-4
Fuel-filler cap
................3-29
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever
. . . .3-28
Fuel-filler lid
.................3-29
Loose fuel cap warning
..........2-26
Fuel efficient driving tips
..........5-114
Fuel gauge
....................2-7
Fuel-filler door
.................3-28
Fuses
.......................8-19
Fusible links
...................8-21
G
Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver
.....2-68, 2-69, 2-70, 2-71, 2-72
Gas cap
.....................3-29
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge
. . .2-6
Fuel gauge
..................2-7
Odometer
...................2-5
Speedometer
..............2-4, 2-5
Tachometer
.................2-6
Trip odometer
................2-5
General maintenance
.............9-2
Glove box
....................2-56
Grocery hooks
.................2-59
H
Hazard warning flasher switch
........6-2
Head restraints
.................1-9
Headlight and turn signal switch
.....2-36
Headlight control switch
...........2-36
Headlights
...................8-25
Heated rear seats
...............2-46
Heated seats
..............2-44, 2-45
Heated steering wheel
............2-47
Heater
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped)
...............4-29
Heater and air conditioner controls
. .4-30
Heater operation
..............4-31
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
. .4-29
Hill start assist system
...........5-125
HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver
.....2-68, 2-69, 2-70, 2-71, 2-72
Hood
.......................3-21
Hook
Luggage hook
...............2-59
Horn
.......................2-43
I
Ignition switch
Push-button ignition switch
.......5-13
Immobilizer system
..........2-32, 5-16
Important vehicle information label
. . .10-12
In-cabin microfilter
..............8-17
Increasing fuel economy
..........5-115
Indicator
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
indicator
...................5-15
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders)
.................2-9, 2-11
Inside automatic anti-glare
mirror
...................3-34, 3-35
Instrument brightness control
.......2-42
Instrument panel
.............0-6, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch
.....2-42
Intelligent Around View Monitor
.......4-11
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
.......5-58
Intelligent Drive Alertness (I-DA)
......5-110
Intelligent Forward Collision Warning
(I-FCW )
......................5-98
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range
............3-8
Key operation
................3-10
Mechanical key
................3-3
Remote keyless entry operation
. . . .3-13
Troubleshooting guide
..........3-16
Warning signals
...............3-16
Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)
.....5-32
Interior light
..................2-66
ISOFIX child restraints
.............1-29
11-3
J
Jump starting
..............6-10,8-14
K
Key
.........................3-2
Key fob battery replacement
........8-23
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system)
.......3-13
Keys
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
........3-2,3-7
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys
......................3-4
L
Label
Tire and Loading Information label
. .10-13
Labels
Air conditioner specification label
. . .10-13
C.M.V.S.S. certification label
.......10-12
Emission control information label
. .10-12
Engine serial number
..........10-12
F.M.V.S.S. certification label
........10-12
Tire and Loading Information label
. .10-13
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate
.....................10-11
Warning labels (for SRS)
..........1-70
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
.......5-27
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System
...............1-29
License plate
Installing the license plate
........10-14
Liftgate
......................3-21
Liftgate release
................3-26
Light
Air bag warning light
.........1-71,2-10
Brake light (See stop light)
........8-25
Bulb check/instrument panel
......2-9
Bulb replacement
.............8-25
Charge warning light
............2-9
Console light
................2-67
Ex terior and Interior lights
........8-25
Fog light switch
..............2-43
Fog lights
..................8-25
Headlight and turn signal switch
. . . .2-36
Headlight control switch
.........2-36
Headlights
..................8-25
Interior light
.................2-66
Light bulbs
.................8-25
Low tire pressure warning light
.....2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light
......................2-26
Personal lights
...............2-67
Security indicator light
..........2-10
Spotlights (See map light)
........2-67
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders
................2-9, 2-11
Lights
......................8-25
Map lights
..................2-67
Lock
Child safety rear door lock
.........3-7
Door locks
..................3-5
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever
. . . .3-28
Liftgate release
...............3-26
Power door locks
..............3-6
Loose fuel cap warning
...........2-26
Low fuel warning light
.....2-10,2-14,2-26
Low tire pressure warning light
.......2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light
.......................2-26
Luggage (See vehicle loading
information)
..................10-15
Luggage hook
.................2-59
Luggage rack (see roof rack)
.....2-60, 2-61
M
Maintenance
General maintenance
...........9-2
Inside the vehicle
..............9-3
Maintenance precautions
.........8-2
Outside the vehicle
.............9-3
Seat belt maintenance
..........1-24
Under the hood and vehicle
.......9-4
Maintenance requirements
..........9-2
Maintenance schedules
............9-7
Malfunction indicator light
..........2-13
Manual front seat adjustment
........1-3
Map lights
....................2-67
Map pocket
...............2-53, 2-54
Memory seat
..................3-36
Meters and gauges
..............2-4
Instrument brightness control
.....2-42
11-4
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside
mirror
.................3-34, 3-35
Outside mirrors
..............3-35
Rearview
...................3-34
Vanity mirror
................3-33
Mirrors
......................3-34
Moonroof
.................2-64, 7-5
Moving Object Detection (MOD)
......4-23
N
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
..........3-2,3-7
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge
indicator
.....................5-15
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System
..................2-32, 5-16
NissanConnect® Owner's Manual
......4-2
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating)
. .10-6
Odometer
....................2-5
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants
...............10-2
Changing engine oil
............8-6
Changing engine oil filter
.........8-6
Checking engine oil level
.........8-6
Engine oil
...................8-6
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation
.............10-7
Engine oil viscosity
.............10-7
Outside mirrors
................3-35
Overhead sunglasses holder
........2-56
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats
.........6-12
Owner's manual order form
........10-32
Owner's manual/service manual order
information
..................10-32
P
Parking
Parking/parking on hills
.........5-118
Parking brake
.................5-23
Personal lights
.................2-67
Power
Front seat adjustment
...........1-4
Power door locks
..............3-6
Power outlet
.................2-51
Powerrearwindows
...........2-62
Power steering fluid
............8-11
Power steering system
.........5-119
Power windows
...............2-61
Rear power windows
...........2-62
Power outlet
..................2-51
Power steering
................5-119
Power steering fluid
..............8-11
Precautions
Maintenance precautions
.........8-2
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions
.................5-8
Precautions on booster
seats
...............1-35, 1-41, 1-46
Precautions on child
restraints
............1-35, 1-41, 1-46
Precautions on seat belt usage
.....1-13
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system
....................1-50
Precautions when starting and
driving
..................5-4, 5-10
Push starting
..................6-12
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio
..........4-33
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)
test
.......................10-31
Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)
. . . .2-15, 5-82
Rear center seat belt
.............1-20
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
.......5-47
Rear Door Alert
.........2-25,2-26,2-50
Rear power windows
.............2-62
Rear seat
.....................1-6
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch
......................2-36
Rear window wiper and washer
switches
....................2-35
Rearview mirror
................3-34
RearView Monitor
................4-3
Recommended Fluids
............10-2
Recorders
Event Data
.................10-32
Refrigerant recommendation
.......10-8
Registering a vehicle in another
country
.....................10-11
11-5
Remote Engine Start
..........3-18,5-17
Reporting safety defects (US only)
. . . .10-30
Roof rack
.................2-60, 2-61
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock
.........3-7
Child seat belts
.....1-27,1-35, 1-41, 1-46
Reporting safety defects (US only)
. .10-30
Seat
Memory seat
................3-36
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment
......1-3
Front power seat adjustment
.......1-4
Seat belt
Child safety
.................1-25
Infants and small children
........1-26
Injured person
................1-16
Larger children
...............1-26
Precautions on seat belt usage
.....1-13
Pregnant women
..............1-16
Rear center seat belt
...........1-20
Seat belt extenders
............1-24
Seat belt maintenance
..........1-24
Seat belts
................1-13,7-6
Shoulder belt height adjustment
. . . .1-23
Three-point type with retractor
.....1-17
Seat belt extenders
..............1-24
Seat belt warning light
.........1-16,2-10
Seatback pockets
...............2-54
Seats
Adjustment
..................1-2
Armrests
....................1-6
Front seats
..................1-2
Heated seats
............2-44, 2-45
Manual front seat adjustment
......1-3
Rear seat
...................1-6
Security indicator light
............2-10
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), engine start
.........2-32, 5-16
Security systems
Vehicle security system
..........2-31
Self-adjusting brakes
.............8-19
Service manual order form
........10-32
Servicing air conditioner
...........4-32
Shoulder belt height adjustment
......1-23
Spark plug replacement
...........8-15
Spark plugs
...................8-15
Specifications
.................10-9
Speedometer
...............2-4, 2-5
Spotlights (See map light)
..........2-67
SRS warning label
...............1-70
Standard maintenance
............9-8
Starting
Before starting the engine
........5-16
Jump starting
............6-10,8-14
Precautions when starting and
driving
..................5-4, 5-10
Push starting
................6-12
Starting the engine
............5-16
Starting the engine
..............5-16
Startup display
.................2-18
Steering
Heated steering wheel
..........2-47
Power steering fluid
............8-11
Power steering system
.........5-119
Steering wheel
.................3-31
Stop light
....................8-25
Storage
.....................2-53
Storage tray
..................2-55
Sun visors
....................3-32
Sunglasses case
...............2-56
Sunglasses holder
..............2-56
Sunroof
..................2-64, 7-5
Sunroof (see Moonroof)
...........2-64
Supplemental air bag warning labels
. . .1-70
Supplemental air bag warning
light
.....................1-71,2-10
Supplemental front impact air bag
system
......................1-57
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels
.....1-70
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system
....................1-50
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system)
.......1-50
Switch
Autolight switch
..............2-38
Automatic power window switch
. . .2-63
Fog light switch
..............2-43
Hazard warning flasher switch
......6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch
. . . .2-36
Headlight control switch
.........2-36
Instrument brightness control
.....2-42
Power door lock switch
..........3-6
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch
....................2-36
Rear window wiper and washer
switches
...................2-35
Turn signal switch
.............2-42
11-6
T
Tachometer
...................2-6
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge
. . .2-6
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start
...............2-32, 5-16
Three-way catalyst
...............5-4
Tire
Flat tire
....................6-3
Spare tire
...............6-4, 8-38
Tire and Loading Information label
. .10-13
Tire chains
.................8-34
Tire pressure
................8-27
Tire rotation
.................8-35
Types of tires
................8-33
Uniform tire quality grading
......10-28
Wheel/tire size
...............10-10
Wheels and tires
..........8-27,10-10
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light
.....2-12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
.......................5-5
Top tether strap child restraint
.......1-32
Towing
2-wheel drive models
...........6-15
All-wheel drive models
..........6-14
Flat towing
.............10-27, 10-28
Tow truck towing
..............6-13
Towing load/specification
.......10-22
Trailer towing
...............10-19
Towing a trailer
................10-19
Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
........5-24
Transceiver
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver
. . .2-68,
2-69, 2-70, 2-71, 2-72
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid
......................8-10
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
............5-18
Travel (See registering a vehicle in another
country)
.....................10-11
Trip odometer
..................2-5
Turn signal switch
...............2-42
U
Uniform tire quality grading
........10-28
USB/iPod® Charging Ports
.........4-33
V
Vanity mirror
..................3-33
Vehicle dimensions and weights
.....10-10
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch
......................2-49
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system
.....................5-122
Vehicle identification
.............10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number)
...............10-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate
.......................10-11
Vehicle immobilizer system
.....2-32, 5-16
Vehicle information display
.........2-17
Vehicle loading information
........10-15
Vehicle recovery
.............6-15,6-16
Vehicle security system
...........2-31
Vehicle security system
(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
engine start
...............2-32, 5-16
Vents
.......................4-27
Visors
......................3-32
W
Warning
Air bag warning light
.........1-71,2-10
Anti-lock brake warning light
. . . .2-9, 2-11
Battery charge warning light
.......2-9
Brake warning light
.............2-9
Engine oil pressure warning light
. . . .2-10
Hazard warning flasher switch
......6-2
Loose fuel cap warning
..........2-26
Low fuel warning light
. . . .2-10, 2-14, 2-26
Low tire pressure warning light
.....2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light
......................2-26
Seat belt warning light
.......1-16,2-10
Supplemental air bag warning
light
...................1-71,2-10
Vehicle security system
..........2-31
Warning labels (for SRS)
..........1-70
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders
................2-9, 2-11
Warning lights
...............2-9, 2-11
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders
....................2-8
11-7
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders
.................2-9, 2-11
Audible reminders
..........2-9, 2-11
Indicator lights
.............2-9, 2-11
Warning lights
.............2-9, 2-11
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switches
...................2-35
Weights
(See dimensions and weights)
......10-10
Wheel/tire size
................10-10
Wheels and tires
............8-27,10-10
When traveling or registering in another
country
.....................10-11
Windows
.....................2-61
Locking passengers' windows
.....2-62
Powerrearwindows
...........2-62
Power windows
...............2-61
Rear power windows
...........2-62
Windshield wiper blades
...........8-17
Windshield-washer fluid
...........8-12
Wiper
Rear window wiper and washer
switches
...................2-35
Wiper blades
................8-17
Wiper and washer switch
..........2-33
11-8
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).
CAUTION
• Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel sys-
tem or other damage can occur if
E-85 is used in vehicles that are not
designed to run on E-85.
• Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
• Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because
this will damage the three-way
catalyst.
•
Do not use a fuel containing more than
15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your ve-
hicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol. Us-
ing a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically de-
signed for a fuel containing more than
15% ethanol can adversely affect the
emission control devices and systems
of the vehicle. Damage caused by such
fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use fuel that contains the oc-
tane booster methylcyclopentadi-
enyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
Using fuel containing MMT may ad-
versely affect vehicle performance
and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel
dispensers are labeled to indicate
MMT content, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for
more details. Note that Federal and
California laws prohibit the use of
MMT in reformulated gasoline.
• U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be
identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common ab-
breviation or the appropriate per-
centage for that region.
For additional information, see “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
(P. 10-2).
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
See “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” (P. 10-2).
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
For additional information, see “Tire and
Loading Information label” (P. 10-13).
The label is typically located on the driver
side center pillar or on the driver's door. For
additional information, see “Wheels and
tires” (P. 8-27).
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle. For ad-
ditional information, see “Break-in sched-
ule” (P. 5-114). Failure to follow these recom-
mendations may result in vehicle damage
or shortened engine life.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
2021 NISSAN MURANO Z52-D
Z52-D
Printing : June 2021
Publication No.:
Printed in the U.S.A.
OM21EA 0Z52U1
2021 MURANO
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
